Home

4. Reference

Contents

1. Project Edit View Common Tool Communica i LJ T im i i 3 dy gb q S B Project lz EA KL T IBo j l i Mew n EF Data Viewer p 2 6 i 4 Property Viewer K 1 et Output Bar I EB New Proje dy Graphic Library Project 7 EJ Object Library ia Spel SH Script ToolBox oN S Screen fa Device Map A Pan Window i k in BS Screen Thumbnails I E Grid Setting V 2 Inthe Graphic Library pane click an object to the editing area LSis 84 3 Inthe Graphic List drag and drop the image onto the editing area Graphic Library f B 1 gt Object Library r Graphic Library El Library ge ANIMATION G BASIC_CIRCLE U BASIC_RECTANGLE J BASIC_SQUARE jg INDICATOR_256_R o1 6 INMr_1010_0 INr_1010_1 oe INr_1011_0 INr_1011_1 INr_1012_0 e There are two types of images vector and raster Vector images maintain their shape even if you change the size Raster images may be distorted if you enlarge or reduce the size e When you drag an image to the editing area it is created in its default size The default sizes of images are variable 2 3 6 2 Replacing Images To replace an Image 1 Double click an Image or right click an image and click Object Property 2 Click another image from the list OK 85 2 3 6 3 Setting an Image as a Background 1 Select a category from the Graph
2. 5 Enter the new name and press the Enter key to confirm ees e When you add an object library the name is set to Objecto8193 by default Additional libraries are numbered in ascending order from 8194 to 65535 e User Object Libraries are sorted in ascending order by name LS IS 64 BE To delete a library 1 Inthe Object Library pane right click the library name 2 Click Delete Library Fx 5 SMe oe a X Object Library 1X B 1 i Library jl OBJ_ALARM AND LOGGING on Settin to OBJ KEYPAD Setting EF OBJ_LAMP Ep OBJ_PUSHDOWN_SWITCH z 5 OBJ ROTARY SWITCH Ai en Rename Keypad Export Keypad I Reypac To add objects to a User Object Library click the library name to select it and then drag objects from the editing area to the Object List You can select multiple objects and figures to drag them at once 3 oo oktnir se x Object Library aX B 1 OB _ALARM AND LOGGING oJ OBJ_KEYPAD KJ OBJ_LAMP 2 OBJ_PUSHDOWN_SWITCH 5 OB _ROTARY_SWITCH OBJ_SLIDE_SWITCH OB _TOGGLE_SWITCH g Object08193 65 2 Project Development To delete objects in the Object List right click the object and then click Delete To delete all objects right click an empty area in the Object List and then click Delete All Objects elete All Objects 1 To change the name of an object in the Object List right click the object and the
3. USB Memory HMIManager JSB Card Spec Folder Mame WSB Storage Total Space Used Space Goto MainMenu S785 91 MBytes 2541 22 MBytes Available Space 1242 69 MBytes Write Operation SUCCESS eee d When a USB memory device is inserted and an error message ReadDisk Information Error is displayed reinsert the USB memory device If the error message repeats contact the A S center 575 LSIS 5 3 Viewing Controller Information You can check the connected controller information to the XGT Panel and historical data To view controller information touch PLC Information in the XGT Panel main menu LSIS XGT Panel Settings PLC Information Oo Diagnostics O Update XGT Panel Storage Function Ver 1 30 B 005 e loo You can view the status of a connected controller only after project data is downloaded to the XGT Panel LSis 576 5 3 1 Changing Settings You can change the controller s communication settings To make changes 1 Select a driver from the Driver list N 1 Settings 3 Specify the settings LSIS XGI XGR XEC LINK Timeoutt100 ms fio Wait to Sendims 0 Timeout Retry Count 3 Serial Type Rss TA Baud Rate 28400 e Parity NONE Data Biti 8 stesti T 577 5 Managing an XGT Panel ms e The setting window displayed may vary
4. Time Set the length of time for the action delay Offset in Write Operation Set to use the offset function Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary e Lamp Condition The lamp condition settings for word switch objects include the following Word Switch lw Use Lamp Condition Extended Detail Pa Lamp Condition Action Condition Bit i Bit Device Word Device Ere Size ji bits O NOP 0 Use Lamp Offset Use Lamp Condition If you want to control a lamp with a method other than simply turning it on when the switch is activated you can select a different action Type Select a condition for lamp control Bit When the device state is on the lamp is on When the condition is met the lamp is on Bit If you selected the bit condition type specify a bit device e Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Word If you selected the word condition type specify a word device Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the inp
5. You can also set options for the editing area as described in the following table Description e You can move and arrange objects conveniently with the grids in the editing area e Toshow or hide gridlines click View Grid e You can set the color width and height of the dots on the grid To change the settings click View gt Grid Setting Grid Setting lf Show Grid Grid Color W Snap to Grid Grid Space Width Height 20 Margin Line e The margin line is the boundary of the editing area e Toshow or hide the lines click View gt Margin Line Guide Line e The guide line is the base line for drawing or arranging objects 80 To show or hide the lines click View P Guide Line To draw guide lines place the mouse cursor on the border of the window frame and then drag the line to the editing 4p e Eg area To lock or unlock the guide lines right click the line and then click Guide Line Lock Guide Line To delete the guide line right click the line and then select Guide Line gt Delete Guide Line Object ID Viewer All objects have an ID which makes the objects unique To show or hide the ID select View gt Show hide Object ID You can determine the type of object by its object ID For example an ID that begins with SD refers to a Word Switch Object Address Viewer 81 To view an object address select
6. e Display The display settings for text display objects include the following Transparent BG Image Frame Color Plate Color C T Library Click to select an image from the library Open Click to browse for images on your computer When you select an image from your computer it will be added to the image library automatically Transparent BG Image Click the checkbox to make the image background transparent You cannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time Frame Color Seta frame color Plate Color Set a plate color 387 LSIs e Text The text settings for text display objects include the following General Basic rent Tahom Bin Not Use mi d Size 16 Width Ratio 100 9 Extended Color sir Multilingual ASCI T Tet Pte Color C TH space Font Style Bold talc Strikeout Underline Horizontal Alignment t Let Center C Right Cres Font Select a font from the drop down list Size Set a text size from the drop down list or enter a value directly into the field Color Set a font color Blink Set a blink speed for the object The object will not blink Slow The object will blink every three seconds Normal The object will blink every two seconds The object will blink every second Width Ratio Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop down li
7. Bit F Bit P 0123456789 ABCDEF oww E E E oe og og og og oe og og og og og og 00010 E E oe 8 of oe oF oo og og og og og oe og o2 E E E oe of Foe og oe og ogo og og og LSis 116 3 Enter a device address or click the keypad icon to the right of the device input area to specify a device address Device Map a Bit v Data Type Device Address Descrit b O Po0000 FFE P 0123456789 ABCDEF ae 00000 MRR RRR RRR ee eee _XPLinkParam_ i Falied 00010 BRR RRR REE EEE _XP_VNC Sever Bi XP VN 00020 RRR RRR Ree eee eee _XP_VNC INTER Bi l f 00030 BERR REE EEE EEE ee _XP_Remote_Co 00040 fF fee eee e eee GG Web_Sever_ON 00050 RRR RRR RRR eee eee 00060 M fees eee gee eee 00070 BPR RRR RRR Ree eee Device Address Tag Name Object T 00030 M fe eee egg C 00090 M E E RRR RRR 00100 ff ee egg gg Gg 010 E EERE EERE Eee 00120 BERR REE eee ee 0130 ERE 00140 fF fee egg gee EE 00150 M ff ee Fe egg eG 00160 M E REEREEEEE eee 2 Device Address Tag Name Position Object Ty d P00001 B 2 5B00003 P00001 Testl B 2 SB00004 4 ul j e Address Tag Address Tag lt By address gt lt By tag gt Item Description a Device Type Input a device type to search for Bit or Word b Device Address Input a device address to search for and then press the Enter key c Device Map Show the device addresses in use d Device Reference Show
8. Select From Text Table gt v Language Engish United States x Select a text table na naer and the language wo lM aaa o Registered text table list On lt gt Off Copy Click to copy the text and formatting from the on state to the off state or vice versa Delete On Off Caption Click to clear text settings for the current state Font Select a font from the drop down list Size Set a text size from the drop down list or enter a value directly into the field Width Ratio Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop down list or entering a value directly in to the field You can set a ratio of 1 600 Change the Property of Text Table Click to use different color and font properties for the text than what is specified in the text table This option is active only when you import text from the text table Color Seta font color Font Style Set a font style bold italic strikeout or underline You can apply more than one option at atime Horizontal Alignment Set the horizontal alignment Left Center or Right Vertical Alignment Set the vertical alignment Top Middle or Bottom 282 283 e Detail The detail settings for bit switch objects include the following Bit Switch General lw Security Level g Extended Level I Action Condition M Action Delay Type On Delay Time
9. Return value int The number of byte of the transmitted data Parameter 1 int nCtir The PLC number 0 3 Parameter 2 char pBuffer The data buffer to be transmitted Parameter 3 int nSize The buffer size LSS 248 a 249 4 2 3 8 Understanding Memory Functions The following table describes properties for the memory functions Parameters HIBYTE Obtain the upper byte of the char Upper byte entered word values Parameter 1 int nValue The entered data Example int nValue 0x1234 char nResult nResult HIBYTE nValue LOBYTE Obtain the lower byte of the entered word values Parameter 1 int nValue The entered data Example int nValue 0x1234 char nResult nResult LOBYTE nValue MAKEWOR Obtain word values with two D entered byte values Parameter 1 char cLow Lower E le byte a es Parameter 2 char cHigh char cLow 0x12 cHigh 0x34 Upper byte int nResult nResult MAKEWORD cLow cHigh The result is 0x3412 Memcpy Copy the data from the source BOOL If the buffer to the destination buffer Example char src 9 123456789 dst 4 Memcpy amp src 2 amp dst o 4 Return value Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 number is beyond the range of the buffer FALSE is returned char pDstData The destination buffer char pSrcData The source buffer to be copied int nDataSize The number of data to be copied char number Memse
10. The project header information is corrupt or incorrect The project ID is not correct The project IDs in XP Builder and the XGT Panel are different Transfer the entire project to the XGT Panel Refer to lt 2 6 1 Transferring to anXGT Panel gt The selectable display numbers are from 1 to 4095 The range of acceptable display numbers has been exceeded 164 165 Check the number and enter again How to Resolve the Error Specify a display number between 1 and 4095 The simulator cannot be executed The simulator file does not exist You must create a new simulator file The total number of figures should be larger than the number of figures below the decimal point Set the total number of figures larger than the number of figures below the decimal point The upload file is the same as the opened project file and cannot be saved Do you want to specify another directory You cannot overwrite the project file because it is open Click Yes to select another destination for the file or Cancel to discontinue saving the file To overwrite the project file ensure the original file is closed and then try again The XGT Panel model does not match the model set in the editor This error occurs when you attempt to transfer a project to an XGT Panel model that is not the same as you have set in the project properties Change the XGT Panel model n the project properties or transfer th
11. Use Lamp Offset Description Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Copy to Lamp Click to copy the device address from a bit switch to a lamp object Action Type Set an operation to perform when the switch is activated Turns on the relevant bit device in the PLC when the switch is activated The state is preserved until changed by another action Turns off the relevant bit device in the PLC when the switch is activated The state is preserved until changed by another action Momentary Turns on the relevant bit device in the PLC only while the switch object is held The state returns to off when the switch is released Alternative Switches the relevant bit device value to the opposite state when the switch is activated If the object is on when the switch is activated it will turn off and vice versa Use Lamp Condition If you want to control a lamp with a method other than simply turning it on when the switch is activated you can select a different action When the device state is on the lamp is on Copy to Main Lamp conditions bit device address is copied to the basic device of bit switch When the condition is met the lamp is on Signed decimal unsigned de
12. 499 e Display Trigger The display trigger settings for the history viewer alarm object include the following Alarm History General W Use Action Condition qj Extended T Pa Display Trigger ne f Bit On C Bit Of t Range C Multi Bit Device Device W EE Range Size 16bits Type Unsigned DEC ONOP 0 Multi Bit No of Bt Device Seting Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specified range Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation mE result of multiple devices is met Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary 4 Reference Range If you select the range condition specify the range Siz 16bitor32bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Exp Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 4 3 10 Data List Object The da
13. Grid Setting Position Scale Change Fit window to Shape Max size Insert the selected shapes to active graphic library The image is added to the library in WMF format bin Graphic Library e You cannot register objects or images in WMF format e Figures filled with patterns 3 41 cannot be registered in WMF format e Figures with textures cannot be registered in WMF format 97 To delete an image 1 Inthe Graphic List right click an image 2 Click Delete Image O1 png To delete all images right click an empty space in the Graphic List and then click Delete All Images You can share your libraries between projects To export the user image library 1 Inthe Graphic Library pane right click a library to export 2 Click Export S i LS Is 98 99 LSIs 3 Enter a name for the file and set the file destination 4 Click Save mes e The exported library is saved with the file extension xpg e fthere are no images in the library you cannot export the library You can either import a library into the project as a new library or you can import images into an existing user image library To import a new library 1 Inthe Graphic Library pane right click Library 2 Click Import Graphic Library H BASIC RECTANGLE J BASIC_SQUARE T n a E gt PATTERN_R gt PIPE 256R 2
14. Protocol Fera Detail Settings Timeout Wait to send 0 ms Retry count T Use XG5000 simulator Program monitor 2 Select the PLC and manufacturer from the drop down list If necessary click Detail Settings and change the properties ee d To delete a controller select it from the list and click Delete Controller 143 LSIS 2 7 2 Using 1 N Communication with RS485 When setting up 1 N communication with RS485 you can connect a large number of controllers as long as they are all the same type and make of controller The RS485 connection uses only one port and therefore can be assigned only one connection number With a RS485 connection you can also set station numbers for devices in the advanced communication settings so that the same device can be referenced by multiple controllers A multi drop setup of 1 N communication with RS48s is illustrated by the following image XGT Panel O H R5485 Controllers 144 2 Project Development To use 1 N communication with RS48s5 1 In XP Builder click Common P Project Property Setting XGT Panel Settings Storage Settings Global Script Settings Auxiliary Settings lix Series 248i color mode AS 232C SY power supply ixPB0 TTA Add Controller Delete Controller v1 23 fesis AAK LINK Referto manual 30 100ns Wait to send 0H ms Retry count 34 Use XG5000 simulat
15. Touch Calibration Touch sensitivity Touch Calibration 2 Atarget will appear on the screen in random positions Touch the target five times to complete calibration afully press and briefly hold stylus on the center of the tard Repeat as the target moves around the screen Press the Esc key to cancel Notes e Take care during calibration to make single point contact with the screen If multiple 555 LSIs points are touched simultaneously the wrong point may be recognized e Touch control is the default setting for XGT Panel A USB connected mouse can also be used e Toaccess the Touch Setting screen touch an empty space in the menu screen five times 5 1 3 Adjusting Date and Time 1 Touch DateTime Setting System Configuration Date 1 12 10 Time L442 AM The date and time can also be adjusted from XP Builder using Communication gt XGT Panel Information LSis 556 5 1 4 Environment Settings Use these settings to configure the operating environment for your XGT Panel 1 Touch Environment Setting System Configuration Ch DateTime Setting Auto Goto Screen Quick Start Hide Mouse Cursor Buzzer On Disable Menu Bar e Reset USB Power Enable Arabic Fonts Always Show Title Window AS 232C 5Y Power Supply Set Background Image Delete Background Image Clear Data Auto Goto Screen The work screen will be displayed automatically
16. XP Runtime Update Select USB Cancel LSis 594 SanDisk SD Gemini SOM SLfts UFD SanDisk Cruzer Use The selected device is indicated with an asterisk Vendor Name The device manufacturer Product Name The device name Up down Move to the next or previous item Select Save your selection Cancel Exit without saving changes 595 LSis n 4 Touch Select To select a storage device while monitoring a project on the XGT Panel touch Start to open the Select USB Storage window Select a USB device and touch Select gba ABA EDY Select USB Storage 3 No Recipe Storage 3 No Memo Backup Storage 3 No Alarm Backup Storage 3 No Screen Backup Storage 3 No Recipe Backup Storage 3 No Logging Backup Storage Select USB storage SanDisk SAMSUNG Product Name SD Gemini UFD J Cancel Logging 1 Lt 2 O o Ja 226 2013 08 13 11 44 56 0 225 2013 08 13 11 44 65 0 223 2013708713 11 44 53 0 SIN AEH 4 220 2013 08 13 11 44 52 0 EAN E n 8 If the selected device is disconnected or if another device is connected the Select USB Storage window appears again Select USB Storage Select USB storage Product Name SAMSUNG UFD SanDisk Cruzer SanDisk SD Gemini Enable control by XP Remote 10 596 597 Do not remove or turn off the selected U
17. int pRetValue The value returned from the device e fa device address exceeds the upper limit data will not be copied LS Is 246 4 2 3 7 Understanding Communication Functions The following table describes properties for the communication functions ADD_SUM Calculate and return the sum of entered data Example int nResult char buf 5 2 2 3 4 53 ADD_SUM amp buffo 5 amp nResult Parameters Return value BOOL If the number is beyond the range of the buffer FALSE is returned buffer for calculation Parameter 2 int nCount The byte number to be calculated calculated value ADD_SUM_1 S Calculate and return the sum of entered data and 1 s complement Example int nResult char buf 5 1 2 3 4 53 ADD_SUM_1S amp buffo 5 amp nResult Return value BOOL If the number is beyond the range of the buffer FALSE is returned buffer for calculation int nCount The byte number to be calculated calculated value ADD_SUM_2S Calculate and return the sum of entered data and 2 s complement Example int nResult char buf 5 1 2 3 4 53 ADD_SUM_2S amp buf o 5 amp nResult Return value BOOL If the number is beyond the range of the buffer FALSE is returned buffer for calculation Parameter 2 int nCount The byte hold number to be calculated calculated value CRC16 247 Calculate and return the 16 bit CRC value of entered
18. lt Part gt lt E g Top Left gt Top Left Align the upper left corner of the part with the upper left corner of the object Center Center the part over the object Top Right Align the upper right corner of the part with the upper right corner of the object Bottom Right Align the lower right corner of the part with the lower right corner of the object Bottom Left Align the lower left corner of the part with the lower left corner of the object 410 es e Ifthe data size or type are changed the input and display condition are deleted e Ifthe Display Part Screen setting changes to Indirect the input and display condition are deleted e If an area of the part is extends beyond the borders of the basic window only the area inside the borders will be displayed e The placement points for the Window and Part objects are as follows Window Object The start point of the edited window screen Part Object The start point where the parts are drawn in the edited part screen e When the Screen Type setting is Storage Image and the Display Part Screen setting is Indirect the image from the storage device that corresponds to the current control device is displayed Position Set a device to control values for relative location of the part for Fixed XY Line and Route paths The size of the path position device is fixed at 16 bit The maximum and minimum values restrict the path of a part base
19. on state You must input the text in a text table Off Click to configure options for the object in the off state You must input the text in a text table From Text Table Click the checkbox to add text from a text table The Text Table option will be activated and the text input area will close Add the required text to the text table before editing the object You must select text for the on and off states from the same text table 289 Text Table Click to open the text table and select text The color and font properties set in the text table will be imported with the text Select From Text Table v Language Engish United States x Select a text table na naer and the language Registered text table list On lt gt Off Copy Click to copy the text and formatting from the on state to the off state or vice versa Delete On Off Caption Click to clear text settings for the current state Font Select a font from the drop down list Size Set a text size from the drop down list or enter a value directly into the field Width Ratio Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop down list or entering a value directly in to the field You can set a ratio of 1 600 Change the Property of Text Table Click to use different color and font properties for the text than what is specified in the text ta
20. on state to the off state or vice versa Delete On Off Caption Click to clear text settings for the current state Font Select a font from the drop down list Size Set a text size from the drop down list or enter a value directly into the field Width Ratio Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop down list or entering a value directly in to the field You can set a ratio of 1 600 Change the Property of Text Table Click to use different color and font properties for the text than what is specified in the text table This option is active only when you import text from the text table Color Seta font color Font Style Set a font style bold italic strikeout or underline You can apply more than one option at atime Horizontal Alignment Set the horizontal alignment Left Center or Right Vertical Alignment Set the vertical alignment Top Middle or Bottom 298 e Detail The detail settings for change screen switch objects include the following Change Screen Switch General j Extended lw Security Level Level 1 Action Condition Action Delay Type On Delay m Device Security Level Set whether or not to require a password to use the object Level Set the security level for the object The higher the security level the shorter the authorization time when the password is entered When the authorization
21. 1 lt 100ms W Offset in Write Operation Device al Security Level Set whether or not to require a password to use the object Level Set the security level for the object The higher the security level the shorter the authorization time when the password is entered When the authorization time expires the user must enter the password again to use the object Action Delay Set to delay the action triggered by the switch by a specified time Type Set the type of action delay On Delay When the switch is activated the action is performed after the delay time that you specify Off Delay When the switch is released the action is performed after the delay time that you specify Press Twice When the switch is activated once a dialog box is invoked to allow the user to verify the operation When the switch is activated a second time the action is performed after the delay time that you specify Time Set the length of time for the action delay Offset in Write Operation Set to use the offset function Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary e Action Condition The action condition settings for bit switch objects include the following Bit Switch General Wo Use A
22. 192 158 1 200 2143 Ver 1 300 gt unnamed RUN mode Build Version 0 0O 192 1658 1 66 2143 Ver 1 240 gt unnamed RUN mode Build Version 0 4 m t 2 6 1 3 Using a USB Connection To use a USB connection you must use an XPO USBC model cable manufactured by LSIS The USB cable is not provided with the XGT Panel so you must purchase one separately A USB connection provides 1 1 communication between a computer and a control device ees e To use a USB connection connect the controllers first through the serial port or by Ethernet e Only XP series panels support this function USB connection is supported by XGT Panel operating software versions 1 24 and up LSis 132 2 Project Development To use a USB connection 1 Install the XGT Panel USB driver in XP Builder click Communication gt XGT Panel Information Communication Window Toolbc gA Comm Setting IL XGT Panel Update 2 Click the Settings tab and then click Install next to the Install Update XGT Panel USB driver option Settings Refresh Close Connect a USB cable to the USB port on the XGT Panel and an open a USB port ona computer When a USB cable is connected to the XGT Panel a USB icon appears at the bottom left of the display 4 In XP Builder select Communication gt Send gt Settings gt USB 133 LSIs ee 2 6 1 4 Using an A
23. 5 6 1 6 Path for Still Image Backup Camera and Movie Still Images e A directory named Movie Still will be created in the USB CF SD storage directory e Recorded movie clips will be saved in the Movie Still directory e Saved still frame image files have hour minute and second information as their filename Backup files will be created in JPG format Filenames will begin with STL representing Still and the rest of the name will contain hour minute and second index information Movie clip files can hold up to 1000 files and the number of files can be set in XP Builder s special device configuration 601 0 e If time is set ahead of present time normal operation is guaranteed However if time is set behind present time normal operation is not guaranteed If this situation arises hour unit directories and all subdirectories should be deleted to resume normal operation For example if the date setting had been changed from 10th December to 5th December Year Month directories including 5th December will have to be deleted to enable normal operation to resume e Logging Recipe Screen Image and Memo functions do not support project classification For instance if Project A has logging groups numbered 1 2 and 3 and each logging group creates a file backup 1 2 3 directory will be created and each file will be saved in a subdirectory Then if Project B has logging groups numbered 1 and 2 download
24. General M Use Caption From Text Table Basic Display On Of ee a ere Giu On OF Copy Font t Tahoma 7 Delete On Caption Size 120 Width Ratio 100 Font Style Bold italic Strikeout Underline Horizontal Alignment Left Center t Right Vertical Alignment c Top Cos Use Caption Click the checkbox to use a text caption with the object When you select this option you can input text from a Text Table On Click to configure options for the object in the on state You must input the text in a text table Off Click to configure options for the object in the off state You must input the text in a text table From Text Table Click the checkbox to add text from a text table The Text Table option will be activated and the text input area will close Add the required text to the text table before editing the object You must select text for the on and off states from the same text table 327 Text Table Click to open the text table and select text The color and font properties set in the text table will be imported with the text Select From Text Table gt v Language Engish United States x Select a text table na naer and the language a Registered text table list Ko 0 2 c Ss e e 9o lay On lt gt Off Copy Click to copy the text and formatting from the on state to t
25. IC EEE Cancel Cursor Set the movement type for using the automatic cursor Focus Type Set a method for moving the cursor If you select Touch the user must touch the input field to move the cursor The flow for the Touch method is as follows Use 379 If you select Input Permit Device the cursor moves only when the Input Permit Bit Device is on Input Permit Device ON OFF OFF Input Permit Bit Device Set to move the cursor only when the bit device is switched on Clear Type Set whether or not to clear input data automatically when switching to input mode Keypad Set whether or not to use a key window for data input Use Keypad setin Set whether or not to use the keypad specified in the key Input Object window settings Enter the number of the key window or click Browse to locate the key window Use User Keypad Set whether or not to specify a location for the key Position window If you do not specify the location the key window will appear at the upper left or upper right of the screen Use Auto Cursor Set whether or not to use the auto cursor function When the user touches Enter while entering data in a key window the cursor moves to the next input field automatically ma ea E eel 4 5 6 Crear 4 5 6 cea cear T g TE ee oe C eaa ORE COS a SS ES amp Input Order Specify the sequence number of the window to control AOM amr SOn Use Group Specify the s
26. LSIs n 4 Reference e Operation The operation settings for word window objects include the following General i Use Script Basic ae Select Script Operation Script Extended Use Script Click the checkbox to use a script with the object Select Script Select a script from the drop down list Script When you select a script it appears here To modify a script refer to lt 4 2 Scripts gt e Detail The detail settings for word window objects include the following Word Window General Extended g Device W Ofset Offset Click the checkbox to use the offset function You can offset the device address based on the value of the offset device For example if the starting device address is P100 XP Builder reads the value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value If the offset value is 10 for example then the referenced device address is P110 The offset function behaves differently if a read device is set When a read device is set the offset is only applied to the writing device If a read device is not set the offset is applied to both read and write devices Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary 401 4 3 6 Part Objects You can us
27. The logging area has not been set The logging storage area has not been specified Specify the storage area in the logging area settings 4014 The path of the object to backup the logging has not been specified The logging backup path has not been specified Specify the backup path in the logging properties 4015 The setting of the device to log is not correct The maximum device size that can be set by the number of the devices has been executed The maximum number of devices to log has been exceeded Reduce the number of device to log until it is within the maximum 4016 Redundant setting has been found in the control device of logging XX Redundancy of control devices is not permitted Two logging control devices have the same number Change one of the devices to a unique number 5000 Setting of the alarm number storage device is not correct The device has not been specified Specify the device in the alarm properties 5001 The flow alarm supervisory device setting is incorrect or setting has not been done for all the registered alarms All required devices have not been specified or a device address is incorrect Specify a device or verify specified devices in the flow alarm settings 5002 The flow alarm supervisory devices have been redundantly set Two flow alarm devices have the same number Change one of the devices to a unique number 5003 The
28. XP Builder allows you to develop complex but simple to use interfaces for controlling machines You can add figures objects and graphics to represent functions or use scripts to define processes XP Builder also allows you to simulate projects and debug them before transferring them to an XGT Panel 2 1 Creating a project Learn how to start or open a project 2 1 1 Starting a New Project To create a new project 1 When you launch XP Builder the Select Project window appears Click Create Project to create a project Select Project Open Project if Show this Diaglog at Start Up e To open a saved file select Open Project e You can also create a file by selecting Project New Project 2 Set the panel series model name the controller manufacturer and the controller model Product ixP80 TTA 12 1 Inch COM1 RS 232C 200 x 600 Picels OMZ TFT Color LED USB 65536 Colors CF card 128 MB None Lsis LSIs AGK LINK 3 If necessary click Communication Settings and specify connection properties For more details about connection properties refer to lt 2 4 Connecting Controllers gt 4 Click Finish or OK oe e You can view XGT Panel specifications when you create a project by selecting the XGT Panel series and model RS 232C RS 232C RS 422 RS 485 4 Ports Maker Lsis v Product Lsis XGK LINK
29. you set the Original Size option 413 LSIs General Operation Extended Case List Create delete or reorganize conditional expressions 4 Create Click to create a new range condition You can create up to eight conditions Clicking this button opens the Range Edit window which allows you to create a condition For more information refer to lt 4 2 1 3 Understanding Constants and Data Types gt x Delete Click a condition and then click this icon to delete the Lannea condition Up Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higher in the list Down Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lower mean in the list LSis 414 4 Reference e Operation The operation settings for word part objects include the following General W Use Script Basic i Case Select Script Script Use Script Click the checkbox to use a script with the object Select Script Select a script from the drop down list Script When you select a script it appears here To modify a script refer to lt 4 2 Scripts gt 415 LSis e Detail The detail settings for word part objects include the following Word Part W Offset q Extended dp Device Display Trigge Offset Click the checkbox to use the offset function You can offset the device address based on the value of the offset device For example if the starting device address i
30. 4 Reference Clock Type Set a clock type System Clock Set to show the system time in the clock Logging Trend Set to show logging data in the clock Set a logging trend Clock option most recent time oldest time or cursor time Description Enter a description for the object e Display The display settings for the clock object include the following Penes Transparent BG Image Basic ap Frame Color Text Plate Color Extended Library Click to select an image from the library Open Click to browse for images on your computer When you select an image from your computer it will be added to the image library automatically Transparent BG Image Set whether or not to make the background transparent Frame Color Set a frame color only available with vector images Plate Color Set a background color from the image LSis 528 e Text The text settings for the clock object include the following General ee Tahoma _ Font Tahoma Display Size 14 Width Ratio 100 gt J Extended Color Font Style Bold f tlic Strikeout Underline Font Select a font from the drop down list Size Set a text size from the drop down list or enter a value directly into the field Width Ratio Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop down list or entering a value directly in to the field You can set a ratio of 1 600
31. 533 message 332 movie player 536 numeric 344 part 402 recipe navigator 515 resizing or relocating 75 rotating 74 switch 277 text 344 window 392 object library inserting objects 60 managing 62 object library pane 62 object list 62 object script 218 operator assignment 222 bit 222 increment decrement 223 logical 221 mathematical 222 relational 221 pane position customizing 11 part adding 46 pie graph object 428 PIR sensor 553 Program Monitor about 539 changing device value 546 changing display format 545 managing programs 543 monitoring from XGT Panel 541 monitoring via special switch 542 selecting programs 542 supported PLCs 539 window 540 project backing up 139 evaluating size memory usage 118 managing 124 receiving from XGT Panel 137 saving 16 setting a password 17 starting 13 transferring to removable drive 135 transferring to XGT Panel 124 project properties changing 20 configuring 17 editing 19 viewing 19 realtime scatter graph object 481 recipe 174 202 results pane error codes 152 RS 232 connection 104 128 170 RS 485 connection 107 146 safe removal switch 607 schedule 174 216 schedule script 218 screen See window script 174 about 218 commands 220 comments 219 communication functions 247 constant 225 creating 228 data conversion functions 251 data types 225 device functions 245 display change 232 errors 219 lo
32. 575 XP Builder concept 1 installing 4 interface 6 updating 5 XP Remote 561 ed Choice LS values every single customers Quality and service come first at LSIS Always at your service standing for our customers LS IS Co Ltd a HEAD OFFICE LS tower Hogye dong Dongan gu Anyang si Gyeonggi do 1026 6 Korea http www lsis com Tel 82 2 2034 4870 Fax 82 2 2034 4648 e mail cshwang lsis com m LSIS Tokyo Office _ Tokyo Japan Address 16FL Higashi Kan Akasaka Twin Tower 17 22 Akasaka Monato ku Tokyo 107 8470 Japan Tel 81 3 3582 9128 Fax 81 3 3582 2667 e mail jschuna Ilsis com a LSIS ME FZE _ Dubai U A E Address Jafza View Tower Lob 19 Room 205 Along Sheikh Zayed Road Jebel Aali Free Zone Dubai United Arab Emirates Tel 971 4 886 5360 Fax 971 4 886 5361 e mail jungyongl lsis com m LSIS Shanghai Office _ Shanghai China Address Room E G 12FL Hiamin Empire Plaza No 726 West Yan an Road Shanghai 200050 P R China e mail liyong Isis com cn Tel 86 21 5237 9977 609 Fax 89 21 5237 7189 LSIS Beijing Office _ Beijing China Address B Tower 17FL Beijing Global Trade Center B D No 36 East BeisanHuan Road DongCheng District Beijing 100013 P R China Tel 86 10 5825 6027 666 Fax 86 10 5825 6028 e mail xunmj Isis com cn m LSIS Guangzhou Office _ Guangzhou China Address Room 1403 14FL New Poly Tower 2 Zhongshan Liu Road Guangzhou P R China Tel 86 20 8328 6754 Fax 8
33. Alarm Display Mum Y Axis T Y Axis Y Asis A Akis TA Axis X Axis E Extended 1 Constant 65535 0 Constant 65535 0 Max Min Setting Max Min Setting Specify the following options for the maximum minimum setting e Y Axis Type X Axis Type You can set the minimum and maximum value as many as the items of logging distribution charts added at Basic Settings Namely you cannot add or delete the items on the minimum and maximum value The type of the minimum and maximum value can be established as Constant or Device 474 475 Y Axis Max Y Axis Min You can set the minimum and maximum values of data to be displayed on the Y axis You can use a device value or a constant If the device value exceeds the minimum or maximum it is displayed as the minimum or maximum value of the graph E e a a m t wa a wu 1 b T 4 A I a X Axis Max X Axis Min You can set the minimum and maximum values of data to be displayed on the X axis You can use a device value or a constant If the device value exceeds the minimum or maximum value it is displayed as the minimum or maximum value of the graph The X axis displays the device values in order so you do not need to designate a minimum or maximum value e Line and Dot The line and dot settings for the logging scatter graph object include the following Use Li Line C Line T Use Dot Dot C Dot Ty
34. Click a condition and then click this icon to delete the condition Up Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higher in the list Down Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lower in the list Bit Operation Click to set a condition for a bit switch For more information about bit switches refer to lt 4 3 2 1 Bit Switch gt Word Operation Click to set a condition for a word switch For more information about word switches refer to lt 4 3 2 2 Word Switch gt Change Screen Click to set a condition for a window change switch For more information about window change switches refer to lt 4 3 2 3 Change Screen Switch gt me ee The change window switch must be the last switch when using multiple switches This switch will be moved to the end of the operation list automatically Print Screen Click to set a condition for a print screen switch For more information about print screen refer to lt 4 3 2 4 Special Switch gt Change Language Click to set a condition for a change language switch For more information about change language refer to lt 4 3 2 4 Special Switch gt Special Operation Click to set a condition for a special operation switch For more information about special switch refer to lt 4 3 2 4 Special Switch gt Note Language and window switching operate independently even though both are special switches Description
35. Color Seta font color Font Style Set a font style bold italic strikeout or underline You can apply more than one option at a time 929 Display Trigger The display trigger settings for the clock object include the following General M Use Action Condition Extended Pag Display Trigger Type f Bit On 0 Bit OF C Range C Multi Bit Device Device W E Range Size 16bits Type Unsigned DEC lo NOF 0 Multi Bit No of Bit Device Seting Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the Opto AS Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multiple devices is met Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you select the range condition specify the range Constants are based on device size 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Exp Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you selec
36. Communication Settings Ber E Pe e Ifthe computer or panel you are working with does not have the font installed data may not be represented properly To solve this problem install or export fonts as LSiIs OK a Libraries a E Documents d E My Documents 4 LSIS XP Builder 1 30 di Public Documents Project files in XP Builder are saved with the extension xpd You can only import these types of project files to XP Builder The file extension for the executable file transferred to an XGT Panel is hmi The file extension for the user object library is xpo The file extension for the user graphic library is xpg The extensions for common data types are shown in the following table Text table Recipe and Tag CSV History alarm HAL Flow alarm FAL Logging LOG Scheduler SCH Script rT 15 LSis n 2 1 2 Saving a Project To save a project 1 Click Project Save Project Xi XP Builder Project Edit View Common Tool Comr _ New Project Ctrl h Close Project 1 Open Project corl o ry Save Project Ctrl s Save As Project amp Print Ctrl P f Print Preview Project Print Print Setting a Project Password 1 CrUserstthst Desktop traa xpd 2 ASWXGL full closed xpd 3 AttMotion_Kit_XGK_ xpd 4 Arfttest xpd a Exit e You can also select the save project icon from the toolbar e To save the file with another nam
37. Complete device File type CSVfile Encrypted CSV file File name device O E BYTE swap of file name File name length le bytes Append data to CSY file Number of backup data in CSV fie 1024 4 Set the location for backup data in the Storage for backup data field 5 Click Setting CSV file format 6 Specify the following options a Ss a Data format ory MADD HARMS Signed Dec Data Informatio Decimal digits era fill Apply all the logging From Text Table Set to import header information from a text table Header Specify a header for the backup file If you select the From Text Table option click Header to locate the table 4 Reference Function Data Format Description Set the format for displaying time and data Digits Set how many digits are used for data Decimal Digits Set how many decimal digits are used for data Zero Fill If you have selected right justification select this option to insert a o before the number Apply all the Logging Click to change the backup type for all log data Close Save your changes and close the dialog box Data Information The number of data columns shown varies based on the number of logging devices specified 201 LSis 4 1 4 Recipes You can use recipes to save and reuse process data You can write or read data to a large number of consecutive contro
38. Enter a description for the object 324 e Display The display settings for multi switch objects include the following MultiAction Switch General Transparent BG Image Image Type Basic Ise Image Reverse f Not Change Color Pattem gt Display Use Image Reverse Text f Same Image amp Change Color Pattem E Extended Pattem FG Color hl Ba uZ aa ET Pattem BG Color PNEEMNZ Lj HEITIR EEES Frame Color Transparent BG Image Click the checkbox to make the image background transparent You cannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time Use Image Reverse The switch image is reversed when you tap the object ora condition is met If you set this option you cannot use the Transparent BG Image option or the On Off image If you set the Transparent BG Image option you cannot use this option On Click to configure options for the object in the on state Off Click to configure options for the object in the off state Image Type Set whether or not to change colors and patterns when switching between on and off states If you select the change color or pattern option you must select a vector image for the object To view characteristics of raster or vector images refer to lt 2 3 6 4 Managing Image Libraries gt Not Change Color Pattern Use the original image You can apply the pattern or color to the image Select t
39. Examples for each style are as follows e AB 2Terms 0 lt 0 e ABC 3 Terms And o lt Device Value lt 100 Salem Function Description e ABC 3 Terms Or 10 gt Device Value OR Device Value gt 100 b Preview Displays a preview of the conditional expression Conditional Sentence c Conditional Select the operand you want to modify and set the expression operator editing item d Constant Set the operand type at a fixed value e V Pivot Use the current device as an operand in the expression Device Displayed as V in the preview f Other Specify another device value variable as an operand in Device the expression Ns If a word device is set as the alarm monitoring device the condition must be registered in a text table and linked to the word alarm device The alarm condition is a single conditional expression consisting of two or three terms linked by and or or conditions Conditional expressions must meet the following requirements e Each term should be separated by a blank space e The current device address is expressed by V If V is entered it is automatically recognized as the standard device when the project is transferred to an XGT Panel The current device must be included at least once in the expression e Each conditional expression must include at least one device variable e The available operators are lt gt lt gt and 212 213 LS I
40. General List Form Main No of Row 34 Format Date Time No of Col 5 Date Yro ZMM DD Space 1 X axis o Hri Time HH MM 55 Oldest Latest Plate Color _ Line Color a Line Width 1H List Form Specify the form of the list Set the number of rows No of Col Set the number of columns Specify the size of the area where the data will be shown 0 to 32 for each axis Frame Display Set whether or not to use a frame Set the frame color Plate Color Set the background color for the table Set the line color for the frame Line Width Set the line width for the frame 507 LSIs 4 Reference e Header The header settings for the logging viewer object include the following General Main Display gt Hacer 7 Use Header Plate Color Common Dispaly Format Text Extended Data Format Unsigned DEC Zero Fill Digits 5 No of Decimal Digits Header Edit From TextTable in Header Edit Fit to a mas length of the header ener ove vate ie vee ve semen oe wie wie we ve Index Unsigned Unsigned Unsigned Unsigned Unsigi eel Pa aa Set the background color for the header Set the text color for the header LS Is Common Display Format Set this option to apply the settings to all index data To change the data use the Header Edit option Zero Fill No of Decimal Digit S Set how many digits to d
41. If the device size and type is unsigned 16 bit you must set the conditional range between o and 65535 XX is not a 32 bit BCD data type Enter a value between 0 99999999 If the device size and type is 32 bit BCD you must set the conditional range between o and 99999999 XX is not a 32 bit signed data type Enter a value between 2147483648 and 2147483647 If the device size and type is signed 32 bit you must set the conditional range between 2147483648 and 2147483647 A mobile GIF cannot be used as an image of an object figure Select another image type Atemporary directory isa place to store a temporary XGT file so you cannot save or open a file here You cannot save or open files in the temporary directory Specify another file location Caption XX cannot be all displayed with the currently set font YY Choose the font meeting the entered contents How to Resolve the Error This error occurs when the selected font cannot display the double byte characters used in the caption Change the font or translate the caption into a language that is supported by the selected font Changed into an indirect method All the expressions of the built conditional sentences are deleted This message appears when the method of selecting the message or display for the word message word component or word window has been changed from Status to Condition Communicati
42. If you have selected right justification select this option to insert zeroes o before the number Zero Display Set whether or not to show zeroes If you do not set this option the object displays nothing when the device value is o 370 4 Reference Display Mode Set an option for the color of the message based on the background color Transparent Display the message transparently in contrast to the background image Display the message in a color that is easily distinguished from the background image e Display Trigger The display trigger settings for numeric display objects include the following General Extended Detail Range Multi Bit Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action 371 LSIs Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the 2 peaa R Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation NN settetmitpeseeetene r Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you select the range condition specify the range Size 16 b
43. Main base 13 57 Main base 16 03 Main base 18 23 Main base 00 30 Main base 08 14 Main base 08 14 Main base 09 24 Main base e Controllers that can view this option are GLOFA GM CPU FEnet Cnet XGK XGB XGI XGR CPU FEnet Cnet e The MASTER K CPU model does not have the power off history option LSis 582 5 Managing an XGT Panel 5 3 3 Ladder Program Monitoring The XGK series allows ladder program monitoring To monitor the ladder program touch Program Monitor 0 LSIS XGI XGR XEC LINK y a es e The Program Monitor modules are installed in the XGT Panel through XP Manager e Set the driver as LSIS XGK XGB CPU Cnet Enet 583 LSIs a 5 Managing an XGT Panel 5 3 4 Setting Up N 1 Communication This option sets up the XGT Panel to connect with multiple controllers For more details refer to lt 2 7 3 Using N 1 Communication gt To set up N 1 Communication 1 Touch N 1 Settings 0 LSIS XGI XGR XEC LINK Z 2 Specify the options below H 1 Settings Use N 1 Select to use N 1 Communication Communication N 1 Station Select the station number for N 1 Communication Number Number of XGT Select the number of XGT Panels to connect Panels LSIs 084 5 Managing an XGT Panel Master Holding Set the master holding time sec Time sec 585 LSis SS 5 4 Updating the XGT Panel You can update the XGT Panel sof
44. No of Display Digits 5 No of Decimal Digits 0 Format Truncated Digits I jw Use Scaling Min of Dev Value 0 x Min of Out Value 0 Max of Dev Value 100 Max of Out Value 100 Description Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Size Set a data size 16 bit or 32 bit If you change the data size of an existing object input and display conditions will be deleted 362 Display Format Set the display format Numeric Format Set the number format Signed decimal Unsigned decimal Octal Hexadecimal Binary BCD or float No of Display Digits Set how many digits to display up to 64 If the number of digits is less than the capacity of the device empty spaces are filled with placeholders If the device value cannot be displayed in BCD format it is N M TER n expressed as No of Decimal Digits Set how many places to put to the right of the decimal point when you select formats other than binary octal and hexadecimal numbers Format Set the formats for both the numeric and text displays If you want to input text enter it directly Numbers however appears as asterisks W Foma cm mm The number of asterisks you can input depends
45. O Qo Solid E 000 Triangle Setting of Line Specify the following options for the line Use Line Set to use a line to display the data Line Color Set the color of the line Line Type Set the type of the line solid or dash Dot Color Set the color of the dots Dot Type Set the type of the dots Set to use dots for displaying the data LSS 476 e Alarm The alarm settings for the logging scatter graph object include the following Logging Scatter 5 General Basic Alam Setting Only Y Scatter Graph MaxMin Line and Dot Display 9 Extended Alarm Setting Only Y Scatter Graph Specify the following options for the alarm Use Alarm Set whether using warning value or not It is only available for the Y Scatter graph Max Value Min It establishes warning upper bound and warning lower Value bound for logging trend graph If the device value is more than warning upper bound it is not shown as established line or dot color but displayed as upper bound line or dot color On the other hand if the device value is less than lower bound it is displayed as established lower bound line or dot color Max Line Min You can set the color of a line to be applied when it is more Line or less than the warning upper bound of logging distribution graph If the device value exceeds warning upper bound it is displayed as upper bourn line color On the other hand if it is less than warning upper bound it i
46. Patternz z Fi Type Library Open Palter FG Color Fates BG Cole Scale Point 5 nt Location Upper Color cres Transparent BG Image Set whether or not to make the background of the graph transparent Library Click to select a background image for the graph from a library Open Click to locate background image for the graph on your computer Direction Set the direction for filling the graph Top gt Bottom Bottom gt Top Left gt Right or Right gt Left Pattern Select the pattern for the filled areas of the graph Transparent Border Set whether or not to use a transparent border Frame Display Specify the following options for the frame Border Color Set a border color Plate Color Set the background for areas not filled by value ranges Fill Type Specify the following options for the fill Pattern FG Color Set the foreground color for the pattern Pattern BG Color Set the background color for the pattern 445 Scale Specify the following options for the scale Color Set the color of the scales e Case The case settings for closed graph object include the following General Basic gt ES Operation a Extended Display Case List Case List Create delete or reorganize conditional expressions Down Create es Click to create a new range condition You can create up to eight conditions Cli
47. Script No Specify a script when performing actions other than adding subtracting writing a specific device value or writing a fixed value Data Type Set the data type to be increased or decreased When you select BCD as the data type if the value returned by the specified device exceeds the numeric range of BCD data 0 9 the word switch will not execute Digit Set the number of digit to increase or decrease For 16 bit devices you can set it from 1 4 For 32 bit devices you can set it from 1 8 e If you set a fixed constant operand the range of the constant varies based on the size and type of the device as described in the following table Device Type Minimum Maximum 16bit Signed decimal 32768 32767 Unsigned decimal o 65535 BCD O 9999 32 bit Signed decimal 2147483648 2147483647 Unsigned decimal o 4294967295 BCD O 99999999 Description Enter a description for the object LSis 286 287 4 General E Extended e Display The display settings for word switch objects include the following Transparent BG Image Image Type Basic See ee f Not Change Color Pattem Display Use Image Reverse f Same Image amp Change Color Pattem et Pattem Fa Color JEC IM HEMRERE Frame Color Transparent BG Image Click the checkbox to make the image background transparent You cannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at
48. Size 12 Width Ratio 100 Font Style Bold italic Strikeout Underline Horizontal Alignment i Lett Vertical Alignment Top Use Caption Click the checkbox to use a text caption with the object When you select this option you can input text from a Text Table On Click to configure options for the object in the on state You must input the text in a text table Off Click to configure options for the object in the off state You must input the text in a text table From Text Table Click the checkbox to add text from a text table The Text Table option will be activated and the text input area will close Add the required text to the text table before editing the object You must select text for the on and off states from the same text table 2 5 Text Table Click to open the text table and select text The color and font properties set in the text table will be imported with the text Select From Text Table v Language Engish United States v Select a text table nd index and the language Registered text table list Delete Caption Click to clear text settings for the current state Font Select a font from the drop down list Size Set a text size from the drop down list or enter a value directly into the field Width Ratio Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the d
49. Specify the following options for the frame Border Color Set a border color Plate Color Set the background for areas not filled by value ranges 478 Starting Point Location Set a starting point for the scales Left Bottom or Right Bottom Scale Specify the following options for the scale No of Horizontal Set the number of points on the X axis Point e Display Trigger The display trigger settings for the logging scatter graph object include the following Use Action Condition Display Trigger play Trigg f BitOn f Bit Off f Range Multi Bit size Type Unsigned DEC fo NOP 0 Exp Multi Bit No of Bit Device 1 4 Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action 479 LSIS Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the 2 eto OA Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result NN aeset Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you select the range condition specify the range 16 bit or 32 bit Signed deci
50. To set the transparency of the image and apply it to XP Builder 1 Open the image in Paint B 4 Cut f t Crop P a gt A y iS 3 Copy d4 Resize i x aste rushes 5 h Rotate d A Q E Clipboard Image Tools Edit Colors Basic colors Y c i TET i C i mi a any ZEA K i h Rotate PA ee SEGRE cpboor nes eee ELLLLLL LELLELL LT it ie Custom colors BERR EE BERR E Define Custom Colors gt gt 3 Register the image to the Graphic library 93 LSIs Se 4 Right click the image and click Apply Transparent Color it Graphic02049 ho gf Graphic02050 As Background Image Delete Image Rename Replace Image Image Info Save As File Apply Transparent Color Select Transparent Color Dither Image to 256 Colors 5 Apply the image to the editing area to view the transparency settings 94 To set the transparency of an existing image 1 Right click an image and click Select Transparent Color ea ft Graphicd2049 if GraphicO2050 7 As Background Image Delete Image Rename Replace Image Image Info Save As File opk Transparent Color Select Transparent Color Dither Image to 256 Colors 2 Select the part of the image that you want to make transparent Then the RGB value will be changed Select Transparent Color RGB 0 162 232 3 Click OK 4 View the new transparent part in the editing area 95 To dither the image to 256 colors 1 Select
51. View Show hide Object Address Object Status Viewer e An object witha bit or word address can appear differently depending on its On Off state or the preset condition You can preview the states before transferring the data to an XGT Panel aHes F or F lt Word device gt e To view the states click View Show hide Object On Off IME Viewer e You can input code with the IME keyboard To show the IME keyboard click View IME e The default font for Chinese text is SimSun Data Viewer e The Data Viewer shows an object s type ID and location information To open the Data Viewer click View gt 82 2 Project Development Data Viewer shape Mame Object ID Position Bit switch BOUO0 200 00 40 7 322 N state Lamp NLUUUUT C411 407 507 e Grouped objects are shown as a Group and their sizes are shown as the maximum boundaries shape Mame v Object ID Position SPOOOOS 470 95 50 199 Bit Switch 157 99 391 291 Bit Message MEBOO0N1 C467 252 Fee e You can select copy cut and paste items in the Data Viewer window 83 LSIs 2 Project Development 2 3 6 Applying Images You can insert images from the Graphic Library For more information about the Graphic Library refer to lt 2 3 6 4 Managing Image Libraries gt 2 3 6 1 Inserting Images To insert images from the Graphic Library 1 Click View Graphic Library
52. a subdirectory will be created with a filename by Year Month The date directory will be included as a subdirectory Upto 500 date directories can be created The Year Month directory will not only contain year and month information but will also record the date the directory was created e Asanexample the name of a directory created in October 2010 with subdirectories created since 15 October would be 2010 10 15 FF The FF at the end of the directory name represents that there is more data space to store for October 2010 This means that the subdirectory currently holds less than 500 date directories When there is a change of Month the directory name will be changed and saved to the last date in the month when information was logged e Asanexample if the directory contains date directories created between October 15 and October 30 and was created in October 2010 the directory name would be 2010 10 15 30 0 when the month changes to November 2010 Ifa month directory is carrying more than 500 date subdirectories before the month ends the directory name will change to the last date in the sub directory e For example if the number of date sub directories created from 1 October to 15 October 2010 is greater than 500 the file name will be 2010 10 01 15 0 Ifthe month ends or the total number of sub directories exceeds 500 or the directory has the same starting ending date name then the last index
53. the device Bit is updated only when the recording is started or stopped Ifthe storage device recognizes that the memory is exceeded when the recording is started or while making a list or files saved in storage device or while recording the second bit of the status device Video recording status device is updated The bit of the status device is updated when the playback is stopped by a user or when the playback comes to an end e During event recording an error less than 1 second long may occur because of a connection to the device or a system load of other actions It may result when creating a file with less than 1 second play time If the play time is less than 500 ms the file is deleted automatically When the file is saved separately based on the maximum file size an error of approximately 100kb may occur because of characteristics of the H 264 codec 42 OOOO 43 2 2 3 Editing default settings You can edit default settings in XP Builder 2 2 3 1 Changing default editing options Change the editing options Click Tool gt Option Edit Option ul Objed IDVAddress Tet Color Option I Background AlphaBlend Use Object ID Address Font Size Project Default Text Color of Figure Object D Default Line Color of Figure Object Use Background Color from New Screen Deak BG Coke in Blew Sree D i Screen Limit Check on Object Figure s Editing Object ID Address Text Descr
54. use the third grounding resistance less than 1000 e If you cannot use the exclusive ground connection use the common ground connection like below A Exclusive grounding B Exclusive grounding C Common grounding connection Best connection Good connection Bad rd A rd M E 3 grounding connection 3 grounding connection e Use cables for grounding earth connections by using cable with a cross sectional area greater than 2 0 mm Install the ground connection as close as possible to the XGT Panel e Check and test the grounding connection If the connection is bad or in case of B above the XGT Panel may malfunction or the communication signals may fail e llustrations and specifications shown this chapter 5 7 Installing and wiring are based on iXP series For more information about the XP series refer to XP series XGT Panel user s manual 620 621 alal one to one communication a communication mode in 1 1 communication one panel is used to send commands to one controller 1 N one to many communication a communication mode in 1 N communication one panel is used to send commands to multiple controllers ActiveSync a mobile data synchronization app developed by Microsoft it synchronizes data with handheld devices and desktop computers baud baud and bits per second are not necessarily the same so do not use bits per second or bps as a synonym for baud modems
55. 4 Reference e Operation The operation settings for trend graph object include the following General ca l Use Script Reference Line Script Extended Use Script Click the checkbox to use a script with the object Select Script Select a script from the drop down list Script When you select a script it appears here To modify a script refer to lt 4 2 Scripts gt e Detail The detail settings for trend graph object include the following Graph Trend General Offset Extended De 5 IDO EFE V CE gt E E Display Trigger Offset Click the checkbox to use the offset function You can offset the device address based on the value of the offset device For example if the starting device address is P100 XP Builder reads the value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value If the offset value is 10 for example then the referenced device address is P110 e Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary 457 Display Trigger The display trigger settings for the trend graph object include the following Graph Trend General Use Action Condition q Extended T Detail Sa o ae Display Trigger Device Device ID EEE Range Size 1 bits T
56. 5 Arii A Fefee eUa fl U ul ul ul 4 hl U 3 m FOOO12 KO0005 MODD 3 MODD K000 KOOODS Enh H rH DAAGOADE item Description a The top row shows fundamental information about the program and the connected PLC b The monitoring area shows the LD program C The bottom row contains navigation buttons and controls for reviewing other types of information When you click the program variable switch you can monitor variables in the program as well analog_set 630 Steps 0 XGK CPUHIR F0200B K00005 MO0003M00004 K00012 Mo0003 KO000S Moo0as M00004 KOO T2 540 541 item Description d Click to start or stop monitoring e Program Variable Switch LN Click to toggle page scrolling 4 4 2 Monitoring Program You can monitor programs manually from the XGT Panel s menu or via a special switch object ona UI window 4 4 2 1 Monitoring Programs from the XGT Panel Menu To start the Program Monitor from the XGT Panel menu 1 Touch and hold the XGT Panel screen to open the main menu 2 Touch PLC Information 3 Select a connection number from the drop down list and touch Program Monitor connection No it SHOW INFO Program Monitor a Close a Re If you have not selected the program monitor function in the XP Builder project the Program Monitor function will not be active For more information refer to lt 2 2 2 2 Changing XGT Panel Settings gt To
57. A gt amp Local Disk C Folder Computer 4 Select Project file You can click the checkboxes in the list to specify which types of data to transfer 5 Click Upload 6 If necessary enter a communication password for the XGT Panel and click OK In XP Builder the transfer progress will be shown in the output window Noe You cannot receive images unless you selected the Include Upload Project File option when transferring the project to the XGT Panel For more information refer to lt 2 6 1 Transferring to an XGT Panel gt or lt 2 6 2 Transferring to a Removable Drive gt LS Is 138 2 Project Development 2 6 4 Backing up Project Data You can back up project data from a removable storage drive in an XGT Panel to your computer including logging and alarm data recipes screen captures memos videos and video captures To back up project data 1 In XP Builder click Communication gt Receive or select the upload icon on the toolbar XGT Panel Update br Sere T J PUSHDOWN_V ff ROTARY_256_R JF Aad Li dk l J Recipe C Capture Image 139 LSIs a 2 Project Development 3 If necessary click Settings to change the communication settings S EATE Lis d USB Activesync Details IF address Fort Tis Direct connection E Desktop b Sy Libraries b res Homegroup gt i hs 4 Computer b 8 working VBOXSVR Az g
58. ASCII2ZHEX amp buf o nResult Parameter 2 int pRetValue The 4 variable that will store The value of nResult is tie Gelato es converted 1234 Parameter 3 int nCount The number of bytes to be converted 1 10 DEC2ASCII Convert decimal data to BOOL If the number of ASCII data Example char buf 4 int NSTC 1234 HEX2ASCII nSrc amp buf o 4 Return value Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 data to be converted is not between 1 and 8 or the size of pDstBuffer is lower than that number FALSE is returned int nValue The value to be converted char pDstBuffer The destination buffer that will store the converted data int nCount The number of bytes to be converted 1 10 If data that cannot be converted is encountered in the buffer data conversion will stop For example when converting 1 A B 3 K 2 8 3 from ASCII to hexadecimal the result is ox1AB3 because the conversion cannot be completed 4 2 3 10 Understanding Other Functions The following table describes properties for other functions BacklightOn Turn the XGT Panel LCD on or off Example if X HX100 true BacklightOn true Parameters Bool bOn Backlight is turned on or off LSis 252 _253 LSis Buzzer Sound the buzzer fora specified time soms Parameters None Example if X HX100 true Buzzer SetBuzzerEnable Turn the buzzer On Off Bool
59. Buzzer Setting Oh Gato MainMenu _551 LSis 5 1 1 Backlight Settings Backlight options are able to be adjusted for the XGT panel You can adjust the brightness screen power off time and other settings to suit your requirements 1 Touch Backlight Setting System Configuration Ch DateTime Setting H Erviranment Setting P Ethemet Setting xP Remote Setting P Sound Setting F Buzzer Setting 2 Specify your backlight settings by adjusting the options shown below Backlight settings Brightness Do not turn off backlight Turn off backlight after idle time Turn off A minuters 1 300 PIR sensor sensitivity fio 1 10 Turn on after 2 0 second s Cancel Function Description Brightness Adjust the backlight level Do Not Turn Off Continuous backlight Backlight LSiIs 552 5 Managing an XGT Panel Function Description Turn Off Backlight Automatically turn off the backlight after a specified time After Idle Time Turn Off Set the time to turn off the backlight PIR Sensor Set the sensitivity level for the PIR Passive Infrared sensor The Sensitivity lower the value the quicker the backlight will turn on When set to the lowest value the backlight will turn on immediately when the screen is touched Nores e The XGT Panel s backlight is activated by detecting movement around the XGT Panel If you approach the XGT Panel when the
60. Check Device Set a device to verify the returned device value Set this option when the bit device is On after inputting the number Write Check Device Off Set when to turn off the write check device if the data cannot be verified Display Mode Set an option for the color of the message based on the background color Transparent Display the message transparently in contrast to the background image Display the message in a color that is easily distinguished from the background image e Keypad Option The keypad options settings for numeric input objects include the following Numeric Input General J Extended Detail Cursor Focus Type Touch f Input Perit Device eypad Option Input Permit Bit Device 33 Action Condition Display Trigger Clear Type Auto ClearOFF C Auto Clear ON i Use Keypad Use Keypad set in Input Object No of Keypad fC ay Use User Keypad Position Position of X ads i Position of Y axis U Use Auto Cursor Input Order 1 E i Use Interlock m Intedock Device 2 Doo E Cancel Cursor Set the movement type for using the automatic cursor Focus Type Set a method for moving the cursor If you select Touch the user must touch the input field to move the cursor The flow for the Touch method is as follows Display mode Touch Input mode ERE Display mode If you select Input Permit Device the cursor moves only when the I
61. Data Order Latest gt Oldest Seale Color Library Click to select a background image for the graph from a library Open Click to locate background image for the graph on your computer Transparent BG Set whether or not to make the background of the graph transparent Transparent Border Set whether or not to use a transparent border No of Display in X axis Set the number of data points to be displayed on the graph 3 to 120 Set the specified device value as the X axis point Set the specified fixed value as the X axis point Frame Display Specify the following options for the frame Border Color Set a border color Plate Color Set the background for areas not filled by value ranges No of Samples to Scroll A user can refer to the data of his intended position with the special switch Previous Data Next Data View However in the below two cases The latest data tracking mode the oldest data tracking mode a window is automatically updated and it displays the data since the present time Through this option you can set how many data unit will be applied to transfer a screen The latest data When you edit and download logging trend graph after tracking mode setting Preferred View Mode as the latest data tracking mode logging trend is set as the latest data tracking mode and it updates a screen every time logging is performed newly and then it tracks and shows the late
62. Device Ra 3 Device Display Size 16bts Type Unsigned DEC Text Extended Action Type Set Operand Constant Value 1 Indirect Device a Script Mo Data Type HEX Digit 1 Description Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Size Set the data size of the device 16 bit 32 bit Type Set the data form of the device signed decimal unsigned decimal or BCD Action Type Set the type of the action to perform Sub ___ Subtroctthespciedvaue fom thedevcevale Digit Add Increase the bit value of a specific location in a word device The value is added to the current value with as many operands as you specify but the bit value of the location increases only by the value specified here Digit Sub Decrease the bit value of a specific location in a word device The value is subtracted from the current value with as many operands as you specify but the bit value of the location decreases only by the value specified here 285 Operand Set the value to write to the device The operand can be set as one of the following types Set a fixed value to use as an operand in the expression Set to us the device value as an operand in the expression
63. Display Mode Transparent Offset Click the checkbox to use the offset function You can offset the device address based on the value of the offset device For example if the starting device address is P100 XP Builder reads the value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value If the offset value is 10 for example then the referenced device address is P110 Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary 335 Display Mode Set an option for the color of the message based on the background color Transparent Display the message transparently in contrast to the background image XOR Display the message in a color that is easily distinguished from the background image Display Trigger The display trigger settings for bit message objects include the following if Use Action Condition Type seers Bit On C Bit OF O Range C Multi Bit isplay Trigger Device Device ae EE Range Size 1 bits Type Unsigned DEC o NOP 0 Multi Bit No of Bit Device So Cancel Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on
64. DotC Dot Ty Alarm Display A Bo solid E ooo Triangle _ Extended Setting of Line Specify the following options for the line Use Line Set to use a line to display the data Line Color Set the color of the line Line Type Set the type of the line solid or dash Dot Color Set the color of the dots Dot Type Set the type of the dots Set to use dots for displaying the data LSS 486 e Alarm The alarm settings for the realtime scatter graph object include the following Real Time Scatter 4 General Basic Alarm Setting Only Y Scatter Graph Max Min Line and Dot Num gt Display _ Extended Alarm Setting Only Y Scatter Graph Specify the following options for the alarm Use Alarm Set whether using warning value or not It is only available for the Y Scatter graph Max Value It establishes warning upper bound and warning lower bound Min Value for logging trend graph If the device value is more than warning upper bound it is not shown as established line or dot color but displayed as upper bound line or dot color On the other hand if the device value is less than lower bound it is displayed as established lower bound line or dot color Max Line You can set the color of a line to be applied when it is more or Min Line less than the warning upper bound of logging distribution graph If the device value exceeds warning upper bound it is displayed as upper bourn line color On t
65. Goto MainMenu 2 Touch the screen on the highlighted squares to check touch accuracy T ela a T ME BE EE DE WA BE BE DEI BE EE BE T T ue bil tl T E EE HE ela BEN HE MA If the touch spot is incorrect adjust the calibration in Settings gt Touch Setting For more details refer to lt 5 1 2 Touch Function Settings gt 568 5 2 3 Checking Backup Memory Touch Backup Memory to view backup memory status You can check the available NVRAM and battery status Diagnostics P Flash Memory OCF Card gt Serial OSD Card USB Memory Goto MainMenu HMIManager MYRA Data Access OK BATTERY STATUS GOOD e If access to NVRAM data fails contact the A S center e Ifthe battery status is bad replace the battery Contact the A S center 569 LSIs 5 2 4 Checking Flash Memory You can check flash memory information including folder name total space used and available memory To view flash memory information touch Flash Memory Diagnostics P Backup Memory P Flash Memory CF Card gt Serial SD Card USB Memory Goto MainMenu HMIManager FlachDisk Sper Folder Mame FlashDisk Total Space GO S8iMBytes Used Space 6 OS MBytes Available Space SS0 45 MBytes Write Operation SUCCESS B If ReadDisk Information Error is displayed contact
66. History Alarm Viewer Set whether or not to use an action trigger with a history alarm viewer object The special switch function is activated when the special switch is touched on the XGT Panel or when the specified device is turned on Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary e Lamp Condition The lamp condition settings for special switch objects include the following Special Switch lw Use Lamp Condition Type e Bit aa Lamp Condition Action Condition Bit Device Word Device 35 Size 1Sbits Type Unsigned DEC Use Lamp Offset Use Lamp Condition If you want to control a lamp with a method other than simply turning it on when the switch is activated you can select a different action Type Select a condition for lamp control When the device state is on the lamp is on When the condition is met the lamp is on 320 321 Bit If you selected the bit condition type specify a bit device e Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Word I
67. No of alarm a i Fob a Assign alarm device C Continuous Each Text table v Text table index C Continuous Each i indow C Conti amp Sampling time Mo x Second M Show detail window Continuous Each M Use alarm count device C Continuous Each M Backup alarm log On 3 Set the following properties for the alarm list Name The name of the alarm list Data Type Set the device type bit or word No of alarm Set the number of alarms maximum 10 000 Text Table Select a text table to import text from Sampling Time Set how often to check for alarm conditions 1 to 10 seconds Backup Alarm Log By default history alarm data is stored in temporary memory It is cleared when you exit the Program Monitor or if LSiIs 214 215 Description you check Delete all monitoring data when you download the project To save history alarm data set the backup alarm log function The backup data will be saved in the SRAM which has a storage capacity of 64KB If power is interrupted to the XGT Panel the alarm data is stored as a CSV file When the power is restored you cannot view that data via the History Alarm Viewer it will be shown as untraceable in XP Builder Instead you must refer to the CSV file Show Current Selected Specify a device to display the most recent alarm You can Alarm enter the device address manually or click the key
68. Notused I Delete old file if disk ful Notused I Delete old file if disk full Notused gt 7 Delete old file if disk full Notused IT Delete old file if disk ful Video capture image Notused IT Delete old file if disk ful 605 LSis ee To use the monitoring function you should select the Alarm window pop up option when you download the project file Project Property Summary XGT Panel Settings Sereen Settings Secunty Settings Key Window Settings Language Storage Settings Global Script Settings Puedliary Settings Extended Controller Settings Print Direction E mail Froperty Direction Horizontal Vertical Use E mail function Color f True Color C7 Mono ke High quality print Screen Capture Communication Error Display Runtime print W Show communication emor window Flow Alarm Display Mode f Redraw at occured 0 After current display list When the external storage device for logging recipe and screen image backup is removed from XGT Panel while the device is running a system alarm is set off The alarm is reset when an external storage device is reconnected to the XGT Panel You can check system alarms and their device addresses in the System Alarm menu located in XP Builder as shown below B 1 System Alarm Device Data Type Description H5950 0 BIT NVRAM Low Battery Waring 2 H5950 1 BIT NYARAM Invalid Data Warning H Hi PEEVE E a o EAE ENEA LNE ERA
69. Operation The operation settings for meter graph object include the following General Basic F F o pt Display Select Script Case Script gt Operation 2 Extended Use Script Click the checkbox to use a script with the object Select Script Select a script from the drop down list Script When you select a script it appears here To modify a script refer to lt 4 2 Scripts gt LSis 440 e Detail The detail settings for meter graph object include the following Genera C Offset fou Extended Meow G ETE n Detail Device Display Trigge Offset Click the checkbox to use the offset function You can offset the device address based on the value of the offset device For example if the starting device address is P100 XP Builder reads the value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value If the offset value is 10 for example then the referenced device address is P110 Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary 441 e Display Trigger The display trigger settings for the meter graph object include the following Graph Meter General oe q Extended T Detail aie 3 o is Pg Display Trigger Device Device IDO EE Range Size 16bits Type Uns
70. Panel Information 3 Touch a tab to view or change the following information e General The General tab allows you to view properties for the XGT Panel XGT Panel Information Ethernet 192 168 0 1 2143 General Settings Clock l Password 121 Bi Settings Refresh Close XGT Panel The XGT Panel model number State The operational state of the XGT Panel Version The XGT Panel version File version The file version Flash memory Used and available flash memory CF Card Used and available memory on an installed CF card USB Memory Used and available memory on an installed USB device SD Card Used and available memory on an installed SD card 547 e Settings The Settings tab allows you to specify the following settings Touch buzzer sound Keep Alive time lo Minute Set Alias name Set Install Update XGT Panel USB driver Install Settings Refresh Touch Buzzer Sound Set whether or not to use audible feedback when a user touches the XGT Panel screen Keep Alive Time Set how long the server will keep the communication port open if there is no response from the XGT Panel Alias Name Specify an alias to use when scanning for or connecting to the XGT Panel Install Update XGT Panel USB Driver Click Install to update the XGT Panel s USB driver 548 4 Reference e Clock The Clock tab allows you to specify the following se
71. Refer to Manual Click to open the reference manual for the selected controller Protocol Set the connection method between the XGT Panel and the controller Ensure that the setting matches the actual connection between the XGT Panel and the controller Detail Settings Click to set detailed connection parameters If a controller is selected the default properties will be set automatically The options available vary by the connection type Timeout Set a network timeout Wait to Send Set the length of time to wait for network communication between the XGT Panel and the controller Retry Count Set the number of times to retry when communication fails between the XGT Panel and the controller Use XG5000 Set whether or not to use the simulator To run the simulator Simulator click Tool gt Simulation For more information refer to lt 2 5 1 Simulating an Interface gt About XP Builder Program Monitor Set whether or not to view controller data with the Program Monitor supported only by XGK series PLCs For more 22 XGT Panel Settings Description information about using the Program Monitor refer to lt o Using Program Monitor gt Nores e You can only change properties for an XGT Panel when the mode selected supports the same color specifications as the panel e When changing the XGT Panel type the height and width of objects vary by resolution Objects with fixed sizes and fonts are not affected
72. Screen General Background Script No Local Script Setting Fin Scot at Close Bay Etc All rights reserved Visit us http wwe Isis biz Show Fow Alarm 6 Click OK 233 LSIs a Reference 4 2 2 5 Specifying Schedule Scripts 1 To specify scripts that run on specified schedules 2 Create a script as described in 4 2 2 1 or 4 2 2 2 3 Inthe Project pane double click Schedule 4 Inthe editing area double click a cell in the Schedule tab 5 Inthe Property window specify the schedule type detail condition and description as desired B 1 Schedule EE_ E EE ee Every minute Run every minute 13s Type Every minute Description Detail Condition Sec 13 6 Inthe Function Settings click Script gt gt Every minute Description PO al Detail Condition Function Setting _ _A MAM Function p Bit On bv Bit Off WORD Set DWORD Set LSis 234 7 Select a script from the drop down list and click OK Script script _OO00 B OK ff Copyright c 2004 2006 r ii All rights reserved Cancel I Visitus http www sis biz ERROR i 8 If necessary click Up or Down to prioritize the script 9 Close the Property window or specify additional schedule scripts as desired Your changes are saved automaticall
73. The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the E aeda R Molti Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result UM ameen Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you select the range condition specify the range 336 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 4 3 3 2 Word Message This section describes available settings for word message objects e Basic The basic settings for word message objects include the following Word Message General mone s R Device v EEE Display Size 16bits Type Unsigned DEC Text Select Message Case f Indirect C Case Operation C Extended Description Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Size Select a data size 16 b
74. Type Specify the following options for the fill Pattern FG Color Set a foreground color for the pattern Pattern BG Color Set a background color for the pattern 430 Shape and Direction Specify the following options for the shape and direction Shape Set the shape of the pie chart Set the direction for filling the pie graph Start Position When using a circle shape set the start position of the pointer Scale Specify the following options for the scale Set the number of points in the scale Set the color of the scales 431 LSIs e Case The case settings for pie graph objects include the following General Basic Display gt Operation 2 Extended Case List Create delete or reorganize conditional expressions Create Click to create a new range condition You can create up to eight conditions Clicking this button opens the Range Edit window which allows you to create a condition For more information refer to lt 4 2 1 3 Understanding Constants and DataTypes gt x Delete Click a condition and then click this icon to delete the condition Up Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higher in the list Down Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lower in the list LSis 432 4 Reference e Operation The operation settings for pie graph objects include the following Gene i C lke Scape Basic Case S
75. Upper Value Constant Lower Value Description 443 Control Device Specify the following options for the control device Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Set the data size of the device 16 bit or 32 bit If you change the data size of an existing object the conditional statement will be deleted Type Set the data form of the device signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float If you change the data type of an existing object the conditional statement will be deleted Upper Lower Limit Value Set the maximum and minimum values of the data to display The maximum and minimum values must be within the range supported by the device type Otherwise only the minimum or maximum value supported by the device will be displayed Device Set the specified device value as the maximum and minimum Value Set the specified fixed value as the maximum and minimum Value Description Enter description in the relevant object 444 e Display The display settings for closed graph objects include the following Graph Ellipse General Transparent BG Image ae me fe Transparent Border Basic gt Case Border Color Extended a Iw Plate Color Frame Display
76. When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Description Enter a description for the object LSS 2 2 e Display The display settings for word lamp objects include the following N State Lamp 3 General j Transparent BG Image Data 0 Basic stated i Image Type 5 a ER Not Change Color Pattem Text Blink Not Use Same Image amp Change Color Pattem Pattem Fa Color ETM Fiat i Z S Pattem BG Color ZRE ENR Coo HEIT RS Fe Frame Color Transparent BG Image Click the checkbox to make the image background transparent You cannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time State Select a state from the drop down list to configure options for the option in each state Blink Seta blink speed for the object Slow Theobjectwlbinkeverytree seconds Normal Theobjectwlbinkeveytwoseconds Fast Theobjectlbinkeveysecond Image Type Set whether or not to change colors and patterns when switching between on and off states If you select the change color or pattern option you must select a vector image for the object To view characteristics of raster or vector images refer to lt 2 3 6 4 Managing Image Libraries gt Not Change Color Pattern Use the original image You can apply the pattern or color to the image Select the image to d
77. Yo EE Range Size 1 bits Type Unsigned DEC fo NOP 0 Exp Multi Bit No of Bit Device 1 a Setting Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the Opes R Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result AN ameman o 361 LSIS Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you select the range condition specify the range Size 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Exp Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 4 3 4 2 Numeric Display This section describes available settings for numeric display objects e Basic The basic settings for numeric display objects include the following Numeric Display General R Device Display Size 16bits Text Display Case Ay ier Operation Numeric Format Unsigned DEC J Extended
78. a blink speed for the object Slow Theobjectwlbinkeverythree seconds Normal Theobjctillbnkeverytwoseconds Image Type Set whether or not to change colors and patterns when switching between on and off states If you select the change color or pattern option you must select a vector image for the object To view characteristics of raster or vector images refer to lt 2 3 6 4 Managing Image Libraries gt Not Change Color Pattern Use the original image You can apply the pattern or color to the image Select the image to display for On or Off status from raster vector or user registered images Same Image amp Change Select a vector image You cannot select a raster 264 Color Pattern in On Off image Apply a pattern or color to the image Library Click to select an image from the library In the library list image categories are distinguished by the ends of their names The vector image category ends with _V and the raster image category ends with _R Patterns can be applied only to the images Open Click to browse for images on your computer When you select an image from your computer it will be added to the image library automatically Pattern Click a pattern to apply to the image This option is available only when you select the change color or pattern option in Image Type Patterns are applied to specific parts of objects but not to the frames The frames ar
79. alignment Top Middle or Bottom 318 e Detail The detail settings for special switch include the following Special Switch General z lf Securty Level Extended Level i Lamp Condition T Action Delay Action Condition Device Security Level Set whether or not to require a password to use the object Level Set the security level for the object The higher the security level the shorter the authorization time when the password is entered When the authorization time expires the user must enter the password again to use the object Action Delay Set to delay the action triggered by the switch by a specified time Type Set the type of action delay On Delay When the switch is activated the action is performed after the delay time that you specify Press Twice When the switch is activated once a dialog box is invoked to allow the user to verify the operation When the switch is activated a second time the action is performed after the delay time that you specify Time Set the length of time for the action delay Offset in Write Operation Set to use the offset function Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary 319 Action Trigger Only
80. also specify network settings if necessary 417 Range If you select the range condition specify the range Size 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Exp Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 4 3 7 Animation Object Animation objects allow you to display moving images GIFs based on the device conditions e Animation The animation settings for animation objects include the following Animation General Piian Animation nition MN 9 Extended Loop Set whether or not to repeat the animation If you set this option you cannot set Start End or Pause Restart devices Start End Set a bit device to start and end the animation Pause Restart Set a device to pause or resume the animation halfway Library Click to select an animation from the user or system graphic libraries 418 4 Reference Open Click to select a GIF file from your computer Speed Set the speed of the animation e Slow 400ms e Normal 250ms e Fast 100ms Description Enter description in the relevant object Display Trigger The display trigger settings for animation objects include the following IY Use Action Condition Type Bit Qn C Bit Off Multi Bit Extended Pa Display Trigger Device Device Type U
81. an XGT Panel model with a TTA model Series AP Series Model APSO TTA r 2 Right click an image and click Dither Image to 256 Colors gf Graphic02049 Bt GraphicO2050 As Background Image Delete Image Rename Replace Image Image Info Save As File Apply Transparent Color Select Transparent Color Dither Image to 256 Colors 3 Click OK After you dither the image you cannot restore the color value Notes e The default RGB values for transparency are 255 0 255 e Setting a transparent color is not a default option e You can select multiple images and apply transparency at the same time if the image properties are the same If image formats are different or if one of the images has a transparency applied already the function will not work e You can use the dithering function only in projects for color mode panels After WMF TGA and JPG files are dithered they are saved as BMP files 96 You can add WMF format figures to the Graphic library The WMF format is used only in XP Builder not in the panel and it is not distorted when you change the image size To add WMF vector figures to a library 1 Inthe editing area right click a figure to save 2 Click Insert the selected shapes to active graphic library Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Delete Guide Line H Rotate or Flip Align Order Group Ungroup Select All Ctrl A Zoom d Object Property Screen Property
82. and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 4 3 8 5 Trend Graph The following sections describe available options for trend graphs 450 4 Reference e Basic The basic settings for the trend graph object include the following General Display Reference Line Upper Lower Limit Value Operation Device Upper Value 100 Extended Constant Lower Value 0 Line Color Line Type BR ooo000 Solid Device Specify the following options for the device Set the data size of the device 16 bit or 32 bit If you change the data size of an existing object the conditional statement will be deleted Set the data form of the device signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float If you change the data type of an existing object the conditional statement will be deleted 451 LSIs Upper Lower Limit Value Set the maximum and minimum values of the data to display The maximum and minimum values must be within the range supported by the device type Otherwise only the minimum or maximum value supported by the device will be displayed E t Set the specified device value as the maximum and minimum Value Constant Set the specified fixed value as the maximum and minimum Value Alarm Value Set whether or not to trigger an alarm if the data value exceeds the maximum or minimum limits Set the specified device value as the alarm limit Set the spe
83. applied as the default for all key windows To change key window settings click the arrow buttons or to select anew window number or click Browse and then click a key window type Storage Settings Global Script Settings Awdliary Settings Summary XGTPanel Settings Screen Settings Security Settings Key Window Settings Language m Key Window Settings DEC keypad HEX keypad ASCII keypad Real keypad 27 LSIs 2 Project Development 2 2 2 6 Changing Languages From the Language tab you can edit both display and runtime language settings To change language settings edit the information in the appropriate field and click OK Storage Settings Global Script Settings Awdliary Settings Extended Controller Settings Summary XGT Panel Settings Screen Settings Security Settings Key Window Settings Language Editing language list Runtime language list IDO amp WN Language Settings Description Editing Language List e Setthe display language e Languages shown in text tables are set here Add New Click to add additional display languages to the interface Select a language from the list and then click OK to add it to the Editing Language List Delete Select a language and then click to remove it Editing Languages Settings Change the default fonts for each editing language ae ol DefauttFont f Arable Saudi Arabi
84. are conventionally designated by bits per second or kilobits per second a 28 8 kbps modem runs at a different baud depending on how events are coded for transmission bit object an object in an XP builder project that is controlled by a bit device bitmap refers to a specific file format for online art case a selection control mechanism that exists in most imperative programming languages such as Pascal C C C and Java it allows the value of a variable or expression to control the flow of program execution via a multi way branch or goto one of several labels condition a Boolean expression used to control conditionals and loops it affects the programming or operating of control statements such as WHILE FOR and IF controller the physical unit that delivers instructions to machinery XP Builder supports numerous types of controllers see also programmable logic controller DEC keypad a pop up window for user input of decimal characters editing area the main part of the XP Builder interface where objects can be placed to create a project Ethernet a connection method the maximum throughput for an Ethernet connection is 100mbps falling edge the bit at which the device turns off is the falling edge FLOAT keypad a pop up window for user input of float characters HEX keypad a pop up window for user input of hexadecimal characters IL language intermediate l
85. be deleted Upper Lower Limit Value Set the maximum and minimum values of the data to display The maximum and minimum values must be within the range supported by the device type Otherwise only the minimum or maximum value supported by the device will be displayed Set the specified device value as the maximum and minimum Value Set the specified fixed value as the maximum and minimum Value Description Enter description in the relevant object 429 e Display The display settings for pie graph objects include the following Exe pee oe Transparent BG Image THEN BE Bee piii pur z AE Transparent Border gt parent B Case r ca Frame Display Operation e Border Color W Plate Color Shape and Direction Library Open Fill Type Shape Pattem FG Color ae Direction Clodknixe Scale rons 2 cle cova Library Click to select a background image for the graph from a library Open Click to locate background image for the graph on your computer Pattern Set a pattern for the ranges in the graph Transparent BG Image Set whether or not to make the background of the graph transparent Transparent Border Set whether or not to use a transparent border for the graph Frame Display Specify the following options for the frame Border Color Set a border color Plate Color Set the background for areas not filled by value ranges Fill
86. below Starting Point _ Minimum value i ae 1 50 Point 2 Ending Point Maximum value 3 e Route Display the movement of the object according to the point you set in advance You can set the point to display the part If the location device value is 6 the part moves along the path 6 If the location device value is 1 and 4 it moves along the path 1 and 4 respectively 403 4 D epi O el r roO eh E I ef fe re Ti u a8 CE 4 3 6 1 Bit Part This section describes available settings for bit part objects e Basic The basic settings for bit part objects include the following General Device No of Part Screen M OnO 1 Browse On Blink B Mot Use I OIE H Browse OF Blink L Mot Use Placement Topleft Center Top Right Bottom Right Bottom Left Position Device Type Description Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary No of Part Screen Set the parts to invoke On Set the part to invoke when the device is set to on Off Set the part to invoke when the device is set to off On Blink Set the part to blink when the device is set to on Not Use Slow Normal and Fast Off Blink Set th
87. by changes of the panel type e When transferring images to 256 color or economy panels XP30 BTE and XP30 BTA the images are converted to grey scale 2 2 2 3 Changing Screen Window Settings You can specify the window that appears when an XGT Panel is switched on and settings for how and when the interface changes To change window settings edit the information in the appropriate field and click OK Storage Settings Global Script Settings Audliary Settings Summary XGT Panel Settings Screen Settings Security Settings Key Window Settings Language Screen Settings Description Initial Screen Number e Set the number of the window that appears when the XGT Panel is switched on 23 LSIs e Screen Settings Description e Ifno window is specified an error will occur e To specify the start window click Browse a window P OK Screen Change by Device Set whether or not to switch windows based on the device value If you do not use a device to switch windows the device value will be changed when the window is switched Change to Screen Number Set the device to switch to a specified window When the device value changes the window specified by the device value will be activated unsigned 16 bit Current Screen Number Set a number for the current window Global Window 1 Number Global Window 2 Number Specify one or two windows that will be activated globa
88. data 5 5 1 Downloading Projects This enables you to download a project file from an external storage device to the XGT Panel To download the file from an external storage device 1 Inthe XGT Panel main menu touch Storage Function gt Settings Diagnostics PLC Information Update XGT Panel gt Storage Function Ver 1 30 B 008 2 Touch Project Download Storage Function Project Download Project Upload XP Runtime Update Select USB LSiIs 588 3 Select an external storage source Select Folder Select Source WSB Storage ZR Project ABC The storage path will be displayed as shown below Select Folder WSE Storage XP Project e USB USB Storage XP_Project e CF Storage Card XP_Project e SD SD Storage XP_Project eee When you download a project file from an external storage source the file should be saved in a subdirectory 4 Touch OK 589 LSIs 5 5 2 Uploading Projects This section describes how to upload a backed up project file to an external storage source To upload a backup project file 1 Inthe XGT Panel main menu touch Storage Function LSIS XGT Panel Settings Diagnostics PLC Information Update XGT Panel gt Storage Function Ver 1 30 B 008 2 Touch Project Upload Storage Function Project Download Project Upload XP Runtime Update Sele
89. data Example int nResult char buf 5 1 2 3 4 53 CRC16 amp buf o 5 amp nResult Return value BOOL If the number is beyond the range of the buffer FALSE is returned Parameter 1 char pBuffer The buffer for calculation Parameter 2 int nCount The byte number to be calculated calculated value Parameters XOR_SUM Calculate and return the Return value BOOL If the XOR sum of entered data number is beyond the range of the Example buffer FALSE is int nResult returned i char buf 5 1 2 3 4 53 Parameter 1 char pBuffer The buffer for XOR_SUM amp buf o 5 calculation amp nResult Parameter 2 int nCount The byte number to be calculated Parameter 3 int nResult The calculated value ReadFromlO Read data from the I O Return value int The byte device of a designated number of the read troller Ifthe value of E E ai Parameter 1 int nCtlr The nToRead is o reading is controller number performed during the time 0 3 ae Parameter 2 char pBuffer The out of communication buffer that will setting store the read data Example Parameter 3 int nToRead The size of the data to char Response 32 be read int ReadSize memset amp Response o o 32 ReadSize ReadFromlO o amp Response o 32 WriteTolO Transmit data to the I O device of a designated PLC Example char Command 6 ABCDEF int nSentSize nSentSize WriteTolO o amp Command o 6
90. depending on the selected driver e Refer to the controller s manual for information about the communication settings 5 3 2 Viewing Connection Information View information about the connection including the connection number the controller type and the connection type To view the information 1 Touch SHOW INFO 0 LSIS XGI XGR XEC LINK LSIs 578 2 Select atab to view information Connection Mo Vendor Target device Connection type Timeout value Send wait value Retry value Contents 0 LS Industrial Systems LSIS XGB CPU RS232C SO00Msec Umsec 3 Connection No Displays the connection number between o and 15 Vendor Displays the target device manufacturer Target Device Displays the target device Connection Type Displays the connection type Timeout Value Displays the timeout setting Send Wait Value Displays the waiting time to send Retry Value Displays the number of retries before timeout 579 LSIs ee e PLC You can view the CPU type running mode version or scan time for LSIS controllers Information Contents Type MGB BICH Mode RIJN State GOOD Version v1 4 Scan time max 0 5ms Scan time min 0 ims Scan time cur 0 2ms5 Nore Controllers that can view this option are MASTER K CPU FEnet Cnet GLOFA GM CPU FEnet Cnet XGK XGB XGI XGR CPU FEnet Cnet Error Allows you to rev
91. directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you select the range condition specify the range 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 912 913 4 3 12 Alarm Navigator Object The alarm navigator object allows you to view alarm history conveniently This section describes available settings for the alarm navigator object ALL Alarm Group Alarm Group Alarm Group 2 Alarm Group 3 e Basic The basic settings for alarm navigator object include the following Alarm Navigator J General Frame Display 7 Use iii Frame Color No of Col ar Plate Color Line Line Color Line Width j Font Size Description Frame Display Set whether or not to use a frame Frame Color Set the frame color Plate Color Set the background color for the table No of Col Set the number of columns to show Line Set the line properties Font Set the font size Description Enter a description for the object Display Trigger The display trigger settings for recipe navigat
92. e Affix the brackets on four sides of the product to prevent ingress by water and dust e Affix the brackets top to bottom and right to left to prevent gaps e Align the brackets vertically with the panel The screw torque of the brackets is 6 42kgf cm The screw torque may vary by the quality of the panel but it should follow the standard screw torque value for a bolt If you apply excessive force when affixing the brackets the XGT Panel can be damaged This may result in touch 615 LSIs screen errors or weaken the protection against water and dust ingress e After mounting the XGT Panel on the panel remove the screen protection film Touch screen errors may result if the film is not removed To protect the screen use the exclusive protection sheet To purchase a protection sheet contact the agency or asales office 5 7 3 XGT Panel Wiring Specifications 5 7 3 1 Power Wiring The XGT Panel has models that can operate with both Direct Current DC and Alternating Current AC power supplies The model list below details the models and power supplies they are designed for Voltage Model DC 12 24V IXP70 TTA DC IXP80 TTA DC IXPgo TTA DC AC 100 240V IXP70 TTA AC IXP80 TTA AC IXPgo TTA AC Notes e Donot use an AC power supply for an XGT panel designed for a DC power supply An incorrect power supply could result in serious equipment damage or fire e Confirm the power supply by checking the power supply ratings on
93. following Change Screen Switch General Use Caption From Text Table Basic Ton on Font ip t Tahoma 7 a Delete On Caption Size 12 Width Ratio 100 i __On0FF Copy H E Font Style Bold talic Strikeout Underline Horizontal Alignment C Left Cente C Right Vertical Alignment f Top Middle Bottom Cos Use Caption Click the checkbox to use a text caption with the object When you select this option you can input text from a Text Table On Click to configure options for the object in the on state You must input the text in a text table Off Click to configure options for the object in the off state You must input the text in a text table From Text Table Click the checkbox to add text from a text table The Text Table option will be activated and the text input area will close Add the required text to the text table before editing the object You must select text for the on and off states from the same text table 297 Text Table Click to open the text table and select text The color and font properties set in the text table will be imported with the text Select From Text Table v Language Engish United States x Select a text table na naer and the language Registered text table list On lt gt Off Copy Click to copy the text and formatting from the
94. if the XGT Panel is rebooted or completes data download If this option is not selected you can manually display the work screen by touching the Start button on the main menu Quick Start When this option is not selected the display is shown immediately 557 LSIS Description and the progress bar does not appear By selecting this option caching is disabled and images on the first page will be displayed following a delay Longer delays will be experienced if there are animations to be displayed Hide Mouse Cursor This option hides the cursor Buzzer On Select this option to use the buzzer Disable Menu Bar This option disables the menu bar at the bottom of the screen while the display is idle during monitoring To return to the idle screen activate the special switch to close the screen Reset USB Power The XGT Panel resets connected devices by rebooting the USB power when it starts This is a default setting If USB devices are not recognized easily clear this function and reboot the Panel Enable Arabic Fonts Select this option to use fonts that are written from right to left Always Show Title Window Use this option to continuously display the title bar in a pop up window The title bar in the pop up window can be selected to enable you to move the window RS 232C 5V Power Supply Select this option and when the monitor is on and the Start button on the XGT pane
95. is 10 for example then the referenced device address is P110 The offset function behaves differently if a read device is set When a read device is set the offset is only applied to the writing device If a read device is not set the offset is applied to both read and write devices Offset in Write Operation M ze Ww Offset w Ze Device F D E Device F Ra ERE 7 Read T Read Device B Device R D STE T Write Check T Write Check Devicew O EEE lt Read device set gt lt Read device not set gt 376 0 0 Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Read Set whether or not to use a separate device for reading data When you set the read device even if it is same as the reference device in the Basic setting the offset is only applied to the write device If the read device is different from the reference device the value is written to the write device during the input process In contrast when the input process is stopped the value is read from the read device and the data is displayed For example if the device value is as follows Device address Device value Reference D10 o 0x00 Device Reading Device D20 CD 0x4443 The result of writing AB ox4241 t
96. is in progress so the video cannot be captured 112 Recording is in progress so the video cannot be captured es e To start recording there must be at least 10MB of free space in the storage device If free space is less than 10mb recording cannot be started and error code 3 will be displayed However if you set the Delete old file if disk full option in Storage Settings it deletes the oldest video file and you can try again e To capture video there must be at least 1MB of free space in the storage device If free space is less than amb recording cannot be started and error code 11 will be displayed However if you set the Delete old file if disk full option in Storage Settings it deletes the oldest video file and you can try again e Incase of video recording file or video capture file if the total number of file exceeds 1 000 delete the oldest file so that the total number becomes less than 1 000 3 4 Resolving Other Issues The following subsections describe how to resolve issues that are not accompanied by an error code or error message 3 4 1 Cannot Select the HS Internal Device The HS internal device is a special device for displaying information about the XGT Panel This device does not allow writing so it is not available for devices that allow input such as switches or storage devices To specify a device for input select a writable device type 3 4 2 Cannot Change the XGT Panel Type When changing
97. maximum allowable number of recipe blocks 16 Contact the Customer Service Center 15016 Backup file transformation wrong data type The recipe data type is undefined Contact the Customer Service Center 16001 The writing protection device in the script has been used for writing You have set a read only device where a write device is required Specify a write device for the script 160 161 3 2 Resolving Error Messages in Pop up Windows The following table how to resolve error messages that appears in pop up windows within the XP Builder interface These error messages have no error codes They are listed in the following table alphabetically XX cannot be specified as an interval The scale interval is between o and 10 Set the scale interval for the graph between o and 10 XX cannot be specified as the number of scale The scale number is between o and 255 Set the number of scales in the graph object between o and 255 XX is not a 16 BCD data type Enter a value between 0 9999 If the size and form of the device is 16 bit BCD you must set the conditional range between o and 9999 XX is not a 16 bit signed data type Enter a value between 32768 32767 If the device size and type is signed 16 bit you must set the conditional range between 32768 and 32767 XX is not a 16 bit unsigned data type Enter a value between 0 65535
98. memory in the external storage source the data will be deleted and the backup process will stop Settings that control this situation are adjusted in XP Builder e You can monitor if the external backup storage source has been recognized or not e When you are backing up data make sure that external storage sources are only removed when the safe removal switch is turned on and after the LED lamp turns off Failure to observe these precautions may result in backup failure 5 6 1 Managing the File Path for Backup Files The file path shown below describes how backup files are routed The root directory of CF or USB storage as im Logging oy 1 Logging number oy YYYY MM BeginDay EndDay 0 DD BeginHour EndHour 0 Filled storage limit per folder DD BeginHour EndHour 1 Filled storage limit per folder and share the same start and end time DD BeginHour FF Storage limit not reached DOL HH BeginMinute FF Fsh Lhhmmss0O CSV i 2 Sub directory_ same as 1 Eci Rhhmmss0 CSV each logging number has the same sub structure ao Screen Image ae Shhmmss0 BMP each logging number has the same sub structure T 598 5 6 1 1 File Path for Logging Backup e The Logging subdirectory will be created under the root directory of the USB CF SD storage source e Under the Logging directory a subdirectory will be created with a filename generated by the logging number e Under the logging number directory
99. next to Use XG5000 simulator in the XGT Panel Settings LSis 114 115 2 5 3 Running a Data Check The data check allows you to locate and correct data errors before transferring a project to an XGT Panel You can verify deleted image numbers tags display numbers existing addresses and errors unique to objects or common items For more information about the messages that are displayed during a data check refer to lt 3 Troubleshooting gt To run a data check click Tool gt Data Check Error numbers and their descriptions will appear in the output window 44 H gt Output Find Result 4 Find Result 4 Script Find Result If you close all the project windows and double click on an item in the output window you can activate windows or objects that correspond to error messages so that you can modify them 2 Project Development 2 5 4 Viewing the Device Map The Device Map allows you to view the locations and other parameters of devices in the PLC To view the device map 1 Click View gt Device Map a E a AF CUNGET LY USers ns VESklop ad xpd Project Edit View Common Tool Communicat Data Viewer i l a a e ee Property Viewer K Project Output Bar al Graphic Library a Object Library Bde Bs Spe j aS Screen a 9 Pan Window a BA Screen Thumbnails B BB Grid w 2 Click the drop down list to select a device type Bit or Word
100. number is added to identify the directories e Asanexample if the directory created in October 2010 has 3 directories each holding 500 sub directories then the directory names would be 2010 10 01 01 0 2010 10 01 01 1 2010 10 01 01 2 e Under the Year Month directory a subdirectory with a date name will be created The date directory contains an hour subdirectory The date directory can hold up to 500 hour subdirectories The filenames of date directories contain date and hour information for the first subdirectory that was created 599 The rest of the directory creation procedure is identical to the Year Month directory creation procedure e Under the Date directory a directory will be created that will store time information created The Hour directory will contain backup files Each Hour directory can hold up to 500 backup files The Hour directory contains hour and minute information for the first file that was created The rest of the directory creation procedure is identical to the Year Month directory creation procedure e Logging backup files have hour minute and second information as their file names Backup files will be created in CSV format The names of the files will begin with L representing logging and the rest of the name will contain hour minute and second index information Ifthe backup files are created simultaneously in the same sec
101. of the result of the operation to lt Device gt lt Device gt lt term gt Performs the bit operation AND of lt term gt to lt Device gt and assigns the value of the result of the operation to lt Device gt amp lt Device gt amp lt term gt Performs the bit operation OR of lt term gt to lt Device gt and assigns the value of the result of the operation to lt Device gt A lt Device gt lt term gt Performs the bit operat ion EOR of lt term gt to lt Device gt and assigns the value of the result of the operation to lt Device gt lt lt lt Device gt lt lt lt term gt Shifts lt Device gt to the left by lt term gt and assigns the value of the result of the operation to lt Device gt gt gt lt Device gt gt gt lt term gt Shifts lt Device gt to the right by lt term gt and assigns the value of the result of the operation to lt Device gt e Increment Decrement Operators Command Expression lt Device gt lt Device gt Description Increases lt Device gt by 1 lt Device gt lt Device gt 4 2 1 2 Understanding Device Address Expressions Decreases lt Device gt by 1 To express a device address in a script use this format Device type Connection number Station address tag name or device address with the data inside the brackets describing the physical address of the device in the PLC
102. on the No of Decimal Digits Truncated Digits setting For example Display Format Numeric Format Unsigned DEC No of Display Digits 5 No of Decimal Digits 0 if Format 4 cem mm Truncated Digits 1 The displayed result in the XGT Panel differs by device Device Truncated Digits 1 Device No of Display Digits Truncated Digits 1 Truncated Digits Set a number of digits to truncate from the numerical value Truncation occurs in order from the most significant bit MSB to the least significant bit LSB Use Scaling When a user scales and inputs random values to an established PLC device address this function can be applied Actual PLC values and displayable 363 values differ by data size and display type If the value input by a user exceeds the maximum value the maximum value is input to the device instead If the value input by a user is lower than the minimum value the minimum value is input to the device instead Min of Dev Value Input the minimum device value to allow Max of Dev Value Input the maximum device value to allow Min of OutValue Input the minimum data value to be displayed at scale Max of Out Value Input the maximum data value to be displayed at scale For example set the maximum input value and the maximum device value to 1000 and 100 respectively then suppose the actual input value is 2000 Iv Use Scaling gt DEE y T nl M
103. open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you select the range condition specify the range Size 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Exp Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 4 3 8 2 Pie Graph The following sections describe the available options for pie graph objects 428 e Basic The basic settings for pie graph objects include the following Graph Pie General Control Device Device Display Case Size 16bits Unsigned DEC Operation Extended UpperLower Limit Value C Device Upper Value 100 Constant Lower Value OY Description Control Device Specify the following options for the control device Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Set the data size of the device 16 bit or 32 bit If you change the data size of an existing object the conditional statement will be deleted Type Set the data form of the device signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float If you change the data type of an existing object the conditional statement will
104. or break down if the installation environment is not suitable for the protection rating e The standard is only for protection from dust and water Use care to protect against oil corrosives or metal particles e Ifthe gasket breaks down due to exposure to chemicals or continuous vibration the protection from dust and water may be weakened e When you install or mount the XGT Panel be careful not to damage the product e The XGT Panel should be installed in a location that is free from physical impact and vibration XGT Panel is designed to comply with IEC 61131 2 e Avoid installing the XGT panel where it is exposed to direct sunlight e Avoid exposing the XGT panel to severe temperature changes The product may malfunction or break down due to condensation forming during rapid temperature movement e The XGT panel is designed to operate in a temperature range of 0 50 C Operating the XGT panel in conditions outside of the specified temperature range may result in screen color changes or malfunction may occur e The XGT panel is designed to operate in relative humidity range of 10 85 Operating the XGT panel in conditions outside of the specified relative humidity range may result in malfunction or break down due to moisture damage during high humidity e Avoid exposure to corrosive or inflammable gases 5 7 1 2 Installation Safety e When making fixing holes or wiring penetrations avoid small particles e
105. playing recorded files specify a device to control playback order If you do not select this option the most recently created file will be played first Description Enter a description for the object es e Ifyou select an XGT Panel that is not a TTM series panel an error can occur when you execute the Movie Player object e Even if you create the Movie Player object if you don t set the option in Common gt Project Property Setting Use Video you cannot use the object lf Use Video Recording screen size Recording frame rate Recording bit rate Video input screen size Video capture screen size f QCIF 176 144 QVGA G20 240 f 15 Frame Second 30 Frame Second C 256 KB Second f 512 KB Second f 1024 KB Second As the encoding factors frame rate or bit rate goes higher the results can be better in terns of the video quality f QCIF 1767144 f QVGA G20 240 CO VGA 640 480 f QCIF 1767144 f QVGA G20 240 VGA 640480 Recording Settings Image Settings e To change the object size set the option in Common P Project Property 537 Setting gt Use Video Video input screen size e You can take a screenshot of the current screen in JPG format in Display Video File or Display Video Input But if the video playback is stopped the captured file is not generated e You cannot play a currently recording video and capture a screenshot when you have designat
106. project can support a total of 65 534 windows and parts However windows 65531 65534 are reserved for decimal HEX ASCII and real keypads respectively You can adjust the size of a base window but not the sizes of other window types 2 3 1 Adding Windows or Parts You can insert three types of windows from the Project pane You can also drag and drop the pop up and part windows onto the base window The following table describes how to add windows Base Screen Right click Base Screen and then click Insert Window Right click Window click Insert and then drag and drop the window onto the Base window Part Right click Part click Insert and then drag and drop the window onto the Base window LSiIs 46 2 3 2 Configuring Windows XP Builder allows you to customize window properties such as which window appears when the interface is started from the control panel 2 3 2 1 Opening or Closing a Window To open a window double click the window name in the Project pane To close a window right click the window name and select Close To view thumbnails of all the project windows select View gt Screen Thumbnails T W 05534 2 3 2 2 Setting a Window as the Start Window The start window is the window that appears when the interface is run on the XGT Panel The start window must be a base window and it will appear in boldface in the Project pane fig 65532 HEX Key
107. read and write devices Offset in Write Operation Iv Ze 7 Offset vias Device O Device B M Read Read Device Vv B Device R D EEE Write Check T Write Check Device D B Device D B lt Reading device set gt lt Reading device not set gt Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Read Set whether or not to use a separate device for reading data When you set the read device even if it is same as the reference device in the Basic setting the offset is only applied to the write device If the read device is different from the reference device the value is written to the write device during the input process In contrast when the input process is stopped the value is read from the read device and the data is displayed For example if the device value is as follows Device address Device value Reference D10 100 Device Read Device D20 200 356 357 LSIs The result of writing 500 to the numeric input object is as follows Condition Value from controller Value displayed in XGT Panel Read not set D10 500 500 D20 200 Read set D10 500 200 D20 200 The values in the controller are same but the data displayed in the XGT Panel is different Write
108. second Width Ratio Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop down list or entering a value directly in to the field You can set a ratio of 1 600 Text Plate Color Click to set the background color for figures Space Set the indent from the margin of the object If you select left alignment you can set the left indent If you select right alignment you can set the right indent Font Style Set a font style bold italic strikeout or underline You can apply more than one option at atime 375 Horizontal Alignment Set the horizontal alignment Left Center or Right e Detail The detail settings for text input objects include the following Secunty Level g Extended E T Ofset Keypad Option Action Condition Display Trigger Read Device F Device R Write Check Device H b EEE E 1 sec Display Mode Transparent Security Level Set the security level for the object The higher the security level the shorter the authorization time when the password is entered When the authorization time expires the user must enter the password again to use the object Offset Click the checkbox to use the offset function You can offset the device address based on the value of the offset device For example if the starting device address is P100 XP Builder reads the value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value If the offset value
109. text to the text table before editing the object You must select text for the on and off states from the same text table 260 261 Text Table Click to open the text table and select text The color and font properties set in the text table will be imported with the text Select From Text Table pee v Language Engish United States gt Select a text table di and language no OOO TOO Ba SSS 1 Registered text table list E aay 3 o a aaa aaa ai B 9 CE On lt gt Off Copy Click to copy the text and formatting from the on state to the off state or vice versa Delete On Off Caption Click to clear text settings for the current state Font Select a font from the drop down list Size Set a text size from the drop down list or enter a value directly into the field Width Ratio Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop down list or entering a value directly in to the field You can set a ratio of 1 600 Change the Property of Text Table Click to use different color and font properties for the text than what is specified in the text table This option is active only when you import text from the text table Color Seta font color Font Style Set a font style bold italic strikeout or underline You can apply more than one option at atime Horizontal Alignment
110. the XGT Panel type the panel must support similar color properties For example you cannot export a project that uses color to a panel that supports only black and white Ensure that the color settings in the project match the capabilities of the XGT Panel 3 4 3 Cannot Select a Communication Protocol This error occurs when you attempt to select the same communication protocol for multiple XGT Panels Only one communication protocol can be used for a connected panel To resolve the problem select a different communication protocol for different panels For more information refer to lt 2 6 1 Transferring to an XGT Panel gt 3 4 4 I Cannot Save Project Properties after Editing Them This error occurs when you attempt to select the same communication protocol for multiple XGT Panels Only one communication protocol can be used for a connected panel To resolve the problem select a different communication protocol for different panels For more information refer to lt 2 6 1 Transferring to an XGT Panel gt 168 169 3 4 5 Text does not Display Properly If text does not display properly when opening the project on another computer or on an XGT Panel a font used in the project may not be installed on the computer or XGT Panel In this case import or export the project font as needed In XP Builder click Tool gt Install Font or Export Font specify a file location and click OK 3 4 6 I Cannot Enter Text in another Langua
111. the current device value as a hexadecimal number Depending on command Displays the current value based on the command properties To change the display format 1 On the XGT Panel touch and hold the screen to open the main menu 2 Touch Option gt Monitor 3 Inthe Options window touch a display format Options 4 Touch OK to save your changes Nore Real number and string data types are displayed as real numbers and strings respectively of display format you choose For more information about data types for each PLC command refer to the PLC user manual 4 4 2 6 Changing the Current Device Value You can change the current device value from the Program Monitor To change the current value of a PLC device 1 From the Program Monitor window select a device 5 Touch Menu to display a menu dialog box Press Test to change the value UJ 4 Press OK Bo When you selecting bit type device the dialog box to select ON OFF will be displayed Number input unit or string input unit will be displayed depending on the inputted data type After selecting the device to be changed you can select the current device value 7COMMENT gt BGAE analog set bar graph temp_set Removed ri LSS 546 4 5 Viewing or Changing XGT Panel Information To view or change XGT Panel information 1 Touch and hold the XGT Panel screen to access the menu 2 Touch Communication gt XGT
112. the currently selected device and its position in the device map e Address or Tag Tabs Click the tabs to view information by address or by tag f Tag List 117 LSis Shows the tags registered to each device 2 5 5 Evaluating Project Size Memory Usage When the current project data is transferred to XGT Panel the files are saved and transferred with the extension hmi The size of an HMI file must not exceed the memory limit of the XGT Panel so it is important to know the size of the HMI file and the components of the current project To evaluate the project size 1 Create a project as described in lt 2 Project Development gt 2 Select Tool gt Memory Statistics The memory size of each element is shown including windows and common data Memory Statistics Item Size Bytes Project property 233 Screen 14731 Text table Script Schedule Logging Flow alarm System alarm History alarm Reope Font Image Additonal informaton Project file Sound Sound Files Total size 9586435 Notes e Memory statistics do not include the sizes of images used in the project Image and font sizes are included in the total memory size If an image is used more than once ina project the file is only transferred to the XGT Panel once so the memory size is the same as the size of the individual image e Ifthe memory required for images or fonts is quite large you can set the storage location f
113. the panel or use the mouse pointer _XP_VNC_INTERLOCK BIT HS0503 0 When turned on a user connected via XP VNC cannot make inputs with a mouse or keyboard _Na_Token_Count WORD HS0072 Display the acquired number of the token during N 1 communication _Na_Station WORD HS0073 Display the station number of the XGT Panel during N 1 communication _1_ON BIT HSoooo Set to turn on the first time devices D are scanned The tag is skipped on subsequent scans You can use this tag to initialize a program _Enable_XP_Remote BIT HSos04 Display whether or not it can be O operated by XP Remote _Has_Ctrl_Right BIT HSo0075 0 Display whether or not the XGT Panel has the right to operate If XP Remote has the right it turns off _XP_Remote_Count WORD HSo076 Display the number of XP Remote instances that are connected to an XGT Panel _Ctrl_Right_XP_Remote_ID WORD HS0077 Display the ID of an XP Remote instance that has the right to operate _Ctrl_Right_XP_Remote_IP WORD HS0078 Display the IP address of an XP Remote instance that has the right to operate 32bit _RS232C_Over_Current_War BIT HSo950 Over current detected in an XGT ning 9 Panel from a PLC connected via RS 180 232C only for the iXP series _VM_Mod_Over_Current_Wa_ BIT HSo9g50 Over current detected in an XGT rning A Panel from a PLC connected via the VM module only for the iXP series _EXT_Mod_
114. the right of the device field Backup Trigger Specify a device to back up the recipe data saved ina Device removable drive such as a USB drive or CF card Seta condition for backing up the data Rising edge or Falling edge Backup Complete Specify a bit device to turn on when the backup is complete Device ees e Writing and reading cannot execute simultaneously When two devices meet the same condition simultaneously writing will be performed first e Upto 10 000 recipes up to 255 basic or file recipes can be registered in XP Builder e Up to 255 data blocks can be registered in each recipe e The object device used for recipe data transfer uses signed or unsigned 16 or 32 bit devices To create a recipe 1 Inthe Project pane right click Basic Recipe or File Recipe 2 Click Insert Name Recipe Description Se n E Data Display As Device D Poio0 Ex No of Device 8 Block count i DEC HEX co co co Co oo Co 3 Set the following properties Name The name of recipe You can register up to 32 recipes and set the recipe number between 1 and 255 If you want to change the name right click the recipe name in the Project pane and click Rename Device Set the device address to transfer the recipe data Data type View the data type of the device When you enter the value in the data block the data type
115. the same time Use Image Reverse The switch image is reversed when you tap the object or a condition is met If you set this option you cannot use the Transparent BG Image option or the On Off image If you set the Transparent BG Image option you cannot use this option On Click to configure options for the object in the on state Off Click to configure options for the object in the off state Image Type Set whether or not to change colors and patterns when switching between on and off states If you select the change color or pattern option you must select a vector image for the object To view characteristics of raster or vector images refer to lt 2 3 6 4 Managing Image Libraries gt Not Change Color Pattern Use the original image You can apply the pattern or color to the image Select the image to display for On or Off status from raster vector or user registered images Same Image amp Change Select a vector image You cannot select a raster Color Pattern in On Off image Apply a pattern or color to the image Library Click to select an image from the library In the library list image categories are distinguished by the ends of their names The vector image category ends with _V and the raster image category ends with _R Patterns can be applied only to the images 4 Reference Open Click to browse for images on your computer When you select an image from yo
116. while HWo000 4 recording playing or creating the LSis 38 Save Settings Description video capture file When an error occurs while creating the video capture file the code is stored by the error code saving device HWoo004 Turns Off when you turn off camera features When starting the recording process When the recording process is stopped or completed When creating the video capture file When playing the video When playback is stopped or completed When installation of a storage device for video files and capture files is complete 39 5 bit On when collecting the video file list HWoo00 5 6 bit On when collecting the video capture HWoooo 6 file list For more information about error codes during recording refer to lt 3 3 Resolving Error Codes during Recording gt Use Event Recording Set to use event recording options Event Recording Trigger Device Set a bit device to record the previous and post situations for the event When the device turns On recording starts Recording ends after the designated interval Event Recording Time Set recording intervals and the pre and post time 5 60 seconds Stop Device of Event Recording Standby Set whether or not to stand by for interval recording In case of Off gt On stand by is stopped and in case of On gt Off Stand by is started Save Settings Description While standing by video ca
117. will be added to the list of available toolbars on the left of the Customize window You can drag icons from the toolbars at the top of the XP Builder window to the new toolbar Customize Commands Toolbars Keyboard Menu Options M2 FS GBL 1 About XP Builder To add or remove icons on toolbars 1 Click Tool gt Customization gt Commands 2 Click a tool category on the left and then drag and drop a command onto an existing toolbar Or to remove an icon drag it from a toolbar to the Customize window To select which toolbars to show 1 Click Tool gt Customization Toolbars Rename Delete 2 Click the checkboxes to the left of the toolbars to select which to show checked and which to hide Unchecked El Gi 30 O LG 2 fF 100 2 h SB SB ise 229 FER ES SM eee me DEY s c Default Korean Korez fa E a F i De F oiie e gt Project 3 5 New Project g8 Project Property 3 Communication Settin Be Special Device Setting 5 i Screen Base Screen 1 Base Screen E Window F 65531 DEC Keypad 65532 HEX Keypad 65533 ASCII Keypac 1 3 2 2 Customizing Keyboard Shortcuts To customize keyboard shortcuts hotkeys 1 Click Tool gt Customization Keyboard 2 Click a tool category from the drop down list and then click a command 3 Click the Press New Sh
118. window 8010 Recipe device setting is not correct Check whether the number of the recipe devices exceeds the maximum device setting size The device has not been specified or the number of devices exceeds the maximum allowed Verify the specified devices in the recipe entry window 9000 The download data size XX MB exceeds the maximum size 10 MB The total size of the selected data exceeds the maximum memory available for download to the XGT Panel Unselect items to reduce the total data size and try again 9001 The font XX used in the project is not the font installed in the system Change it into the font The specified font is not installed on the system Install the font on the system or specify another font in the project properties 158 159 Error Message installed in the system If you do not change it the text might not How to Resolve the Error be displayed 11000 Font XX file is not detected The specified font cannot be found or is not installed on the system Try restarting XP Builder If the problem reoccurs install the font on the system or specify another font in the project properties 11001 Characters that cannot be The selected font cannot display the special output as font XX are included characters you are using You must select another Check whether you used any font that is capable of displaying the special charact
119. window to Max shape size J a Tey T System Alarm 11 The objects are all spaced evenly 2 3 5 5 Setting Viewing Options You can set viewing options as described in the following table Thumbnail e You can show all windows in a project on a single screen Double click a window to select it e Click View gt Screen Thumbnails Screen Thumbnail Pan Window e You can view the current window in a birds eye view and scroll through the windows e Click View gt Pan Window 18 BirdsEye Add h pi Hl Mi Sub 19 M M i M l Zooming e You can zoom in or out on the current window e Click the magnifier icon on the toolbar You can also enter a magnification percentage in the toolbar or select one of the presets in the dropdown list 100 i Property Viewer e You can view and edit information about windows figures or objects on the current window without opening a dialog box e Click View gt Property Viewer then select an object or window Property Viewer x Word Message SE Top Left X Coordinate 331 Top Left Coordinate 132 Width 80 Height 30 Device P0010 Device Size 16 bit Device Type Unsigned DEC Select Message Indirect Description Use BG Image Library Frame Color BG Color Use Frame Frame Color Select Text Table Use Script Select Script Offset False Offset Device Display Mode Transparent 19
120. 00 files can be saved to the backup path 5 The number of files per directory in the video file backup path exceeds the limit Format the storage device and reinstall it Up to 100 files can be saved in the backup path and if more than 100 files are saved by user manipulation recording cannot be started 6 The video file cannot be deleted due to a file system problem Format the storage device and reinstall it 7 The video file cannot be created due to a file system problem Format the storage device and reinstall it 8 Creating a list of stored video files is in progress Try again later Refer to 5th byte of the status device 10 The safety removal switch of the video file backup storage device is deactivated 11 A video is being played Recording is not available 12 A recording is in progress Recording cannot be started again 13 A file cannot be created in the current storage device 14 This file format cannot be played 101 The path for saving a video capture file is not specified in XP Builder 102 The storage device for saving video capture files is not installed or the saving path cannot be created in the device 150 151 103 The current free space is not enough to save the video capture file At least 10MB of free space is required to save the video capture file 104 The number of files in the video capture file backup path exceeds the limit Format the stor
121. 0001 Word Switch P0100 B 1 SD00002 Word Switch POOOOS B 2 SBO0002 Bit Switch Main POOOO4 B 2 LBOQO001 Bit Lamp Main POOOOL B 2 SBO0003 Bit Switch Main 4b bl Find Result 4 Find Result 4 Script Find Result To replace all objects in a range of addresses at once 1 Click an object to select it and then click Tool gt Find Replace All The current object s address is shown in the Find All window Find All cetuhat SET waa 0 FOROS Replace Device count 5 5 ET Display in Find Result 27 i Indude used tag 2 Click Replace 3 Enter the original device address in the Find what field and the new address in the Replace with field Replace All Find what Bit word Replace with Device count Display in Find Result 2 Indude used tag 4 Click Replace All 5 Click Yes to confirm the address replacement Note To replace addresses in a specified range change the Device Count setting Addresses 122 123 will be replaced for the number of devices you specify 2 5 6 3 Viewing Device Cross References You can view device cross references to see device and script information for the entire project at once To view device cross references click Tool Cross Reference Device addresses tags positions object types and descriptions are shown in the Output pane You can double click an entry in the cross reference to view device or script details Ou
122. 04 06 2015 04 08 Message 3 Groupi 201370406 2013 04 08 Message d Groupe 2013 04 08 2013 04 08 Message g Groupe 2013 04 08 lt All occurred alarms gt Occurrence Group Restore Check Frequency 20130408 Message 2013 04 06 2013 04 06 Message 2013 04 06 2013 04 00 Message 3 2013 04 00 lt Alarm Groupz filtered gt Description Enter a description for the object pn e Header The header settings for the history alarm viewer object include the following Alarm History General i Use Header Basic Plate Color gt o Text HE taco Change Color by States Extended Header Edit From Text Table in Header Edit yyy MM D a ae E ae ee See Cell Size 4 Use Header Set whether or not to use a header Plate Color Set the background color for the header Text Color Set the text color for the header Change Color by States Set the color for the rows based on the device state Check Plate Color Check Text Color Restoration Plate Color Set a background color for rows of checked alarms If you don t set this option the rows are displayed with the default color set in the Frame Color option from the Basic setting Set a text color for rows of checked alarms If you don t set this option the rows are displayed with the default color set in the Color option from the Text setting Set a background color for rows of restored alarms If you don t set t
123. 1 1 communication the screen refresh time will slow down LSis 148 2 Project Development The following drivers support N 1 communication Manufacturer Driver LS Industrial Systems LSIS XGK LINK LSIS XGI XGR XEC LINK LSIS XGB LINK LSIS GM LINK LSIS MASTER K 80 120 200 300 1000 S LINK LS Mecapion LS Mecapion VS VP Servo Drive Mitsubishi Electric MITSUBISHI MELSEC A LINK Corporation MITSUBISHI MELSEC OnA Q LINK 149 LSIs l In XP Builder you may be notified of an error via a code in the Results pane or a message in a pop up window In these cases locate the error in the corresponding sections that follow and take the appropriate steps to resolve the error For errors that are not identified by an error code or a pop up message refer to lt 3 4 Resolving Other Issues gt for possible remedies The following subsections describe how to resolve error codes during recording These error codes are displayed by the device that saves error codes 1 The path for saving video files has been set in XP Builder 2 A device for saving video files has not been installed or the patch for saving video files cannot be created in the device 3 The current free space is less than the maximum file size At least 10MB free space must be available before recording 4 The number of files in video file backup path exceeds the limit Format the storage device and reinstall it Up to 1 0
124. 10 000 flow alarms can be added e The specified bit device is monitored continuously by the flow alarm object When the bit device is on the alarm occurs and when the bit device is off the alarm is cleared e f more than two flow alarms occur simultaneously the message at the bottom of the window shows the messages in sequence e A flow alarm message invokes text in the language specified in the project settings The message can be shown an alternate language if the translation exists in the text table e You can set each screen not to execute a specified alarm 4 1 6 History Alarms You can use history alarms to monitor or review data about the state of a device You can view and manage history alarms with the History Alarm Viewer or Alarm Navigator objects The History Alarm Viewer object displays a list of the alarms that have occurred It stores the alarm history and allows you to manage it With the Alarm Navigator you can view a list of alarms that have occurred If there are too many alarms to view you can filter the data to be shown History alarms are organized in alarm groups When an alarm is triggered or restored the time device address and alarm details are saved to non volatile memory 209 To set general properties for history alarms 1 Inthe Project pane double click History Alarm This will open the History Alarm Property tab in the editing area Backup stroage path Not used Control D
125. 13704705 ell s 04 00 AS04700 2013 04 00 201 s 04 00 AUS04 06 2013 04 00 elta 040g AUS04 08 201370470 ell a04 0g AS04705 201370405 To view the next rows you can use a special switch Create the special switch to the editing area and click History Alarm Row Scroll gt Next row The rows are moved to the next rows like below Restore Frequency Ref 3 0l a05 2z edla iS 03052 013 05 22 edy iz 2013052 03 05 ee elyi 20302 edla 052z eilai 203 05 2013 05 z ellai e0305 z If the each size of reference rows is different some row can be cut off as below Qecurrence Wessage Group 2013 05 22 eUli 05 e2 2013 05 22 2013 05 22 eUl 0b e2 2013 05 22 2013 05 22 eUla Ob e2 2013 05 22 2013 05 22 eUla 0b e2 20130522 2013 05 22 eUla 0b e2 2013705 722 To view the total data in the row use the special switch again Create the special switch to the editing area and click History Alarm Row Scroll gt Next row e Fit to a max header length Set to fit the longest header length when you use the text table to input header titles If you don t set this option the header length changes whenever the runtime language is changed 496 e Cell Size You can set the length of the Message and Group columns The rest of the columns differ by header type and font When you change the size of the History Alarm Viewer object the Message and Group columns are changed based on the value you set in Cell Size If you set the Message a
126. 228 4 2 2 2 Using the Script Tool BOX ccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 229 Led 255 Specifying Local Scripts wesserespszeasssnsesnnssenssenssenssnnssnnssnassenssenssenssnsssnassenssninss 231 42 24 Specifying Display Changa C010 wc anctnsenctnvenctnvenstnvenstnvenctnvensdninstnindn insta ananananananantinita 232 Meo ep ngs dS ip lalohoie ge we ic a 234 Mp po E L a eee A A 235 ep epee sofa g eeoie floc ee 236 4 2 3 Using Scripts to Control XGT Panel FUNCTIONS sseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaanaaes 239 4 2 3 1 Understanding System FUNCtIONS eceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaaeeeeeeeeeeees 239 4 2 3 2 Understanding Print FUNCtIONS cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeees 240 4 2 3 3 Understanding Window Change FUNCtions cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 241 4 2 3 4 Understanding Script FUNCtIONS ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeaeeeeeneees 241 4 2 3 5 Understanding String FUNCtIONS ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeseeeeeeeeeeeees 243 4 2 3 6 Understanding Device FUNCTIONS ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeaeeneeeeeeees 245 4 2 3 7 Understanding Communication FUNCTIONS cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 247 4 2 3 8 Understanding Memory FUNCTtIONS eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeseeeeeeees 249 4 2 3 9 Understanding Data Conversion FUNCTIONS ccceeeeeeeeeee
127. 30 gt it tn s P 4 a Timeout rm 100ms Wait to send ya ms Retry count 3H Use G5000 simulator 2 5 Simulating amp Debugging After developing an interface it is a good idea to test it before putting it to use XP Builder offers multiple ways to check the integrity of your data including an interface simulator data check and device map functions and a script cross reference that can help you debug your program 2 5 1 Simulating an Interface The simulator provided in XP Builder allows you to verify the function and appearance of your interface before you transfer it to an XGT Panel By testing your project you can correct errors and verify the operation and response of the system in advance To run the simulator 1 Click Tool gt Simulation Common Tool Communication Window Toolbox Help gt Cross Reference D r Find in Active screen Ctrl F a Replace in Active screen Ctri R GE Find Replace All Chines gi Memory Statistics 2 Data Check V ax Script Check Find All Script B Register object caption to TextTable automtically ation Settin ce Setting lt Previous Screen Q gt Next Screen W m S Export Font Install Font EX Keypad 5 customization SCI Keypad OAT Keyp Simulation XP PD creen 1 HTML Device Copier CSV Converter Lagt Graphic02049 gf Graphic_test vr ees e Except for the menu and title the simulation
128. 4 Select the protocol to Ethernet 5 Select Detail Settings configure the IP settings and click OK UDF IF 192 158 Destination port 2004 IW Use extended protocol LSis 102 2 Project Development 6 Set the additional connection properties in Connection Property and click OK Storage Settings Global Script Settings Aundliary Settings Extended Controller Settings Summary XGTPanel Settings Screen Settings Securty Settings Key Window Settings Language Series ixr Seres 24 BIT color mode AS 232C SY power supply Model IXP80 TTA Add Controller Delete Controller v1 15 Refer to manual f Detail Settings frrr 30 100ms Watto send TE ms Retry count 3 T Use XG5000 simulator Program monitor 103 LSIs SS Project Development 2 2 4 2 Connecting with a Serial Port Connect the XGT Panel to the controller via a serial port You can select RS232C RS485 or RS422 2 4 2 1 Using RS232C 1 Click Common gt Project Property Setting XGT Panel Settings Storage Settings Global Script Settings Audliary Settings Extended Controller Settings Summary AGT Panel Settings Screen Settings Secunty Settings Key Window Settings Language 24BIT color mode RS 232C 5V power supply Series iXP Series Model ixP80 TTA Add Controller Delete Controller v1 23 fksis AGK LINK Y Refer to manual Deta
129. 6 20 8326 6287 e mail chenxs lsis com cn www l sis com 10310001308 m LSIS Chengdu Office _ Chengdu China Address 12FL Guodong Buiding No 52 Jindun Road Chengdu 610041 P R China Tel 86 28 8612 9151 9226 Fax 86 28 8612 9236 e mail comysb Ilsis com m LSIS Qingdao Office _ Qingdao China Address YinHe Bldg 402 Room No 2P Shandong Road Qingdao City Shandong province 266071 P R China Tel 86 532 8501 6068 Fax 86 532 8501 6057 e mail wangzy Isis com cn LSIS Europe B V Address 1st Floor Tupoleviaan 48 1119NZ Schiphol Rijk The Netherlands Tel 31 0 20 654 1420 Fax 31 0 20 654 1429 e mail junshickp lsis com a LSIS Wuxi Co Ltd _ Wuxi China Address 102 A National High amp New Tech Industrial Development Area Wuxi Jiangsu 214028 P R China Tel 86 510 8534 6666 Fax 86 510 8534 4078 e mail caidx Isis com cn m LSIS Dalian Co Ltd _ Dalian China Address No 15 Liaohexi 3 Road Economic and Technical Development zone Dalian 116600 China Tel 86 411 273 7777 Fax 86 411 8730 7560 e mail cuibx Isis com cn xX LS Industrial Systems constantly endeavors to improve its product so that information in this manual is subject to change without notice LSIS Co Ltd 2013 All Rights Reserved 2013 11
130. 719 Thank you3S Thank yout 007707719 Thank youd Thank yout 007707719 Thank yous Thank yout Delete Alarm Data in Alarm Viewer Page Set to delete all data on the current page except for Unrecovered alarm data when the switch is activated Delete All Occurrence No Set to delete data for triggered alarms when the switch is activated 302 303 Delete Recovered All Data in Alarm Viewer Set to delete all recovered data when the switch is activated Delete Selected Line in Alarm Viewer Set to delete the specified data except for unrecovered alarm data when the switch is activated Go to History Alarm Viewer Detail When an alarm occurs additional information related to the alarm may be required to solve the problem In that case a window can be invoked with information from other objects Set this function to see detailed history alarm data when the switch is activated To set the function to show detailed data 1 Edit the detailed window screen 2 Check the box next to Show detail window 3 In History Alarm Viewer set options under Use Detailed Window Position 4 Inthe XGT panel select an alarm and then tap the special switch Editing method Ho of aarme ia i H Assign aam device iz Continuous C Each Teut tihi ami 3 p j at m oe i Samping trne io cereal Show detal window Continucus T Each M se aam count devica m G History Alarm F
131. Data in Alarm Viewe Delete Selected Line in Alarm Viewer Go to History Alarm Viewer Detail History Alarm Filter a History Alarm Viewer Line Down History Alarm Viewer Line Up History Alarm Viewer Fage Down i History Alarm Viewer Page Up Occurence No of Selected Alarm Print History Alarm Selected History Alarm Viewer Line Up Selected History Alarm Viewer Page Dowr E History Alarm Row Scroll H Logging Viewer 301 LSIS History Alarm Viewer Check All Alarm Data in Alarm Viewer Check Selected Alarm Data in Alarm Viewer Description Set to view all alarm data or only specified alarm data by selecting the alarm The view time is recorded for both cases When checking all data Group Thank yout 2007707719 Thankyou Thank yout 00707719 Thank yous Thank yout UOT 07 19 Thank youd 2007707719 Thank yous ccur rence COUR OF 19 Thank youd 2007707719 Thank you 200707719 Thank yous 2007707719 Thank youd Thank you Thank yout Group Thank yout Thank yout Thank yout Thank yout Acknowledge OOF 07419 O07 07019 0070719 0070719 0070719 Thankyous Thank yout 0070719 e When checking the selected alarm data Occurrence Group Acknowledge CUOTAUFA19 Thankyoul Thank yout CUO AOA 19 007019 Thank yous Thank yout 007019 Thank youd Thank yout CUOTAOFA19 Thankyous Thank yout Qccurrence Message Acknowledge 007707719 Thank youl Thank yout CUO Ore 19 007707
132. Examples of device address formats are shown in the following table Notes e Inthe sample expressions that follow 1 refers to the direct device address which varies by PLC type For more information refer to lt 4 2 1 3 Understanding Constants and Data Types gt e Connection numbers range from o to 3 Bit Variable X X Conn Add Device Address Examples X MXz_1 X 0 MX1 X 1 MX21 X 0 1 MXz1 Short Variable S S Conn Add S MWooo S 0 MWooo S 1 MWooo S 2 1 MWooo Integer Variable L L Conn Add L MWooo L 0 MWooo L 1 Y MWooo L 2 4 1 MWooo Unsigned Short Variable W W Conn Add W MWooo W 0 MWooo W 1 MWooo W 2 1 MWooo Unsigned Integer D Conn Add D MWooo LSS 224 4 Reference Statement Example Device Address Examples Variable D D 0 MWooo D 1 MWooo D 2 1 MWooo Float Variable F F Conn Add F MWooo F 0 MWooo F 1 MWooo F 2 1 MWooo 4 2 1 3 Understanding Constants and Data Types Scripts employ a systematic expression of data The following table describes the constants used by scripts in XP Builder Decimal Numbers 124 34 O 2334454 Real Numbers 0 123 10 45E12 0 0 Hexadecimal Numbers Ox4 5FA oxfff Binary Numbers true false Characters a 1 0 225 LSIs ee Variou
133. History Alarm Set to print the selected history alarm data when the switch is activated An alarm group can be chosen from the history alarm list 304 4 Reference Selected History Set to change the line or page of the history alarm data Alarm Viewer Line Up when the switch is activated Selected History Alarm Viewer Page Down History Alarm Row Scroll Next Row Set to move to the specified area of the history alarm data when the switch is activated If the number of data Pre R an rows exceeds the rows supported by the XGT panel this First Page function allows you to view more data Last Page Logging Viewer Logging Viewer Line Down Set to scroll logging data up or down when the switch is activated Logging Viewer Line Up Logging Viewer Page Down Logging Viewer Page Up Logging Row Scroll First Column Set to move to the specified area of the history alarm data when 305 LSIs a Last Column Next Column Previous Column Next Page Previous Page the switch is activated If the number of data rows exceeds the rows supported by the XGT panel this function allows you to view more data As the following example illustrates fixed columns never move but the unfixed areas can be moved so that you can view more data Fixed Unfixed _ _ _ _ _ _ _ lt or_p I Time Location Process 3 Proces
134. History Alarm editing area 3 Select a text table Bit Message Description Click On or Off gt Text Table Basic Display gt 2J Extended On gt Of Copy e 14 m Bink Not Use Change the Property of Text Table Bold italic 7 Strikeout 7 Underline Horizontal Alignment Ic Left i Center i Right Vertical Alignment Top Word Message Select a text table in the Select TextTable field and then click Text Table S General Select Text Table a coo isplay gt Text Text Table Case Operation aoa T t Tahoma d Size 1g 1g J Change the Property of Text Table C Blink ww C JHM m Font Style Bold Itai M Strikeo m Horizontal Alignment H Left Center Vertical Alignment V Bit Switch Word Switch Change Screen Click the check box next to Use Caption click the check box next to From Text Box and then click Text Table LSis 188 Switch Special Switch Multi Switch Bit Lamp Word Lamp N State Lamp History Alarm Click From Text Table in Header Edit and double click the Title Viewer area 4 Select a text string if necessary Note You can set the text to appear differently based on the value of device You can automatically add object captions to a text table to facilitate translation and management tasks when using multiple languages in a project To create a text table of captions 1 Create objects with text ca
135. IONS a iisiiasinsesennnnccvunn venerseciesealddwueibsledaenusidunriudedaaieas 11 1 3 2 5 Customizing Other Options ccceccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaeeneeeeeeeeeeees 12 2 Project Development ccccceeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeee essa eeesa ee ea esas eeaseeaaeeeeasees 13 2a Creating a project ee ee ee ee meee ee ee eee errr 13 oe We tees 64g ale a NeW a 0 ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee 13 2 1 2 Saving OO CGE acest re tec seg ee eee eg cen eeae ne seqearpoveceaneoesgee eoeedersoseceesescteeee weer 16 2 2 Configuring Project Properties ceccceceeeeeeeeeee eee eee eeeeeeeeee eee esaesaeseeeeeeeeesaeeaeees 17 2 2 1 Protecting the Project with FOSS WOU sess ssiesss tte shes dasiesertssisbesdaseeseddaddsbesdasiey 17 2 2 2 Viewing and Editing Properties cccceeeeeeeeeee teenie ieee eiiniiineneneeeeneneeeneeeeeeees 19 2 2 2 1 Changing Basic Project Properties eee 20 2 2 2 2 Changing XGT Panel SettingS ee iii eee 21 2 2 2 3 Changing Screen Window SettingS eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 23 2 2 2 4 Changing Security Settings axaceveeeveeeseeeversesrseerseerieeresereeevenevenstensveestenstesevieess 25 2 2 2 5 Changing Key Window Settings 0 eee 27 2 2 2 6 Changing Languages eee 28 2 2 2 7 Changing Storage SettindS 0 eee 30 2 2 2 8 Changing Global Script SettingS eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 31 2 2 2 9 Changing Auxiliary Settings 0 0 0 0 en
136. If you select the range condition specify the range Size 16bitor32bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 293 4 3 2 3 Change Screen Switch The Change screen switch allows the user to switch windows in the interface You can specify the type of window to change to when the switch is activated This section describes available settings for change screen switch objects e Basic The basic settings for change screen switch objects include the following Change Screen Switch G jp ae screen Type Base Screen Display 0 Device 5 e Extended creen No i Const Static Screen Change Type e Fixed C Previous Description Screen type Select a type of window to change to Static Set how the window changes Device The window switches to the window number that matches the device value If no window matches the device value the window does not change The window switches to a specified window regardless of the device value Screen No Set the window number or click Browse to locate a window Screen Change Type Select a method for changing windows The window switches to a specified window The window switches to the previous window Description Enter a description for the o
137. Mum Axis T Y Axis Y axis 48 axis 7 X Axis A Axis l Constant 655355 0 Constant 66635 0 Max Min Setting Specify the following options for the maximum mininum setting e Y Axis Type X Axis Type You can set the minimum and maximum value as many as the items of logging distribution charts added at Basic Settings Namely you cannot add or delete the items on the minimum and maximum value The type of the minimum and maximum value can be established as Constant or Device 484 485 Y Axis Max Y Axis Min You can set the minimum and maximum values of data to be displayed on the Y axis You can use a device value or a constant If the device value exceeds the minimum or maximum it is displayed as the minimum or maximum value of the graph un e a a m t wa a wu 1 b T 4 A I a X Axis Max X Axis Min You can set the minimum and maximum values of data to be displayed on the X axis You can use a device value or a constant If the device value exceeds the minimum or maximum value it is displayed as the minimum or maximum value of the graph The X axis displays the device values in order so you do not need to designate a minimum or maximum value e Line and Dot The line and dot settings for the realtime scatter graph object include the following General Basic setting of Line Max Min gee end Dot Num Use Li Line C Line T Use Dot
138. O WORD HSoo12 Display the number of the 2 global window _SECURITY_NO WORD HSo013 Display a defined security level _ZERO WORD HSoo014 Always contain the value of zero _C5ooMS WORD HSoo15 Increase value by 1 every 500 milliseconds _CiS WORD HSoo16 Increase value by 1 every second _C2S WORD HSoo0o17 Increase value by 1 every two seconds _CsS WORD HSoo018 Increase value by 1 every five seconds _C10S WORD HSoo019 Increase value by 1 every ten seconds _Change_to_Screen WORD HSo500 The device to change the basic window operates in window change mode _DAY_OF_WEEK WORD HSo003 Time info Day of week for the XGT Panel Sun o to Sat 6 _T50MS BIT HSoooo Repeat On and Off on a regular rA cycle of 50 milliseconds _T100MS BIT HSoooo Repeat On and Off ona regular 5 cycle of 100 milliseconds _No_Memo_Backup_Storage BIT HSo951 5 No external backup memory available _XPLinkParam_Load_Error BIT HSo100 Failed to process the parameter 2 uploaded from XP Manager _XP_VNC_Sever_ON BIT HSo100 1 XP VNC server is running _Web_Sever_ON BIT HSo100 Web server is running 2 _Size_All_ Flash _Low WORD HS0027 The total capacity of Flash memory Low order double word LS Is 178 179 _Size_All_Flash_High WORD HSo0029 The total capacity of Flash memory High order double word _Size_Available_Flash_Low WORD HS0031 The
139. Over_Current_W BIT HSo950 Over current detected in an XGT arning B Panel from a PLC connected via the expanded mode only for the iXP series _No_Movie_Backup_Storage BIT HSo951 No external memory for saving the 6 video is available _No_Movie_Still_Image_Bac BIT HSo0951 7 No external memory for capturing kup_Storage the video is available _No_Sound_File_Storage BIT HSo951 No external memory for saving the 8 sound file is available _SD_Attatched BIT HSoo51 2 Display whether or not the SD card is connected _Size_All_SD_ Low WORD HSo0058 The total capacity of SD storage Low order double word _Size_All_SD_High WORD HSoo60 The total capacity of SD storage High order double word _Size_ Available SD Low WORD HSo0062 The available memory of the SD storage Low order double word _Size_Available_SD_High WORD HSoo64 The available memory of the SD To set a tag as a device address 1 Double click an object to open the properties window storage High order double word 2 In the device field enter a tag manually or click the keyboard to the right of the field to specify the tag When you enter a tag name manually enter checkmark icon will change to a T to indicate a tag p Device 181 A_N as the first character The 4 Reference 3 Click the checkbox next to Tag Address HS0501 0 HS0503 0 Re HS0504 0 Address HS0501 0 errs M H50503 0 183 5 Click OK The tag icon
140. Project Development 3 Select a file with an xpg extension and click Open The new library will be added to the Graphic Library List pnic Li bi Ary yE ROTARY R if ROTARY V hema SYMBOL V VALVE 256R VALVE V ar Graphic02049 Graphic_test To import images into an existing library 1 Inthe Graphic Library pane click a user image library name to select it 2 In the Graphic List right click an empty space 3 Click Import T Graphic02049 ar Graphic_test Insert Image A Delete All Images 4 Selecta file with an xpg extension and click Open The images in the library file you selected will be added to the existing library LSis 100 KMronlieorrT i lovoln nmonr r0 I C t A CVE d l a ay g COWI l 2 4 Connecting Controllers Configure the communication settings for the XGT Panel and controller To connect an XGT Panel to the controller use the Ethernet connection and the serial port In the serial ports there are three connection methods RS232C RS485 and RS422 This section describes how to set the communication method For more details about XGT Panel settings refer to lt 2 2 2 2 XGT Panel Settings gt Changing 2 4 1 Connecting with Ethernet Connect the XGT Panel to the controller with an Ethernet cable To set the Ethernet method 1 Click Common Project Property Setting gt XGT Panel Settings Project Property Storag
141. QL ER MP Builder Project Edt Yew Common Tool Conmrunicsten Window Toobex Help anie R e aP ime is mi jj 30 Lig Fw PAHE Hai id a oH EES We Fe Me Deit o Korean Korei by E Ba gt Ghis g ee E 15488 Zaa Sie z x TooBox rok 17 Figure Objact i Select i Et Switch w a Word Switch Te Change Soeen Swich i Special Seach Phat Spade le Be Lar Tp Word Lamp ry my M S2ate Lame 3 Cl ck Bit Massage Word Masa i ome Word Messagi me a faa Humez ipy r g 8 E Numeric Inpa cp e k e amp Text Display A Tau Ranot E Text ingui oao 1 Gi Window TB Word Window Eh Gat Pai Th Word Part imation 4 Bar Graph B Pie Graph 2 Meter Graph Gutput Scie one e z O ia p on Dualpat i Find Result lt Find Result Senet Find Resi xn a Heeaiy See TA LSB Gt LINK G08 24 0 0 0 0 AP HUN 1 About XP Builder 1 3 2 5 Customizing Other Options In the Customize window you can customize additional options such as whether or not to show tool tips use large icons and show the most recently used commands first in menus and toolbars To customize these options click Tool Customization gt Options and then click the checkboxes next to the desired options M Show shortcut keys in ScreenTips Large Icons Personalized Menus and Toolbars Menus show recently used commands first Show full menus after a short delay Reset my usage data LSis 12
142. RR INDICATOR V KEY 256R KEYR KEY V PATTERN_256 R PATTERN_R PIPE 256 R PIPE_R PIPE V PUMPR PUMP_V iy PUSHDOWN_256_R EOG MEEMIN om jf ROTARY_256_R jE ROTARY_R Mf ROTARY_V if SAMPLETEST SLIDE 256 R SUDER E SLIDE V gf SYMBOL_R m SYMBOL_V ff TOGGLE V VALVE 256R 2 VALVE_R 3 To change the name of the library 89 LSIS n 4 Right click the library name and click Rename Or you can click the library name and click again mE CANK_256_R a onl ll TANK R a fi TANK V E TOGGLE 256R E TOGGLER E TOGGLE V d VALVE_256_R VALVE_R 5 Enter the new name and press the Enter key to confirm Bo e When you add an image library the name is set to Graphico2049 by default Additional libraries are numbered in ascending order from 2050 to 4095 e User image libraries are sorted in ascending order by name e The name of a system image library cannot be changed LSiIs 90 To delete a library 1 Inthe Graphic Library pane right click the library name 2 Click Delete Library fee T TOGGLE V z d VALVE_256_R i VALVER 8 VALVE V GraphicO20 Insert Image Import Export Rename You can add images to your user image library and edit them as well To add images to a User Graphic Library 1 Inthe Graphic Library pane right click a library name 2 Click Ins
143. SB device while running a project Project data may be corrupted and cause the project to malfunction Do not erase or move the directory or folders on the USB device Doing so may cause data to be corrupted or the project to malfunction When removing an SD or CF storage device turn on the safe removal switch on the back of the panel and remove the device only after the switch lamp turns off Failure to do so may cause the device to be unrecognized when you reconnect it When you reconnect a device allow at least three 3 seconds to establish the connection Failure to do so may cause the device to be unrecognized when you reconnect it When one USB device is connected turning on the power to the panel will set the USB device as the main storage device automatically When connecting multiple devices the first device connected is set at the main storage device automatically However removing devices does not change the selected storage device automatically You must reselect the main storage device 5 6 Managing External Storage Sources for Backup This section describes how to control external storage sources when making file backups such as logging recipe and screen image data You can manage the backup data in this way e You can back up data such as logging recipe and screen image data by saving them to a CF card SD card or a USB storage source according to the settings contained in XP Builder e If there is insufficient
144. Seo a nn mo a Fpa wa aa a 461 Display Condition Set the condition for displaying the graph Always Display Set to display always Display when Bit Set to display the specific index data when the bit is on On Off For example if you set the four indexes and the conditional device to Po100 Num Index Device Add Line Color Line Type Poon p ooon Dash Poo E froo Solid P0104 oor Dash P0105 tfo0 Solid The graph appears as shown based on the device status Sort Set a sort option oldest first or latest first Cont Add Click to enter a starting index and range Delete All Click to delete all input data at once Index Shows the index number of the device Device Add Shows the device address Line Color Set the line color for the graph Line Type Set the line type dash or solid Description Enter a description for the object 462 463 e Display The display settings for the logging trend graph object include the following Graph Logging Trend q General Transparent BG Basic Transparent Border ua Display No of Dispaly in X axis Reference Line Cursor Extended Const Device a No of Samples to Scroll Library Open i Scale No of Horizontal Point 3 2 X axis Height 16 No of Vertical Point 3 a Y axis Width E 6H A Frame Display Border Color W Plate Color Starting point Location Left Bottom
145. Set the horizontal alignment Left Center or Right Vertical Alignment Set the vertical alignment Top Middle or Bottom e Detail The detail settings for bit lamp objects include the following Bit Lamp gt Device EE Offset Click the checkbox to use the offset function You can offset the device address based on the value of the offset device For example if the starting device address is P100 XP Builder reads the value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value If the offset value is 10 for example then the referenced device address is P110 Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary 262 4 3 1 2 Word Lamp The form of a word lamp changes based on the text value of the connected device This section describes available settings for word lamp objects e Basic The basic settings for word lamp objects include the following Word Lamp q General Device v gt Device Display Size 16bits Type Unsigned DEC Text Operation Extended Description Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device windo
146. Settings 147 LSIs ee 4 Click the checkbox next to Use N 1 Communication and input the following parameters NM 1 station number Number of XGT Panel Max Token Holding Time 15 cous Use N 1 Communication Select whether or not to use N 1 communication N 1 Station Number Select a station number 0 15 The first station must be set to o Station numbers must be continuous or communication will fail Duplicated station numbers are not allowed Number of XGT Panel Select the total number of XGT panels you are using up to 16 Max Token HoldingTime Select the maximum time that each panel can hold the token up to 69 seconds The token is automatically released when the maximum time is reached mes e The total number of XGT Panels you specify must match the total number of stations exactly e The N 1 Settings option appears when you select a controller that supports N 1 communication e The more XGT panels you connect the slower the communication speed will be e All XGT Panels participating in N 1 communication should have the same controller settings and parameter settings except for station numbers if possible e When using N 1 communication the Program Monitor function is not supported and the controller monitor protocol cannot be used which results in decreased communication speed e N 1 communication does not function in the simulator e If you use this option with
147. Sync CONNeCtION eee cece ene e eee e etter eee a eee eeaeeeeeaeeeeeaa ees 134 2 6 2 Transferring to a Removable DNV Cis uidacrcuusasscorionnceeenendenasyenueepeaeien 135 2 6 3 Receiving a Project File from an XGT Panel ssssssscccccceceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeenstsssaees 137 2 6 4 Backing up Project Data Mrrmrnre PPrertre rPrertre Perr tt Freer tte freer er Pere v ec err ert er Pererrrr errr 139 2 7 Configuring Advanced Communication SettingS cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 142 2 7 1 Using 1 N Communication with Multiple Protocols sssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 142 2 7 2 Using 1 N COMMUNICATION WIth RSGBS ccsccccccccceeeeeeeceeeeenaeeeeesessesseeeeeeeeeeseeess 144 BFF SING IN COMIC OV oaea eae acess teste Santee teed ene 146 2 TOUDI NOONG eara eE EOE E OAE ES 150 3 1 Resolving Error Codes Found in the Results Pane ecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 152 3 2 Resolving Error Messages in Pop up WindOWsS s ssssssusunnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 161 3 3 Resolving Error Codes during Recording 2 ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesaesaesaeeeeeeeeeenes 166 Fle IRESOIVING Other SSCS neire a dene ape EEEa 168 3 4 1 Cannot Select the HS Internal DeVICC ccccccseeeccccseeececsseecessaueeecessaeseeeeas 168 3 4 2 Cannot Change the XGT Panel Wei sneeee eee ek ee een EaR 168 3 4 3 Cannot Select A COMMUNICATION Protocol ssccccceseesccensseeccesseeeeceseneeseesens 168 3 4 4 Cannot Save Proje
148. T HMI Memory is short Arrange HMI memory or Decrease project file size to send files Unit KB Source Flash Capacity 782 Target Flash Capacity 8192 Source CF Capacty 0 Target CF Capacity 0 Source USB Capacity 7950 Target USB Capacity 0 Ifthe available memory is insufficient to download only the revised part download the whole project instead to overwrite the memory 173 4 1 Common Data Common data properties apply to the entire project The following table describes common data types and their limitations Limit Tag Allows convenient management of 10 000 per tag group there is no devices when you register device limit on the number of tag groups addresses and enter tags for you Can create commonly used functions Text Table Stores commonly used text You 10 001 per text table there is no can invoke text from the text table limit to the number of text tables with various objects you can create Logging Records and saves monitored data 32 ina file Recipe Sets write or read values based on e 10 000 device recipes the conditions specified e 256 basic recipes s 000 file recipes Flow Alarm Streams text across the bottom of 10 000 the XGT Panel window when a certain condition is met History Alarm Saves the device status when a 10 000 certain condition is met You can use this function with the special switch object Scheduler Executes operations at specified 32 times Scrip
149. T Hai RTT a Backup Siovage Sey ee ee ee eee ee F H5951 2 BIT No Screen Backup Storage fico aa i a ek can ee Eien Cie ee e O eee ee ee Ti Se TM aan ee Spy es ee Ince ie ee a 606 607 5 6 5 Safe Removal Switch The safe removal switch is used to remove external storage devices without any loss of backup data When the safe removal switch is on and the storage device is not processing data the LED lamp will turn off If the storage device is processing data the LED lamp will turn off after the backup is completed automatically disengaging the storage device This means that when the LED lamp is turned off no backup action will be completed and the data in the storage device is inaccessible When the safe removal switch is activated and the LED lamp is off the storage device must be removed and reconnected to ensure that it is recognized The minimum time delay for removing and reconnecting storage devices after their safe removal is 5 seconds for SD cards and 3 seconds for CF cards The actions listed below describe situations where the LED lamp will not turn off even if the safe removal switch is turned on The LED lamp will only go off after the described actions are fully completed e While a backup file is being created or XP Builder is reading data e Ifthe images stored in the XP_User Image from an external storage device is being used as a part image and being loaded in the program e While reading or writing a file rec
150. The backup data you want to download is not in XGT Panel This error occurs when there is no backup data in the XGT Panel The backup path has been incorrectly designated The download path for the font or image file is incorrect Ensure that a USB drive is connected or a CF card is installed in the XGT Panel and then modify the download path in the project properties information The color is a user library larger than the number of colors that an XGT model can have now The XGT Panel that is currently connected does not support color You must change the project settings to black and white or connect to an XGT Panel that supports color The compressed project file you want to download is not in the XGT Panel This error occurs when a compressed project file does not exist on the XGT Panel To include the compressed projec file when transferring a project to an XGT Panel refer to lt 2 6 1 Transferring to anXGT Panel gt The executable file in the device and the executable file The executable file has been modified Transfer the entire project to the XGT Panel to send are not the same How to Resolve the Error The file already exists Would you overwrite A file with the same name exists in the directory you specified Click Yes to select another destination for the file or Cancel to discontinue saving the file The file cannot be read Check whether another program is being used
151. The download file is locked This may occur if the project file is being accessed by another connected computer If that is case ensure that the project is not open by more than one computer and try again The file is not writable Check the disk memory This error occurs when there is insufficient memory in the XGT Panel to store the file Check the memory in the XGT Panel and make additional memory available if necessary The maximum value must be larger than the minimum value Set the maximum value to be larger than the minimum value The number of characters that can be displayed should be an even number Set the number of characters in the character indicator and character input output units to an even number The number of the X axis displays that can be selected is between 3 and 120 Check and enter again The range of acceptable display numbers has been exceeded Set the number of X axis displays in the trend graph Display between 3 and 120 The password is incorrect Enter the correct password The previous project information is not available An earlier version of the project does not exist on the XGT Panel Transfer the entire project to the XGT Panel Refer to lt 2 6 1 Transferring toanXGT Panel gt The print template file does not exist The excel template for printing does not exist You must create a new template The project header information is wrong
152. The frames are different for each image Refer the following examples Pattern Frame Pattern Frame Pattern Frame Pattern FG Color Set a color for the foreground pattern Pattern BG Color Set a color for the background pattern Frame Color Set a frame color Blink Seta blink speed for the object The object will not blink The object will blink every three seconds The object will blink every two seconds The object will blink every second 259 LSIs e Text The text settings for bit lamp objects include the following Bit Lamp pean General G ics ae From Text Table Basic Display On or hi On gt Of Copy 9 Extended Font TT T Tahoma gt x oma Delete On Caption size 12 Width Ratio 1 LIYA Font Style Bold talic Strikeout Horizontal Alignment C Left Vertical Alignment f Top Use Caption Click the checkbox to use a text caption with the object When you select this option you can input text from a Text Table On Click to configure options for the object in the on state You must input the text in a text table Off Click to configure options for the object in the off state You must input the text in a text table From Text Table Click the checkbox to add text from a text table The Text Table option will be activated and the text input area will close Add the required
153. The right choice for the ultimate yield LSIS strives to maximize your profits in gratitude for choosing us as your partner XGT Panel XP Builder XGT Panel Series User s Maunal ok ot ee hee E E REE Z2Z7J2Z7272Jg 3 BESSeceeeres RP AASEEE SLL ARCS Sig alh Ae k E p Reliability A Safety Instructions Read this manual carefully before installing wiring operating servicing or inspecting this equipment LS f www lsis com Keep this manual within easy reach for quick reference 1 About XP Bullder ccccccccccccccccenncccceccecsnnncccceeeesennneeceeeesennnnsesesensnnans 1 DOV CUNY o estes oe ge E E E E dane eanone cess 1 14 1 XP BUIder COCCI Eras ctapccensett ce oceen ns susan ates E 1 1 1 2 Supported Hardware TY PeS scsceeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeesessaaaaaas 3 1 2 Installing and Updating states acs ce eaten eset Shee tetggsss tues teetenaeedenan 4 22 INANA P BOAT aorar E E E E ERRER 4 RAS De O L PA a E D T E T E E A T E E E N S 5 1 3 Interface GING FO AGUNG Siaitoieccasevatcsmncccccnccntinancinawsdwsncnedeansneactsueanecewenwantieusweeceannenes 6 DTP Builder Menace ssa E EE E EEEE 6 EA COM MOIS GIG OPTIONS eer aE E E E E E E E EEN E 7 1322 Uoan TOODA a eee eee 7 i32 2 Customizing cyasecigses ae gil nna 10 1 3 2 3 Customizing Menu OPTIONS eee eee teeter renee teenie eeeaaeeesaaeeeeaaeees 11 1 3 2 4 CUSTOMIZING Pane POSIT
154. There are four connection methods available RS232C USB Ethernet and ActiveSync The connection methods available will vary based on the XGT Panel model you are using Additional options such as compressed project file reception logging and use of recipes will vary as well To transfer the project 1 Click Communication Send or select the download icon on the toolbar a xpd Tool Communication Window Toc i Comm Setting Receive XGT Panel Infomation XGT Panel Update oa oo Graphic Library 1 x T fe PUSHDOWN_V p wi ROTARY 75A R 124 2 Set the following options as necessary rere Dowload to XGT Panel Download project all forcibly f Save to removable device Update XP Runtime forcibly M Delete all monitoring data This will format all the Logging Recdpe Alaram data that are stored in SRAM Memory I Indude Upload Project file Tres Close Download to XGT Panel Select this option to transfer a project to an XGT Panel This is the default option Click Settings to change the communication settings Download Project All By default XP Builder determines if a previous version of Forcedly the project exists on the panel and determines whether or not to transfer the full project or only to update data that has changed However you can select this option to force XP Builder to transfer the entire project Save to Removab
155. W MW1005 Parameter 5 int nMin Minute 0 59 Parameter 6 Int nSec Second SetTime 2013 1 30 8 10 TET o 239 4 2 3 2 Understanding Print Functions The following table describes script properties for print functions Description Parameters PrintAlarm Print the alarm list None Example if X MXo true 4 PrintAlarm f PrintScreen Print the current screenof None the XGT Panel Set the print option in the Auxiliary Settings tab of the project properties Example if X MX1 true PrintScreen LS Is 240 241 LSIs 4 2 3 3 Understanding Window Change Functions ChangeBaseScreen Change the current window to the window number specified by the device If the window number is not assigned in the Project pane the window will not be changed Example if W MWooo gt o ChangeBaseScreen 10 else ChangeBaseScreen W MW41o Constant is 10 Device is MWa1o 4 2 3 4 Understanding Script Functions Parameters int nBaseScreenNumber Input the window number to change You can input a real number or designate a word device to provide the value The following table describes properties for the script function GetLastError Parameters Return errors that occur during See the following table Script execution Example int num o a 10 6 0 int error num a b ERROR error GetLastError The GetLastError function returns t
156. XGT Panel The number is not displayed e If you want to enter a decimal place press the period on the keyboard and then enter the numbers Description Enter a description for the object 4 Reference e Display The display settings for numeric display objects include the following Transparent BG Image Frame Color Display Case PPE Plate Color Extended Open Library Click to select an image from the library Open Click to browse for images on your computer When you select an image from your computer it will be added to the image library automatically Transparent BG Image Click the checkbox to make the image background transparent You cannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time Frame Color Set a frame color Plate Color Set a plate color LSis 366 e Text The text settings for numeric display objects include the following Numeric Display General Basic Fot T Tahom gt Bink Not Use F gt i Wi Display Case Color Muttiingual ASC Operation Space Left D Right 0 Font Style Bold taic Strikeout Underine Horizontal Alignment C Left Center e Right Font Select a font from the drop down list Size Set a text size from the drop down list or enter a value directly into the field Color Set a font color Blink Set a blink speed for the object The object will not bli
157. a Times New Roman E Halian italy Tahoma 17 Japanese Japan MS PGathie Language Settings Description Multilingual Font e Seta font to transfer with the project file This function is useful when the XGT Panel does not support Asian characters such as in the case of XP series panels that run the Windows CE operating system e Ifyou select this option the entire font will be transferred to the panel Ensure that the size of the font file does not exceed the available memory of the XGT panel model Runtime Language List View and specify runtime languages to use with the project You can add or remove languages that will be shown in the project Language Change by Device Set the runtime language to change for specific devices The XGT Panel reads the value from the device and displays the interface in the language you specify in the Runtime Language List Device Select a word device Default Runtime Language Set the runtime language that will be used by default on the XGT Panel Notes e Text may not be displayed properly if the text cannot be represented by the default font e If you set the language to change by device you must designate a language for the device or nothing will be shown in the XGT Panel 29 LSIs 2 2 2 7 Changing Storage Settings Set the storage locations for image and font files as well as the locations for backing up logging data recipes and screen captures fr
158. a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Size Set the data size for the device 16 bit or 32 bit No of Edit Set the number of devices to be shown up to 255 Device Display Format Set the display format Numeric Format Set the number format Signed decimal Unsigned decimal Octal Hexadecimal Binary BCD or float No of Display Digits Set how many digits to display up to 64 If the number of digits is less than the capacity of the device empty spaces are filled with placeholders If the device value N M n cannot be displayed in BCD format it is expressed as No of Decimal Digits Set how many places to put to the right of the decimal point when you select formats other than binary octal and hexadecimal numbers 518 4 Reference Zero Fill If you have selected right justification select this option to insert zeroes o before the number Description Enter a description for the object e Display The display settings for the data list editor object include the following General Recipe Form Basic No of Row 5 Keypad Optior Direction Let gt Right gt Text a Extended Frame Color a Plate Color Line Color es Line Width 1 a Recipe Form Set the display options for the recipe data Set the number of rows to display No of Col S
159. a method 1 To specify method 1 select the recipe data to transfer and then tap PLC lt NVRAM Transfer basic data from the PLC to NVRAM If you tap the special switch the data is transferred via method 1 To specify method 1 select the recipe data to transfer and then tap PLC gt NVRAM Transfer backed up data from NVRAM to an internal device for editing The data is transferred via method 2 To edit the backed up recipe move the data saved in NVRAM to the internal device Transfer data from an internal device to NAVRAM The transferring method is 2 Transfer data from an internal PLC device to the PLC The transferring method is 3 PLC gt Internal Transfer from the PLC to an Device internal device The transferring method is 3 Recipe Editor Set to view and edit recipe data when the switch is activated 311 LSIs ETC Change Runtime Language Set to change a new runtime language when the switch is activated Select a language in Settings for Special Switch Function Setting for Special Switch Function Language Korean Korea You can specify runtime languages in the project properties Click Common P Project Property Setting gt Language and edit the available runtime language Editing language list Runtime language list Korean Korea Add gt gt Remove lt lt ja IDO amp Wh Close Popup Wind
160. aaascecun shan kerrataan ainiin ieia airinn 392 Be BAe NTON E E as08sqonguanasasonse aaesse 392 gem N N T E E 396 BO PAE OCC EEEE E EE E E E E E T 402 e BI Pa A E A E 404 E NOA Pa Eee eee eee ee eee eee ee ae eee eee ee ee 409 LoF PUNO ION OO T e E E T E E E 418 4 3 8 Graph ODCCtS ccccccccccsnnnnnnneeeeeeeseeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeaaaaaaaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseseseseaaaaaaaas 420 Ao Ba G a eee ee ERE 420 Mies oho PE OE aaa E mere eee ener eee eee eee ee 428 Aro 2 a Ree nee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee 436 Ror ER o E eE 0 AEE EEEE rere EEEE EEEE ETETE E E 443 Re eo g LE e EAP EE EEE EE EE E E ee ee ee ET 450 4 3 8 6 Logging Trend Graph eneeeeeerrere rere rerererrre rere reer rrer cree rree rere reer reer 459 4397 Logging Scatter Grap ieceri oes oc 472 Aoo RENMEI E a eee ee eee eee 481 4 3 9 History Alarm Viewer Object ccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeenaaaaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneesaaaaaaaas 491 rae mo Paa O OO a E E rr terre errr cer et 500 DFE OO VIC WC CC aaa ee see 506 4 3 12 Alarm Navigator ODjCCt ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaaeseseseeseeeeeeeeeesseseseeseaaaaaaas 513 4 3 13 Recipe Navigator O10 CCE vcccteetstnatectancctautetcctuutuanehererynsaaticnectauenhecteetenacteuentccts 515 BBA Data LIST EG ION 0 CE crisissen Eanna aE EERE TEE 518 Bets FEREG pE Edi Or O0 oele iz uebattnecesseapecaiatincdreinasdenlgtiestanina cate 523 AO ole O E E E E EE EE TEE E ee er 527 4 3 17 Embedded Screen Object cccccceceeccece
161. age device and reinstall it Up to 1 000 files can be saved in the backup route 105 The number of files per directory in video capture file backup path exceeds the limit Format the storage device and reinstall it 106 The video capture file cannot be deleted due to a file system problem Format the storage device and reinstall it 107 The video capture file cannot be created due to a file system problem Format the storage device and reinstall it 108 Creating a list of stored video capture files is in progress Try again later Refer to 6th bit of status device 110 The safety removal switch for a video file backup storage device is deactivated 111 Pre recording is in progress so the video cannot be captured 112 Recording is in progress so the video cannot be captured BA e To start recording there must be at least 10MB of free space in the storage device If free space is less than 10mb recording cannot be started and error code 3 will be displayed However if you set the Delete old file if disk full option in Storage Settings it deletes the oldest video file and you can try again e To capture video there must be at least 1MB of free space in the storage device If free space is less than amb recording cannot be started and error code 11 will be displayed However if you set the Delete old file if disk full option in Storage Settings it deletes the oldest video file and you can try again e Incase of video reco
162. age option you cannot use this option On Click to configure options for the object in the on state Off Click to configure options for the object in the off state Image Type Set whether or not to change colors and patterns when switching between on and off states If you select the change color or pattern option you must select a vector image for the object To view characteristics of raster or vector images refer to lt 2 3 6 4 Managing Image Libraries gt Not Change Color Pattern Use the original image You can apply the pattern or color to the image Select the image to display for On or Off status from raster vector or user Same Image amp Change Select a vector image You cannot select a raster Color Pattern in On Off image Apply a pattern or color to the image Library Click to select an image from the library In the library list image categories are distinguished by the ends of their names The vector image category ends with _V and the raster image category ends with _R Patterns can be applied only to the images Open Click to browse for images on your computer When you select an image from your computer it will be added to the image library automatically Pattern Click a pattern to apply to the image This option is available only when you select the change color or pattern option in Image Type Patterns are applied to specific part
163. alarm message setting of Flow Alarm XX is not correct No alarm message has been selected Select an alarm message 7000 The setting No of alarms occurred device is incorrect The device has not been specified Specify the device in the history alarm properties 7001 The setting of the alarm history deleting device is incorrect The device has not been specified Specify the device in the history alarm properties 7003 The setting of the alarm printing finishing device is incorrect The device has not been specified Specify the device in the history alarm properties 156 Error Message 157 How to Resolve the Error 7004 The setting of the history alarm The specified history alarm acquisition cycle data acquisition cycle is contains an error Verify the cycle in the history incorrect alarm properties 7005 There is not text displaying the The alarm group display text has not been alarm group XX selected Select display text in the group properties window 7006 The text setting of alarm list No text has been selected in the alarm list Select XX is not correct a text table or create and specify a new text table for the alarm list 7007 The setting of the device to be The device has not been specified Specify the monitored in alarm list XX is device in the alarm list settings incorrect 7008 The alarm range setting of alarm The specified co
164. ame Display Specify the following options for the frame Border Color Set a border color Plate Color Set the background for areas not filled by value ranges Sampling Time x10oms Set the cycle for collecting the data in milliseconds 1 to 6 000 Starting Point Location Set a starting point for the scales left bottom or right bottom The Scroll Points Set the speed that the graph will scroll across the screen by setting the number of points that the graph will scroll each time The higher the number the faster the graph will scroll Scale Specify the following options for the scale No of Horizontal Set the number of points on the X axis Point No of Vertical Point Set the number of points on the Y axis X axis Height Set the height of the X axis scale Y axis Width Set the width of the Y axis scale Scale Color Set the color of the scales 454 e Reference Line The reference line settings for the trend graph object include the following Graph Trend 3 General Basic Use Reference ey i Num of Reference Line moo gt Operation Extended Mum Value T Device Constant Line Color Line Type Constant 10 E co0000 Solid Use Reference Set whether or not to use a reference line in the graph e Num of Reference Line Set how many reference lines to use Setting property of reference line When you set to use a reference line the properties window appears 455
165. ame sequence number of a group of De oa onaanamonmen o Use Interlock Set to prevent input when the interlock device meets the specified condition The input cursor will skip the locked unit and move automatically to the next unit in the sequence Input order 720 720 3 Interlocked 730 e Action Condition The action condition settings for text input objects include the following 380 4 Reference General Extended Detail Keypad Option Use Action Condition Type f Bit On f Bit Off f Range Multi Bit Action Condition Display Trigger Range Size 16bit Type Unsigned DEC lo NOP 0 Exp Multi Bit No of Bit Device 1 Setting Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specified range Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multiple devices is met Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary 381 LSIs a 4 Reference Range If you sel
166. and specify a value 226 227 LSIs Description Data range Example o to FFFF Unsigne To initialize variables place the o to unsigned int d assignment operator afterthe 4294967295 nValue 100 Integer variable name and specify a value 6 92 eii o to FFFFFFFF Float To initialize variables place the float fValue 32 bit assignment operator afterthe 3 402823466e 10 01 variable name and specify a value to be substituted 4 2 1 4 Understanding Variables 38 to 1 17 5494351 38 or 0 0 or 1 175494351 38 to 3 402823466e 38 Each data type has a corresponding variable type The following table describes the variable types available Expression Example Boolean X X true Short S S 10 Integer L L 1 Unsigned Short W W 100 Unsigned Integer D D 10 Float F F 10 01 4 2 1 5 Viewing the Script Cross Reference The script cross reference function displays object or common properties used for scripts in the output screen When a project is executed in the XGT Panel unexpected computation results may occur and they are likely to stem from scripts This function allows you to catch errors in script position without requiring a complicated process like individually opening and checking every item that is affected by global or local scripts To view the script cross reference click Tool gt Find All Script Script names positions obje
167. anguage the language of an abstract machine designed to aid in the analysis of computer programs inverter an electrical power converter that changes direct current DC to alternating current AC the converted AC can be delivered at any required voltage and frequency with the use of appropriate transformers switching and control circuits log the mathematical operation that is the inverse of exponentiation N 1 many to one communication a communication mode in N 1 communication multiple panels are used to send commands to the same controller this is an atypical configuration offset function a function to specify a device address by referencing an offset from the starting address operator a symbol used to connect expressions logical operators are used to create a test expression that controls program flow relational operators test or define some kind of relation between two entities PIR sensor an electronic sensor that measures infrared IR light radiating from objects in its field of view They are most often used in PIR based motion detectors range the set of values to be included in a function raster image a bitmap image with a dot matrix data structure representing a generally rectangular grid of pixels or points of color a raster image can be in varying formats such as GIF JPG and BMP rising edge the bit at which the device turns on is the rising edge RS232 a
168. ate a schedule 1 Click an object in the editing area 2 Inthe Project pane double click Schedule This will open a Schedule tab in the editing area 3 Double click anywhere in the Schedule tab to open the Property window Type Every minute v Description Detail Condition Function Settings Sec Function Function _Up_ Down 4 Specify the following properties Type Set the operation interval Detail Set the detailed operation time based on the operation interval Condition Description Enter a description for the schedule Function Click a function and then click gt gt to add the function to the schedule Click a function and then click lt lt to remove a function from the schedule You can specify up to 8 functions in a schedule Up Down Click Up or Down to prioritize functions LSis 216 217 LSIS 4 1 8 Sounds You can specify a maximum of 512 WAV or MP3 files to play when conditions are met but only for iXP series XGT Panels To hear sounds you must connect a speaker to the sound output port To create a sound 1 Inthe Project pane double click Sound This will open a Sound tab in the editing area iXP series only Destination Storage Flash memory Sound Sound Condition 2 Specify the following conditions Destination Storage Select a storage location for the sound file Data Type Enter the data type such as 16 b
169. available capacity of Flash memory Low order double word _Size_Available_Flash_High WORD HS0033 The available capacity of Flash memory High order double word _Size_All_ USB Low WORD HS0035 The total capacity of USB storage Low order double word _Size_All_USB_High WORD HS0037 The total capacity of USB memory High order double word _Size_ Available USB Low WORD HS0039 The available capacity of USB storage Low order double word _Size_Available_USB_High WORD HSoo41 The available capacity of USB memory High order double word _Size_All_ CF _Low WORD HS0043 The total capacity of CF card Low order double word _Size_All_CF_High WORD HS0045 The total capacity of CF card High order double word _Size_Available_CF_Low WORD HS0047 The available capacity of CF card Low order double word _Size_Available_CF_High WORD HSo049 The available capacity of CF card High order double word _USB_Attatched BIT HSoo51 Display whether or not the USB O storage is connected _CF_Attatched BIT HSoo51 1 Display whether or not the CF card is connected _N1_Token BIT HSo070 Connected with a token during the O N 1 communication _N1 _Token_Hold BIT HSo501 0 Set the panel to hold the token for a specified time _N1_Token_Station WORD HSoo71 Display the station number of the ES e mevice Description node holding the during N 1 communication _IDLE_TIME_COUNTER WORD HSo502 Increase the count every 1 second when you don t touch
170. ay Case Operation Extended Library Click to select an image from the library Open Click to browse for images on your computer When you select an image from your computer it will be added to the image library automatically Transparent BG Image Click the checkbox to make the image background transparent You cannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time Frame Color Seta frame color Plate Color Set a plate color e Text The text settings for numeric input objects include the following Numeric Input General Basic font fft Tahom v Bink Notuse Dy Size 16 Width Ratio 100 kl gt fo Input Case Color Mutilingual ASCU Display Case Operation a Test Plate Color L o IH EJ Extended Space Left DH Riot f 0 Font Style Bold taic Strikeout Underline Horizontal Alignment f Left f Center e Right Font Select a font from the drop down list Size Set a text size from the drop down list or enter a value directly into the field Color Set a font color Blink Set a blink speed for the object The object will not blink Slow The object will blink every three seconds Normal The object will blink every two seconds The object will blink every second Width Ratio Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop down list or entering a value directly in to the field You can set a ratio o
171. bEnable buzzer is turned on Example or off if X HX100 true SetBuzzerEnable true Buzzer f ShowStatusbar Show or hide the Status Bar Bool bShow Show the status bar The status bar appears and then disappears automatically after a specified time Example if X HX100 true ShowStatusbar Sleep Pause scripts for a specified intnSleepTime Time to be time stopped temporally ms Example int nLoop for nLoop 0 nLoop lt 1o nLoop i Buzzer Sleep 500 4 2 3 11 Understanding the Script Watchdog The watchdog function exists to avoid infinite loops or prevent scripts that are too long from hanging up processes When a script exceeds the default time allotted 5 seconds the watchdog function is activated automatically and forces the script to end Script execution takes longer than any other action so use conditional statements with care Pay special attention to statements for which the run time is hard to predict such as for while and do while statements 204 4 3 Objects Objects can change appearance based on monitored data values The subsections that follow explain what each object in XP Builder can do and how to change their settings For more information about drawing objects refer to lt 2 3 4 2 Drawing Objects gt You can set conditional settings for objects to change properties such as background color frame color outline text display and more as shown belo
172. basic settings The object will not blink Slow The object will blink every three seconds The object will blink every two seconds The object will blink every second LSis 280 e Text The text settings for bit switch objects include the following Bit Switch General I Use Caption From Text Table Basic Display on or gt __On gt 0F Copy Off Co E Extended n __On gt 0F Copy Font Fp t Tahoma 7 Delete On Caption Size 12 Width Ratio 100 Font Style Bold italic Strikeout Underline Horizontal Alignment M Left Cente C Right Vertical Alignment C Top Use Caption Click the checkbox to use a text caption with the object When you select this option you can input text from a Text Table On Click to configure options for the object in the on state You must input the text in a text table Off Click to configure options for the object in the off state You must input the text in a text table From Text Table Click the checkbox to add text from a text table The Text Table option will be activated and the text input area will close Add the required text to the text table before editing the object You must select text for the on and off states from the same text table 281 Text Table Click to open the text table and select text The color and font properties set in the text table will be imported with the text
173. be compared between your computer and the panel You have changed the project properties which can affect data throughout the entire project You are transferring the project to multiple HMIs The project already in the HMI has a different version than the one specified in XP Builder e Project files are stored in the GENERAL folder except for BTE models where it is stored in the BTE folder On the XGT Panel you can view the file version on an XGT Panel by accessing the update menu and selecting the Displaying XGT Panel File Version option e Ifthe transfer is unsuccessful it may be due to different runtime versions between XP Builder and the XGT Panel Update the runtime file on the panel to match XP Builder and try the transfer again 136 2 Project Development 2 6 3 Receiving a Project File from an XGT Panel You can transfer project file from an XGT Panel to your computer To receive a project file 1 In XP Builder click Communication gt Receive or select the upload icon on the toolbar XGT Panel Update So e 4 PUSHDOWN_V i ROTARY_256_R 137 LSIs a 3 Click Browse to select a destination folder for the project file If you don t set the destination you cannot receive the project file from an XGT Panel Upload E Browse For Folder ME Desktop F gt Libraries gt i gt a Homegroup C gt B hs a jE Computer i gt G working MAVBOXSVR
174. bject Previous 294 295 4 General E Extended e Display The display settings for change screen switch objects include the following Change Screen Switch Transparent BG Image Image Type Basic e Image Reverse Not Change Color Pattem Display Use Image Reverse f Same Image amp Change Color Pattem et Pattem Fa Color JEC IM HERE ES Frame Color Transparent BG Image Click the checkbox to make the image background transparent You cannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time Use Image Reverse The switch image is reversed when you tap the object or a condition is met If you set this option you cannot use the Transparent BG Image option or the On Off image If you set the Transparent BG Image option you cannot use this option On Click to configure options for the object in the on state Off Click to configure options for the object in the off state Image Type Set whether or not to change colors and patterns when switching between on and off states If you select the change color or pattern option you must select a vector image for the object To view characteristics of raster or vector images refer to lt 2 3 6 4 Managing Image Libraries gt Not Change Color Pattern Use the original image You can apply the pattern or color to the image Select the image to display for On or Off sta
175. bject that is inside the borders will be displayed Wor d Wil ow Wow a Wir KETA lt The top or left side is out gt lt The right or bottom side is out gt e The Word Window object is always displayed on the basic screen and you cannot close the window as there is no close button The Word Window object can be allotted to two or more states so it cannot be determined how the reference device state should change even if the present window screen is closed e The placement points for the Window and Part objects are as follows Object Placement Point Window Object The start point of the edited window screen Part Object The start point where the parts are drawn in the edited part screen Description Enter a description for the object 398 Pataranrtn a ail IGJ GII GIIT d General Basic Case List pi gt ee Operation Extended Case List Create delete or reorganize conditional expressions Create Click to create a new range condition You can create up to eight conditions Clicking this button opens the Range Edit window which allows you to create a condition For more information refer to lt 4 2 1 3 Understanding Constants and Data Types gt Click a condition and then click this icon to delete the condition Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higher in the list Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lower in the list 399
176. ble This option is active only when you import text from the text table Color Seta font color Font Style Set a font style bold italic strikeout or underline You can apply more than one option at atime Horizontal Alignment Set the horizontal alignment Left Center or Right Vertical Alignment Set the vertical alignment Top Middle or Bottom 290 291 e Detail The detail settings for word switch objects include the following Word Switch General lw Security Level Extended Level 1 Lamp Condition M Action Delay Action Condition Type On Delay Time 1 x100ms W Offset in Write Operation Device ira Security Level Set whether or not to require a password to use the object Level Set the security level for the object The higher the security level the shorter the authorization time when the password is entered When the authorization time expires the user must enter the password again to use the object Action Delay Set to delay the action triggered by the switch by a specified time Type Set the type of action delay On Delay When the switch is activated the action is performed after the delay time that you specify Press Twice When the switch is activated once a dialog box is invoked to allow the user to verify the operation When the switch is activated a second time the action is performed after the delay time that you specify
177. board button to the right of the device field Send E mail Set whether or not to send an email notification for the history alarm For more details about the email settings refer to lt 2 2 2 9 Changing Auxiliary Settings gt Assign Alarm Device Set the method for specifying alarm devices Text Table Index Set the method for specifying strings in text tables Show Detailed Window Set whether or not to show detailed information and the method for specifying windows Use Alarm Count Device Set whether or not to use a device to save alarm count data and the method for specifying devices Count of Reference Device Set the number of the reference device 0 10 Device Enter alarm device addresses Alarm Condition Set the alarm condition For bit devices the condition is either on or off For word devices the condition is an expression Window No The number of the detailed window if you selected that option Text Index Specify the index of a string from a text table Alarm Count Device The alarm count device if you selected that option Preview The selected text string for the alarm if applicable 4 1 7 Schedules You can use schedules to specify actions in advance Available functions for schedules include Bit On Bit Off Word value setting script execution and more You can create up to 32 schedules and each schedule can specify up to 8 actions To cre
178. cal 231 memory functions 249 object 235 other functions 252 print functions 240 schedule 234 script functions 241 string functions 243 system functions 239 variables 227 window change functions 241 script cross reference 228 script tool box 229 script watchdog 254 security settings 25 serial connection See RS 232 connection simulation 110 sound 174 217 special switch 301 storage settings 30 system requirements 4 system tag 176 tag 174 175 importing from XG5000 183 text display object 384 630 631 text input object 373 text table 174 185 toolbars adding removing icons 9 customizing 7 showing hiding 9 touch setting touch accuracy 568 touch calibration 555 touch sensitivity 554 trend graph object 450 troubleshooting 168 upload project See project receiving from XGT Panel USB connection 132 171 window adding 46 base screen 45 configuring 47 key window 45 properties 49 settings changing See window start window 47 word lamp 263 word message 337 word part object 409 word switch 285 word window object 396 XGT Panel changing information 547 settings changing 21 specficiations viewing 3 XGT Panel configuration backlight setting 552 buzzer setting 564 date and time setting 556 Ethernet setting 560 sound setting 563 touch setting 554 XGT Panel diagnostics backup memory 569 CFcard 571 flash memory 570 SD card 574 serial port 572 USB memory
179. can XGT Panel Click to scan for XGT Panels connected via Ethernet LSis 126 4 Verify that your computer and the XGT Panel are both properly connected via your chosen connection method and then click Download Ethernet 192 168 0 1 2145 l Download project all forcibly Save to removable device File path MP_Project Browse Update XP Runtime forcibly M Delete all monitoring data This will format all the Logging Recdpe Alaram data that are stored in SRAM Memory I Indude Upload Project file Close 5 If necessary enter a communication password for the XGT Panel and click OK In XP Builder the transfer progress will be shown in the output window Notes e Toset the password in XP Builder click Communication gt XGT Panel Information gt Password When you set the password for the first time enter the new password again to confirm it You can enter a password of up to 10 characters in length AGT Panel Information Ethernet 192 168 0 1 2143 General Settings Clock Password Previous password sd Delete New password set Confirm password fo Maximum 10 characters 127 LSIs ee e Itis recommended to let XP Builder transfer only the updated portion of a project except in the following conditions You are transferring the project to the panel for the first time or the project has been deleted from the panel You have changed the project properties which can af
180. carrying out another operation Wait a moment receive and try again You can select only mobile Select a mobile GIF image GIF images 3 3 Resolving Error Codes during Recording The following subsections describe how to resolve error codes during recording These error codes are displayed by the device that saves error codes 1 The path for saving video files has been set in XP Builder 2 A device for saving video files has not been installed or the patch for saving video files cannot be created in the device 3 The current free space is less than the maximum file size At least 10MB free space must be available before recording 4 The number of files in video file backup path exceeds the limit Format the storage device and reinstall it Up to 1 000 files can be saved to the backup path 5 The number of files per directory in the video file backup path exceeds the limit Format the storage device and reinstall it Up to 100 files can be saved in the backup path and if more than 100 files are saved by user manipulation recording cannot be started 6 The video file cannot be deleted due to a file system problem Format the storage device and reinstall it 7 The video file cannot be created due to a file system problem Format the storage device and reinstall it 8 Creating a list of stored video files is in progress Try again later Refer to 5 byte of the status device 10 The safety removal switch
181. ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 601 5 6 1 5 Path for Movie Records Backup sssseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaaeeeeseeeeeeeeees 601 5 6 1 6 Path for Still Image Backup Camera and Movie Still Images 00 601 5 6 2 Managing Memory for BOCODS cic tincictatete pac iatees tenet ictal tecince iad 602 5 6 3 File Path for Video File and Video Capture File Backup ccccccccscssssssseseees 603 562941 When the File S AGE Secesscccscssccocetdsdodecasedocdsatacsccddescsdedensdsdeddcadededsdeddendedsden 603 5 6 3 2 When There is Insufficient Memory or Exceeds the Limit 0000008ee 604 5 6 3 3 ActiveSync Related ActiOns ccccccsssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenaeeseeeeeeeesssaaaseneees 604 5 6 3 4 When a Storage Device IS REMOVE ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeneeeeeeees 604 5 6 4 Monitoring External Storage CONNECCTtION cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 605 5 6 5 Safe Removal Switch sesiinsusiciosouianiscbinnsbsaoniuabihenansbenanhunbiienansbosnbasbihennnebesoubnes 607 5 7 Installing and VV Gere 2c tes pepo e ace etree cassis ee sceetect ee sees mcenmuetanteuecancusteceecessiees 609 Bt SOO OWA GT POMC e E 609 57 Ai Surrounding GONG ICIOM cszsesvazersenececeecevepspasagavavacurecersenncesessepeperscuvazavseseeeee 609 cfg ra a ha olibs 10 ke ee 610 5 7 1 3 XGT Panel Thermal Control Considerations ccccccsseeeceeeeseeeeeeee
182. ce Use the combo box to the right to set a specific operating interval For example if you select Every hour you can set the specific minute when the logging will occur If you do not specify the minute the logging will occur every hour on the hour Device BIT Specify a bit device and condition to trigger periodic logging Rising edge or Falling edge Repeat By Set the number of repetitions for the logging operation max 100 times The starting point for repeating the logging operation is when the device condition is met Repeat Period Set the file recording cycle if logging conditions are met Device BIT from Specify a bit device and condition to trigger conditional Conditional Logging logging Rising edge Falling edge or On change Logging Progress Specify the device that will display the logging process The logging progress is displayed from when the condition is met until the cycle is complete Stop Logging Specify a device to stop logging Logging stops when the specified devices turns on Once logging is stopped it does not continue on the next cycle or repetition The stop logging device operates on the rising edge Logging Area Full Specify a device to activate when the storage area for logging data is full Clear Logging Area Specify a device to clear the storage area for logging data When the device turns on data in the specified area is deleted Logging Area Clear Specify a d
183. ce lists with simulated data will appear 112 2 Project Development Bit Switch Main BIT HX00001 aha a fETHERMETA 0 Data Type Description a Set the type of window and number of windows that you want to monitor All base windows with objects and pop up windows can be selected from combo box but you cannot monitor common data devices The simulator changes the display based on the number of windows you select But if you select a pop up window the display will not change User Device List Set the device value manually to simulate the project Common Device List Shows list of the common data such as History Alarms Recipes and Flow Alarms Screen Device List Click to show the list of all the edited objects in the base window Object Description Shows the address of the device Device Size Shows the size of the device Bit 16Bit word or 32Bit word Device Addr Shows the address of the device Device Value Shows the value of the current device Type of Connected Shows the controller type PLC LSis 2 Project Development 2 5 2 2 Changing Device Values Set device information and change value in the User Device List You can set bit devices to on or off and enter device values manually for word devices Values are applied to the simulator as soon as you change them db a Base Screen Unsinged BCD To use XG5ooo with the Simulator click the checkbox
184. ce to start printing history alarm data LSS 210 211 LSIs Print Complete Device Specify a device to activate when printing of history alarm data is complete Top Bottom Left and Specify margins for printing history alarm data Right margins Acquisition Time Table Set intervals for collecting history alarm data Nore About the Acquisition Time Table Setup to 10 different sampling times for collecting history alarm data The sampling time unit is seconds and you can set it to the first decimal place so the minimum unit scale that can be set is 100 milliseconds Inthe alarm list you can select the sampling times you set here to allow for flexible acquisition cycles for different types of devices An XGT Panel inspects the alarm list and acquisition cycles together Therefore a large number of acquisition cycles in a project can cause slowdowns in performance To prevent significant lags in monitoring keep the number of history alarms in on acquisition cycle below 500 To define the range for an alarm expression specify the following settings Edit Word Range a Style ABC 3Terms And ABC 3Terms Or b Hoooo0000 lt Hoooooooo C Operand A lt Operand B Operand Edit d i ia Hooo00000 ner Iur Constant jH00000000 j DES Hex e l 0 V Pivot Device f Other Device D 55 Sulg Function Description a Style Select a form for the expression
185. ce values or condition For more information about objects refer to lt 4 3 Objects gt To draw an object 1 Inthe Toolbox pane click Object 2 Click an object type 3 Click or drag in the editing area and specify options for the figure Bit Word Switch Draw the object on the editing window or click the editing Change Screen Switch window to insert the object in its default size Special Switch Multi Switch Bit Word Lamp N State Lamp Clock Bit Message Word Message Numeric Display Numeric Input Text Display Text Input Animation Bit Window e To draw the object click a point in the editing area Word Window e The sizes of these objects are fixed Bit Part e Choose a movement type such as Fixed XY Line or Word Part Route e Draw aline or route method similar to a line or polygon figure respectively e The sizes of these objects are fixed but the line and route types are customizable 57 Bar Graph Pie Graph Meter Graph Trend Graph Logging Trend Graph Scatter Graph Drawing Options Draw the object on the editing window or click the editing window to insert the object in its default size Closed Graph e Choose a graph type Ellipse or Polygon e Draw the closed graph based on the ellipse or polygon type you selected When drawing a polygon type closed graph click multiple points to draw the polygon then double click the drawing to complete it History Alar
186. characters set the caps lock switch and the letter input switch A the caps lock switch the a input switch e UNICODE Set the upper case character in advance You need only one switch Next Cursor Previous Cursor Set to move the cursor in numeric or text input objects to the next or pervious field Print Screen Set to print a screen capture of the XGT Panel when the switch is activated The file can be printed to afile ortoa printer as specified in the project properties To set the properties click Common Project Property Setting gt Auxiliary Settings and set a print method from the Output drop down list under Screen Capture Save asFile Save the image as a Bitmap file You can set the route in Common P Project Property Setting Storage Setting gt Capture image Save and Print the screen to a printer connected via Print USB If a printer is not connected to the XGT Panel a system alarm will occur If an alarm occurs connect a printer and try again To set the system alarm click Common gt Project Property Setting gt Auxiliary Settings and click the checkbox next to Alarm window pop up Program Monitoring Set to launch the program monitor when the switch is activated To run the program monitor use the XGT XGI or XGB series Specify the program monitor settings in the project properties Click Common P Project Property Setting gt XGT Pane
187. cified fixed value as the alarm limit Device Click to specify a device to be referenced by the object or enter the device address When you specify a device a new device input row will be created automatically where you can specify more devices to be referenced up to 8 To remove a device click the row number and press Delete on the keyboard Line Color Set the line color for the graph Line Type Set the line type dash or solid 452 e Display The display settings for the trend graph object include the following Graph Trend 4 General Transparent BG Frame Display Basic ee Transparent Border Border Color No of Dispaly in X axis Reference Line No spaly in X ads a Operation Iw Plate Color Extended Sampling Time 100ms Starting point Location Const C Device Left Bottom The Scroll Points a Open OF eo m Scale No of Horizontal Point 3 i X axis Height 16 Scale Color No of Vertical Point 3 Y axis Width 16 Library Click to select a background image for the graph from a library Open Click to locate background image for the graph on your computer Transparent BG Set whether or not to make the background of the graph transparent Transparent Border Set whether or not to use a transparent border No of Display in X axis Set the number of data points to be displayed on the graph 3 to 120 453 Fr
188. cimal BCD or float Exp Click to designate the expression as conditional Use Lamp Offset Click to set an offset for the lamp Description Enter a description for the object 2 8 2 9 General 9 Extended e Display The display settings for bit switch objects include the following Bit Switch Transparent BG Image Image Type Basic Ise Image Reverse f Not Change Color Pattem Display Use Image Reverse Ted On of f Same Image amp Change Color Pattem eed ae Pattem FG Color a OE EM n ne En ZEER C TH HAE TT IRS ke ES Frame Color Transparent BG Image Click the checkbox to make the image background transparent You cannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time Use Image Reverse The switch image is reversed when you tap the object ora condition is met If you set this option you cannot use the Transparent BG Image option or the On Off image If you set the Transparent BG Image option you cannot use this option On Click to configure options for the object in the on state Off Click to configure options for the object in the off state Image Type Set whether or not to change colors and patterns when switching between on and off states If you select the change color or pattern option you must select a vector image for the object To view characteristics of raster or vector images refer to lt 2 3 6 4 Ma
189. ck to configure options for the object in the on state Off Click to configure options for the object in the off state Image Type Set whether or not to change colors and patterns when switching between on and off states If you select the change color or pattern option you must select a vector image for the object To view characteristics of raster or vector images refer to lt 2 3 6 4 Managing Image Libraries gt Not Change Color Pattern Use the original image You can apply the pattern or color to the image Select the image to display for On or Off status from raster vector or user registered images Same Image amp Change Select a vector image You cannot select a Color Pattern in On Off raster image Apply a pattern or color to the image Library Click to select an image from the library In the library list image categories are distinguished by the ends of their names The vector image category ends with _V and the raster image category ends with _R Patterns can be applied only to the images Open Click to browse for images on your computer When you select an image from your computer it will be added to the image library automatically 258 Pattern Click a pattern to apply to the image This option is available only when you select the change color or pattern option in Image Type Patterns are applied to specific parts of objects but not to the frames
190. cking this button opens the Range Edit window which allows you to create a condition For more information refer to lt 4 2 1 3 Understanding Constants and DataTypes gt Click a condition and then click this icon to delete the condition Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higher in the list Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lower in the list LSiIs 446 4 Reference e Operation The operation settings for closed graph object include the following General l Use Script Basic _ Display select Script Case Script gt EE Use Script Click the checkbox to use a script with the object Select Script Select a script from the drop down list Script When you select a script it appears here To modify a script refer to lt 4 2 Scripts gt 447 LSIS e Detail The detail settings for closed graph object include the following Graph Ellipse EI General 2J Extended E Display Trigge Offset Click the checkbox to use the offset function You can offset the device address based on the value of the offset device For example if the starting device address is P100 XP Builder reads the value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value If the offset value is 10 for example then the referenced device address is P110 Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard bu
191. con to move it higher in the list Down Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lower in the list LSis 368 4 Reference e Operation The operation settings for numeric display objects include the following General lv Use Script Select Script Basic Display Text Script Display Case Extended Use Script Click the checkbox to use a script with the object Select Script Select a script from the drop down list Script When you select a script it appears here To modify a script refer to lt 4 2 Scripts gt 369 LSIs a e Detail The detail settings for numeric display objects include the following Numeric Display Extended n Device 534 Display Trigge eo ee Zero Fill lw Zero Dispaly Display Mode Transparent Offset Click the checkbox to use the offset function You can offset the device address based on the value of the offset device For example if the starting device address is P100 XP Builder reads the value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value If the offset value is 10 for example then the referenced device address is P110 Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Zero Fill
192. cript Use Script Click the checkbox to use a script with the object Select Script Select a script from the drop down list Script When you select a script it appears here To modify a script refer to lt 4 2 Scripts gt 433 LSIs a e Detail The detail settings for pie graph object include the following Graph Pie J General Extended gt E Display Trigge Offset Click the checkbox to use the offset function You can offset the device address based on the value of the offset device For example if the starting device address is P100 XP Builder reads the value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value If the offset value is 10 for example then the referenced device address is P110 Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary 434 Display Trigger The display trigger settings for the pie graph object include the 435 following Graph Pie General Extended Detail Pa Display Trigger Use Action Condition m Device D B Range Size 1 6bits Type Unsigned DEC Multi Bit No of Bit Device Eis _Setina _ Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of conditio
193. cript it appears here To modify a script refer to lt 4 2 Scripts gt e Detail The detail settings for word lamp objects include the following Word Larnp r Device W E Offset Click the checkbox to use the offset function You can offset the device address based on the value of the offset device For example if the starting device address is P100 XP Builder reads the value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value If the offset value is 10 for example then the referenced device address is P110 Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary 269 4 3 1 3 N State Lamp This section describes available settings for N State lamp objects The form of an N State lamp changes based on the statuses of up to five controllers Refer the following examples e Monitoring device Bit device Poooo Moooo Status No Bit Device Image Color Displayed Text Flashing Status Speed High Status o Poooo OFF Blue Normal No flashing Moooo operation OFF Status 1 Poooo ON Red Stop Fast Moooo OFF Status 2 Poooo OFF Yellow Caution Slow Mooo ON Low Status 3 Poooo ON Purple Alarm Normal Moooo ON Horsal Operation N State Lamp gt Normal Uperat ion Poooo OFF Mooo
194. ct Properties after Edit ing Them ccsessssseeeeeeeeeeeeees 168 3 4 5 Text does not Display PIO CI iiniuiwevensssnivantimuinsniieeeemamsnberriainieeeniinnwcenehes 169 3 4 6 Cannot Enter Text in another LANgUage cceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeetteneeeneeeeeeneeeneeee 169 3 4 7 Cannot Invoke Text from a File ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeesseseeeneneees 169 3 4 8 The Name of a History Alarm Changes When I Copy and Paste It 08 169 34 01 Cannot Edi tne SYSTEM AIAT citicicedeeiusnterroieidauininaenunt E a 169 3 4 10 Cannot Import a Log or Schedule 0 0 eeeeeccccccccceeeeeeeeeeenanaaeeneeseseseeeeeeeeeeseees 169 3 4 11 Cannot Invoke a Tag from a Tag Table eeeecccccccceccceeeeeeseeeseensssssseeessseeeeees 170 3 4 12 Cannot Import Common Data Settings cccceceeceneeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeenaeeesenaeeeennes 170 3 4 13 Cannot Transfer a Project RS 292 sississinrvsnssiorssvassndesasssarsssassedesnsisariessbvadeens 170 3 4 14 Cannot Transfer a Project Ethernet ccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeesseeeeeeeeees 171 3 4 15 Cannot Transfer a Project USB Serial Converter cccceeeeeeetseneeeeeteteeeees 171 3 4 16 Cannot Transfer a Project Active Sync or Mobile Device Center 171 3 4 17 Cannot Update an XGT Panel 2 cccccccccsssccesssceescecenseccensscenseeesssccenssesesseees 171 3 4 18 Cannot Receive a Project from an XGT Panel ccccceceeeeeee
195. ct USB Sis 590 3 Select an external storage source Select Folder Transter project file to WSE Storage sP Backup Transter project file to WSE Storage P Backup e USB USB Storage XP_ Backup e CF Storage Card XP_Backup e SD SD Storage XP_Backup 4 Touch OK The backed up project file will be transferred to the selected storage source Note You should select the Include upload project file option when you download a project file in XP Builder If you do not select this option the backup file will not be created 591 LSIS Download f Dowload to XGT Panel Connect to thernet 197 168 0 1 2143 Download project all forcedly r Save to removable device xP Project Update XP Runtime forcedly Delete all monitoring datas It will format all the Logging Redpe Alaram data that are stored in SRAM Memory Indude upload project file 5 5 3 Updating XGT Panel This section describes how to update the XGT Panel software from an external storage source 1 Inthe XGT Panel main menu touch Storage Function LSIS XGT Panel Settings Diagnostics PLC Information Update XGT Panel gt Storage Function Ver 1 30 B 008 Sis 592 2 Touch XP Runtime Update Storage Function Project Download Project Upload XP Runtime Update Select USE 3 Select an external storage source to use The
196. ct formats and explanations will be shown in the output window All registered scripts will be also shown Nore If you double click a result in the cross reference to affected object or window will open in the editing area 4 2 2 Creating Scripts Learn how to create scripts You can insert scripts from the Project pane or the Script Tool Box and create some scripts from the editing area or objects that you have applied there To apply global settings to scripts refer to lt 2 2 2 8 Changing Global Script Settings gt 4 2 2 1 Inserting Scripts 1 To insert a script from the Project pane 2 Inthe Project pane right click Script 228 Copy Cut Delete Paste Property Rename 4 Create your script in the editing area Right click the script tab and then click Close to return to normal window editing 4 2 2 2 Using the Script Tool Box The Script Tool Box allows you to create and manage scripts easily You can select functions and commands from lists instead of entering them manually To register the scripts using the Function List 1 Insert a script as described in 4 2 2 1 2 Click View gt Script ToolBox Toolbars v StatusBar Ful Data Viewer bah a fel a e ee Property Viewer K F Output Bar Graphic Library Object Librai SH Script ToolBox oe Screen da Vevice Map a ee 9 Pan Window i i Win ri 4 Scr
197. ction if Comment Copy Offset 1 Address Increment one by one Device Description 70 Copy No Description Set how many objects to paste by specifying the number of rows and columns for the new objects The number of rows and columns cannot exceed the maximum number displayed in the window Space Set the vertical and horizontal space between each object Copy Direction Set the direction for pasting the new objects Comment Copy Set to copy the description for an object Offset Set an offset to specify the new device addresses automatically Apply All Set to apply the offset number to every new object Address Increment one by one 4 Click OK Apply a different offset to each device If you want to paste objects with different addresses set the offset number manually Noces e Ifthe number of input columns or rows exceeds the maximum number the objects cannot be copied e You cannot copy tags with the multi copy function 71 LSis 2 3 5 2 Arranging Objects You can arrange objects or change the drawing order in the editing area The last object created is shown at the top level To arrange objects 1 Hold the Ctrl key and click the objects to arrange 2 Right click a selected object 3 Click Align gt an alignment option Cut Copy Paste Delete Guide Line H Rotate or Flip Align Order Group Ungroup S
198. ction Condition Extended T e Detail Be mon C mop C Rage Mat Device Device Range Size Unsigned DEC Multi Bit No of Bit Device 1 Lj Setting Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the OO gelatin OAR Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of ANN apean o S Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you select the range condition specify the range 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 284 4 3 2 2 Word Switch Word switch executes the script enters a fixed value adds or reduces the value This section describes available settings for word switch objects e Basic The Basic settings for word switch objects include the following Word Switch J General
199. ction Set the print options such as direction color and whether or not to use the high quality printing Screen Capture Set the action that occurs when the screen is captured on the XGT Panel You can save the image in a file or print it Flow Alarm Display Mode e Setto display the alarm message for the states of the flow alarm e When a flow alarm occurs and is then reset while the alarm message is displayed you can specify one of two actions to occur Redraw at occurred The alarm message is replaced automatically with a new message After current display list The alarm message remains on the screen and new alarms or reset alarms will be shown by subsequent messages E mail Property e Set whether or not to use email alerts e Click Server Settings to set email settings When LS IS 32 Auxiliary Settings Description specifying settings keep the following in mind You can specify only one email recipient or CC recipient The email server must be on the same intranet as the XGT Panel AnXGT Panel uses the Anonymous account When you set the email server set to use the email relay function of the Anonymous account The email is encoded in Unicode Use port number 25 the default port for the email function System Alarm Window Set whether or not to display system alarm messages Communication Error Set whether or not to display communication error Display messages on top of oth
200. ctiveSync Connection To use an ActiveSync connection you must use a USB 2 0 cable with a mini B connector on one end The USB cable is not provided with the XGT Panel so you must purchase one separately An ActiveSync connection provides 1 1 communication between a computer and a control device Note Only iXP series panels support this function To use an ActiveSync connection Connect a USB 2 0 cable to the front USB OTG port mini B type on the XGT Panel and an open USB port on a computer The computer should recognize the ActiveSync connection automatically Create project to send and then save it Run Project Download screen Select Communication gt Comm Setting gt ActiveSync Communication Settings Connect Type m USB RS232C Ethernet IMP series only General USB 2 0 cable needed cma Notes A e Ifthe ActiveSync window inadvertently indicates that the device has been disconnected leave the cable connected and the situation should resolve itself 134 shortly e When an ActiveSync connection is made to the XGT Panel a USB status window will appear and the message Connecting to Host will change to User Authenticated before the window closes 2 6 2 Transferring to a Removable Drive For convenience you can transfer the project to a removable drive and then connect the drive to an XGT Panel to update it To transfer the project to a removable drive 1 Click Communicati
201. ctors frame rate or bit rate goes higher the results can be better in terms of the video quality Video input screen size QCIF 1767144 QVGA 320 240 VGA 640 480 Video capture screen size QCIF 1767144 QVGA 320 240 VGA 640 480 ok Cancel From the Project Property window you can view or edit the following properties for a barcode reader that is connected to an XGT Panel Barcode Settings Set to connect barcode reader to XGT Panel Connection Property Set to use the barcode through the RS 232C protocol Detail Settings Set detail connection options e Bytes to read Set the amount of data to read froma barcode If you set the number of bytes the XGT Panel reads only the specified number of bytes If you don t specify this setting the XGT Panel reads the entire LSiIs 34 Description barcode e Save data in Set a location for saving barcode data Data is saved from the specified device continuously e Read complete device Set to display a message when all data has been read e Set the RS 232C communication parameter such as the baud rate data bits and flow control Note The baud rate must match the setting in the XGT Panel To change the baud rate on the XGT Panel touch and hold the screen to access the menu Then touch Setting gt PC Conn Setting For iXP series XGT Panels the IP address is set by default Use Video Set to use the video op
202. cts and up to 8 window objects To view the bit device status On or Off click View Show hide Object On Off To view the word device status for the window number assigned to the conditional statement change the value of the word status combo box on the toolbar A shift key does not appear on pop up windows by default To activate the shift key click anywhere on the pop up window Key Window Key windows are pre defined pop up windows that allow you to insert four types of keypads decimal ASCII hexadecimal and floating To control how users select a keypad use the switch object function or import one of the provided object libraries and then insert it into the window To change the key window settings click Common gt Project Property Setting Key Window Settings Part Screen e You can use part settings to control how figures such as lines circles and images behave on a base window e Drag and drop the part window from the Project pane to the editing area e The part window is used as a part of the part object the bit part and the word part e You can create up to 65534 part windows e You cannot register an object to a part window Global window settings allow you to define up to two windows that can be activated across the entire interface based on device values To set the addresses for the global windows click Common P Project Property Setting Screen Settings KA A
203. d LSS 510 e Text The text settings for logging viewer object include the following Logging Viewer D x r Maan h Tahoma Display Size 14 Header a Font Style Bold kaic Strikeout Underline Horizontal Alignment f Left Center f Right Font Select a font from the drop down list Size Set a text size from the drop down list or enter a value directly into the field Color Set a font color Font Style Set a font style bold italic strikeout or underline You can apply more than one option at a time Horizontal Alignment Set the horizontal alignment Left Center or Right 511 Display Trigger The display trigger settings for the logging viewer object include the following Logging Viewer General W Use Action Condition Extended J aa Display Trigger on Bit On C Bit OF C Range C Multi Bit Device Device i Range Size 16bits Type Unsigned DEC Multi Bit No of Bit Device de Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the OO apada R Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of AN count S Device Enter a device or tag address
204. d Controller Settings Summary AGT Panel Settings Screen Settings Securty Settings Key Window Settings Language Series iP Series 24BIT colormode RS 232C 5V power supply Model ixP80 TTA Add Controller Delete Controller v 23 Lsis GK LINK Refer to manual 2 Select the XGT Panel series and model name P Proiect Dovelonment ATI di AAVA diaaa ai Tie Ln rrOJCCtEOCVCLOPITICLE 3 Set the controller manufacturer and the controller model Product Select a product with LINK at the end of the controller name v1 23 Refer to manual RS232C Detail Settings Timeout m 100ms Waitto send ya ms Retry count 3 Use XG5000 simulator Program monitor e The connection type at the end of the controller name may differ by product e Available protocols may differ by product 4 Select the protocol to RS485 or RS422 LSis 108 Serial Settings Baud rate Data bits Flow control Parity The baud rate must match the setting in the XGT Panel To change the baud rate on the XGT Panel touch and hold the screen to access the menu Then touch Setting gt PC Conn Setting For iXP series XGT Panels the IP address is set by default 6 Set the additional connection properties and click OK Extended Controller Settings Key Window Settings Language v1 23 Lsis GK LINK Refer to manual RS232C z _ Detail Settings n
205. d on the device value only for line paths 411 Storage Image Setting Set options for using images from a storage location Width Set the width of the image when you import an image from the storage device You can view as much of the original image as fits within the width you set When you set the Original size option the image size is reduced or expanded to fit the width you set Height Set the height of the image when you import an image from the storage device You can view as much of the original image as fits within the height you set When you set the Original size option the image size is reduced or expanded to fit the width you set Storage Path Select the storage location for the image Original size Set to show the image in its original size If the image size is larger than the basic window only as much of the image as fits within the basic window will be displayed as shown below lt Maintain the original size gt If you don t set this option the image will be reduced to the width and height you set When you set the width and height to 640x480 the image is shown as follows Image Type Select the image type BMP or JPG Moving Pixel When an image is too large to be shown on the LSis 412 4 Reference screen in its entirety set the number of pixels to scroll when the user scrolls up down left or right to see another part of the image Use this option when
206. d to the Object Library List To import objects into an existing library 1 Inthe Object Library pane click a user object library name to select it 2 Inthe Object List right click an empty space 68 3 Click Import ae E OBJSLIDE SWITCH io ME OBJ TOGGLE SWITCH vad i aT Object08193 4 Select a file with an xpo extension and click Open The objects in the library file you selected will be added to the existing library 2 3 5 Editing Objects Learn how to edit objects that you have inserted into a project 2 3 5 1 Copying Multiple Objects You can use the multi copy function to insert multiple objects with the same properties 1 Hold the Ctrl key and click multiple objects to copy 69 e You can copy different objects at the same time e You can copy multiple objects more easily by grouping them first 1 Select multiple objects 2 Right click an object and click Group Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V Guide Line H Rotate or Flip Align Select All Ctrl A Zoom Ibject Property Screen Property Grid Setting Position Scale Change t the selected shapes to active graphic library e Toselect all of the objects on a window at once click Edit gt Select All 2 Click Edit MultiCopy 3 Specify the following properties as desired MultiCopy 3 Copy No Space Column a Max 2 Width 3 Row 2 Max 4 Height 3 Copy Dire
207. d will be created You cannot use video functions while creating a list of stored video files and video capture files The process of creating a file list may take several seconds to several minutes While a video file list is being created the 4th bit of the status device stays On While the video capture file list is being created the 5th bit of the status device stays On At these times you can watch the camera input screen and start or stop monitoring the screen Creation of video file lists and video capture files can happen in the following situations When starting the monitoring When connecting the a computer and XGT Panel via ActiveSync and then canceling the connection When the storage device is installed When the safe removal switch is turned on the switch lamp will be turned off when all applicable actions are complete in the following situations Ifthe safe removal switch is turned on while the file list was being created the switch will be turned off when the file list is complete Ifthe safe removal switch is turned on while recording the switch will be turned off when the recording is complete Ifthe safe removal switch is turned on while playing the video the switch will be turned off when the file was played completely Ifthe safety removal lamp is turned off because the safe removal switch was activated recording cannot be started and a video capture file cannot be created e Becaref
208. d with asterisks If communication fails while writing a value the message Can t Write Data appears and the action fails 354 Reference ae oe el Extended gt Offset Keypad Option Device F Display Trigger l Read Device R D Write Check Device W D ETE F write Check Device Off H sec Display Mode Transparent Security Level Set the security level for the object The higher the security level the shorter the authorization time when the password is entered When the authorization time expires the user must enter the password again to use the object Zero Fill If you have selected right justification select this option to insert zeroes o before the number Zero Display Set whether or not to show zeroes If you do not set this option the object displays nothing when the device value is o 355 LSIs e Offset Click the checkbox to use the offset function You can offset the device address based on the value of the offset device For example if the starting device address is P100 XP Builder reads the value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value If the offset value is 10 for example then the referenced device address is P110 The offset function behaves differently if a read device is set When a read device is set the offset is only applied to the writing device If a read device is not set the offset is applied to both
209. data n Area full bit On Delete after backup Record from the first Backup Device Specify a device to trigger backup of logging data Send E mail after Backup Set to send an email when logging backup is completed Done Complete Specify a device to activate when logging backup is completed Device Setting CSV Click to specify the layout of backup data in a CSV file File Format File Type Select a backup file type CSV or Encrypted CSV File Name Specify a device to convert the file name for backup data If the Device device fails to read the name or cannot locate the string in the text table the backup file is saved as noname CSV BYTE Swapof Set to run a byte swap for the string value when using the file name File Name device File Name Set the length in bytes of the file name Length Append Data to CSV File Set to add new backup data to the end of the previous CSV file Number of Backup Data in Set the number of logs to save in a CSV file maximum of 65 000 4 Reference CSV File Logging Common Property The maximum size for a logging area is 256KB The total of all logging areas cannot exceed the size of each type of logging area Logging Device Logging Condition Backup Area Buffer Manage Backup CSV Format a b a Logging Area Set the size of data saving area for each logging Logging area can be calculated by the number and size
210. device is the memory location for text input The amount of text that can be input is the same as the volume of the memory location e Display The display settings for text input objects include the following General l Transparent BG Image Basic y Display Frame Color ae O Extended Flate Color oen Library Click to select an image from the library Open Click to browse for images on your computer When you select an image from your computer it will be added to the image library automatically Transparent BG Image Click the checkbox to make the image background transparent You cannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time Frame Color Set a frame color Plate Color Set a plate color 374 e Text The text settings for text input objects include the following General Basic ont Ey Tahom Blink Not Use 5 a size 16 z Width Ratio 100 ext T Tet Pite Coo Space Font Style C Bold 7 taie 7 Strikeout 7 Underline Horizontal Alignment f Lef Center Right Font Select a font from the drop down list Size Set a text size from the drop down list or enter a value directly into the field Color Seta font color Blink Set a blink speed for the object The object will not blink The object will blink every three seconds Normal The object will blink every two seconds The object will blink every
211. display is off movement around the XGT Panel from the left right or front is detected and turns on the backlight The XGT Panel has a detection range of 1 1 5m from both sides or 40 50cm from the front in a direct line from the XGT Panel to you e The detection distance may vary depending on temperature and location e This option is available only with iXP series 553 LSIs a 5 1 2 Touch Function Settings You can adjust touch sensitivity and calibrate the touch point in the System Configuration menu To adjust the touch function touch Touch Setting in the XGT Panel System Configuration menu System Configuration Ch DateTime Setting H Enviranment Setting P Ethemet Setting xP Remote Setting H Sound Setting P Buzzer Setting 5 1 2 1 Setting Touch Sensitivity You can increase or reduce touch sensitivity 1 Touch Touch Setting System Configuration mamn ii gt DateTime Setting Environment Setting Ethernet Setting or Setting gt Sound Setting Buzzer Setting Goto MainMenu LSiIs 554 2 Select Low or High in the Touch sensitivity field When you select High touch sensitivity is faster Selecting Low reduces pointing errors when you select items on the screen Touch Setting Touch Calibration 5 1 2 2 Touch Calibration Adjust the touch point to improve the accuracy of your touch on the XGT Panel 1 Touch Touch Setting
212. displayable data value range differ by the size and type of the device as described in the following table Device Type Minimum Maximum 16bit Signed decimal 32768 32767 Unsigned decimal O 65535 BCD O 9999 32 bit Signed decimal 2147483648 2147483647 Unsigned decimal O 4294967295 BCD O 99999999 e When you input a number the following errors can occur Condition Solution Can t Write When the communication Check the cable connection Data fails between the controller or the power of XGT Panel and XGT Panel Exceeded The When you input a value that Input an exact value Refer LSis 346 Maximum exceeds the device size or to the available device Value data limit value range e Ifthe device size is changed the existing input condition and display condition are deleted e Ifthe communication with the controllers fails while inputting or reading the data only the background image is displayed on the XGT Panel The number is not displayed e If you want to enter a decimal place press the period on the keyboard and then enter the numbers Use Cipher Set to encode the numeric value that a user inputs The input value will appear as in the interface Description Enter a description for the object 347 4 Reference e Display The display settings for numeric input objects include the following General Transparent BG Image Basic Frame Color Text Input Case Displ
213. duced This may weaken the protection from water and dust ingress e When mounting the XGT Panel inside a panel ensure that you use the gasket to protect against dust or water ingress Dustproof Waterproof gasket 613 mses e Use the gasket to prevent dust or other contaminant ingress e When you mount the XGT Panel on the panel if the surface of panel is uneven water or dust can enter the product through the gaps This can be caused by the quality of the material iron aluminum or acrylic or the thickness so check the installation environment carefully Moreover be sure to adhere the gasket and panel e Ifthe gasket is damaged when you install the product or is deteriorated after along period of use it may weaken the protection from water and dust ingress If you need to replace it contact the agency or a service center e Fix XGT Panel to the panel using the supplied brackets provided in the OEM packaging Affix using supplied brackets m m Affix using supplied brackets 10 OUNi 10 ONON HIN 0000 ae ed m L MUU 100 L co cS 1 C _ L Ll Cc C C C 1 L L LC 22C ocoaceSs L C L L cS cS C C C C co DDOOANI E JODOOUUN Affix using supplied brackets Affix using supplied brackets
214. e Backup file transformation The alarm is longer than the maximum How to Resolve the Error The alarm name in the backup file exceeds the maximum number of characters 200 Contact the Customer Service Center 15010 Backup file transformation The size recorded in the file is different from the actual file size The logging data recorded to the backup file does not match the file length Contact the Customer Service Center 15011 Backup file transformation The record is smaller than the minimum size The logging record is smaller than the minimum size 16 characters Contact the Customer Service Center 15012 Backup file transformation The maximum number of loggings at atime is exceeded An attempt was made to record more than the maximum allowable number of logging entries 32 Contact the Customer Service Center 15013 Backup file transformation The number of recipes exceeds the maximum An attempt was made to record more than the maximum allowable number of recipe entries 32 Contact the Customer Service Center 15014 Backup file transformation The entry number exceeds the maximum An attempt was made to record more than the maximum allowable number of devices in each recipe block 100 Contact the Customer Service Center 15015 Backup file transformation The number of blocks exceeds the maximum An attempt was made to record more than the
215. e Storage Card_root XP_Recipe XPRooooo CSV e USB Storage_root XP_Recipe XPRooooo CSV When you open the CSV file you can view the data as shown below A B 1 Date 2008 09 19 17 10 2 Title Bread 3 item Count 100 A4 3245 5 3 6 6 i 24 a 5362 9 6 4 10 2 11 A5 To set recipe properties 1 In the Project pane double click Recipe This will open a Recipe Property tab in the editing area 203 Ii Trigger device to read Recipe Mo Block No Recipe type Basic recipe storage File recipe storage Backup data storage Control Device Option Complete device Error device Backup trigger device Backup complete device i Risingedge t Falling edge Risingedge Falling edge MN SRAM memory luse Stroage iy Bs iy Bs Ra EEE Risingedge Falling edge iy B 2 Set the following properties Trigger Device to Write Set to specify a device for writing data Set the condition to trigger the action Rising edge or Falling edge Enter the device address manually or click the keyboard to the right of the device field Trigger Device to Read Set to specify a device for reading data Set the condition to trigger the action Rising edge or Falling edge Enter the device address manually or click the keyboard to the right of the device field Recipe No Specify a word device that will execute the recipe when the condition is met The recipe is executed b
216. e or Bottom e Case The case settings for word message objects include the following General Basic Display Case List n Text Operation _ Extended Case List Create delete or reorganize conditional expressions 4 Create Click to create a new range condition You can create up to eight conditions Clicking this button opens the Range Edit window which allows you to create a condition For more information refer to lt 4 2 1 3 Understanding Constants and Data Types gt x Delete Click a condition and then click this icon to delete the hanna condition Up Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higher Laan in the list Down Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lower Lasse in the list LSis 340 4 Reference e Operation The operation settings for word message objects include the following General W Use Script Basic Display Select Script Text Script Case 2 Extended Use Script Click the checkbox to use a script with the object Select Script Select a script from the drop down list Script When you select a script it appears here To modify a script refer to lt 4 2 Scripts gt 341 LSIs n e Detail The detail settings for word message objects include the following Word Message General J Extended sp Device Display Trigge lw Offset Display Mode Transparent Offset Click th
217. e select Project Save as Project 2 Select a destination for the saved file enter a file name and click Save Notes e When you save a project two other files are created Backup file The extension for the backup file is bak OSTS file The extension for the OSTS file is OSTS This file includes information about your project workspace such as the current screen docked windows and toolbar information e When your project contains unsaved changes the Project pane shows an asterisk next to the project name 3 Toclose the project click Project Close Project 16 2 2 Configuring Project Properties Set the properties or parameters for the project file Specify properties for connecting with XGT Panels window settings security levels languages and more 2 2 1 Protecting the Project with a Password You can prevent others from opening a project by setting a password 1 Click Project Project Password Password Setting Old Password Password a Delete New Password Password Max 12 Chars Confirm Apply 2 Enter a password and re enter it to confirm Password Setting Old Password Password pO delete New Password Password m Max 12 Chars Confirm Apply 3 Click Apply Notes M e XP Builder supports only Latin characters in passwords Passwords are case sensitive and can be up to 12 characters long e Be careful not
218. e Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary 322 Range If you select the range condition specify the range size 16bitor32bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 4 3 2 5 Multi Switch A multi switch object is a switch that can operate a combination of functions of the bit switch word switch change screen switch and special switch You can set the sequence of each operation and up to 8 functions can be carried out at a time This section describes available settings for multi switch objects e Basic The basic settings for multi switch objects include the following MultiAction Switch E General gt Display Text Extended es Set Script in Up or Down Action jw Down Act Script Up Act Script Operation Type hala Bit Operation Word Operation Change Screen Print Screen Change Language Special Operation Description Set Script in Up or Down Action Set scripts for up or down states of the switch Down Act Script UpAct Script Select a script to execute when the switch is released Up Act Script 323 Select a script to execute when the switch is depressed Operation Type Select and manage operations x Delete
219. e Display Specify the following options for the frame Border Color Set a border color Plate Color Set the background for areas not filled by value ranges Needle Color Set the pointer color Transparent BG Image Set whether or not to make the background of the graph transparent Transparent Border Set whether or not to use a transparent border Shape and Direction Specify the following options for the shape and direction Shape Set the shape of the graph Direction Set the direction for filling the graph Start Position When using a circle shape set the start position of the pointer Scale Specify the following options for the scale Set the number of points in the scale Set the color of the scales 438 General Basic Display gt ES Operation 2 Extended Case List Create delete or reorganize conditional expressions Create Click to create a new range condition You can create up to eight conditions Clicking this button opens the Range Edit window which allows you to create a condition For more information refer to lt 4 2 1 3 Understanding Constants and Data Types gt x Delete Click a condition and then click this icon to delete the a condition Up Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higher w in the list Down Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lower in the list 439 LSIs 4 Reference e
220. e Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Size Set the data size for the object 16 or 32 bit Type Set the data type for the object Signed decimal Unsigned decimal BCD or float Screen Type Set the type of part to invoke Set to invoke a part Storage Set to invoke an image from a storage location such as a CF Image card or USB device Images can only be invoked from a folder titled XP_User Image Image filenames must be formatted as ImgXXXXX bmp or ImgxXXXxX jpg If the filename is Imgooooo or imgooooo or if the device value is o the image will not be invoked You can use the device value to 409 specify the image to invoke For example if the device address is Poooo and the device value is 5 the value will invoke the file Imgoooos Display Part Screen Set the method for invoking the window Invoke the window based on the device value Invoke the window when the condition is met Placement Set the location where the new part will appear on the screen Top Left Center Top Right Bottom Right or Bottom Left For example if you set the location to Top Left the part will appear in the upper left corner of the object
221. e Set whether or not to use a frame Frame Color Set the frame color Plate Color Set the background color Set the line color Line Width Set the line width Index Form Set the header format for the data list Plate Color Set the background color Text Color Set the text color 923 Description Enter a description for the object e Keypad Option The keypad option settings for the file recipe editor object include the following File Recipe Editor stl i Use Keypad Display gt Keypad Option Use Keypad set in Input Object Text No of Keypad Use User Keypad Position Position of X adis l Position of Y axis I Extended Use Interlock io Interlock Device C Na PE E Use Keypad Set whether or not to use a keypad Use Keypad set in Set whether or not to use a keypad specified in an Input Object object Enter the key window number or click Browse to locate the window Use User Keypad Set whether or not to specify the location of the keypad Position on the screen Use Interlock Set to prevent input when the interlock device meets the specified condition The input cursor will skip the locked unit and move automatically to the next unit in the sequence Not allowed on ON When the device is on input is not allowed Not allowed on OFF When the device is off input is not allowed 524 e Text The text settings for the file recip
222. e Settings Global Script Settings Auodliary Settings Summary AGT Panel Settings Extended Controller Settings Screen Settings Security Settings Key Window Settings Language Seres EGE 24 BiT colormode 7 RS 232C 5V power supply Model ixP80 TTA Add Controller Delete Controller Controller 0 Controller Settings Maker v1 23 Product L515 XGK LINK Refer to manual Connection Property Protocol R523220 Detail Settings Timeout as 100ms Watto send E ms Retry count T Use XG5000 simulator Program monitor 2 Select the XGT Panel series and model name Series z Model ixP80 TTA Y 101 LSiIs ee 3 Set the controller manufacturer and the controller model Product Select a product with ETHERNET at the end of the controller name Project Property Storage Settings Global Script Settings Auniliary Settings Extended Controller Settings Summary GT Panel Settings Screen Settings Securty Settings Key Window Settings Language lixP Series 24 BIT color mode AS 2320 SY power supply IXP80 TTA Add Controller Delete Controller v1 15 Refer to manual Detail Settings Timeout m 100ms Wait to send ya ms Retry count 3 Use XG5000 simulator Program monitor e The connection type at the end of the controller name may differ by product e Available protocols may differ by product
223. e When the directory contains its hundredth file MWOV_120330_110101 avi f the name of the directory will be changed as shown below a Movie 2 9 120220 121212 120330 110101 MOV_120220_121212 avi MOV_120220_200101 avi MOV_120330_110101 avi 603 e When the hundred and first file MOV_120330_110230 avi is created a new directory will be created as shown below a Movie 9 120220 121212 120330 110101 MOV_120220_121212 avi MOV_120220_ 200101 avi MOV_120330_110101 avi o 120330 110230 MOV_120330_110230 avi 5 6 3 2 When There is Insufficient Memory or Exceeds the Limit e Storage properties are configured in XP Builder project properties By checking Delete old file if disk full the earliest video files will be automatically located and deleted If Delete old file if disk full is unchecked then XP Builder will stop and prompt the user with an error message e When the total number of files reaches 1000 delete the earliest created file from the earliest created directory As files are deleted and the directory is emptied the directory will then be deleted e When there is insufficient storage space delete the earliest created file from the earliest created directory To save Movie clips a minimum of 10MB free memory is required To save Video files a minimum of 1MB free memory is required The earliest saved files will be deleted until sufficient space is obtained As files are deleted and the directory is emptied t
224. e and replace data as well but this function will search all project data at once unless you click Find At and restrict the search to a particular data location e If you want to find script information that is applied to objects in the base window click Tool gt Find All Script Output Script Name Position Object Type Description Script_0000 Schedule 01 Schedule 0l Id 4b PI Find Result Find Result Script Find Result 238 4 2 3 Using Scripts to Control XGT Panel Functions Several scripts are available for controlling XGT panel functions including system print and device functions 4 2 3 1 Understanding System Functions The following table describes script properties for system functions Function Description Parameters HMIExit XGT Panel ends the None monitor and moves to the standby screen Example HMI Exit InitHistoricalAlar Initialize the alarm areaof None m the NVRAM Existing alarm contents will be deleted Example InitHistoricalAlarm InitLogging Initialize the logging area of the NVRAM Logged Parameter 1 int nLogNum the contents will be deleted If logging number to one of the history alarm be initialized numbers is invalid this function will not work Example nitLogging 1 ie ae eee men Example Parameter 2 int nMonth Month SetTime W MW1000 Bas W MW1001 W MW2002 at W MW21003 O 2 W MW1004 0 23
225. e checkbox to use the offset function You can offset the device address based on the value of the offset device For example if the starting device address is P100 XP Builder reads the value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value If the offset value is 10 for example then the referenced device address is P110 Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Display Mode Set an option for the color of the message based on the background color Transparent Display the message transparently in contrast to the background image XOR Display the message in a color that is easily distinguished from the background image 342 e Display Trigger The display trigger settings for word message objects include the following Word Message General W Use Action Condition Extended T e Detail aa Pag Display Trigger Aaa Bit Off Range Multi Bit Device Device Range size 16bits Multi Bit No of Bit Tees Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is The action is performed when the device is switched off when the device i
226. e data from the current location of the cursor is changed or the cursor is moved e Color Set a color for the cursor 468 e Line Type Set a line type for the cursor solid or dash e Toshow or hide the cursor click the Logging Trend Graph area e The location of the cursor is at the center of the current data Logging Trigger Logging Trigger ho lt The current data value 3 gt lt The current data value 8 gt e Ifthe data to be displayed is deleted because the area is deleted in the cursor display mode the cursor will also disappear When the logging is restarted the cursor will reappear e The cursor cannot be moved To move the cursor use the Next Log Trend Data or Previous Log Trend Data option from the Special Switch object e f there is no data before or after the current data the cursor is moved to the previous or next data 469 4 Reference Display Trigger The display trigger settings for the logging trend graph object include the following Pe Display Trigger E f Bit On Bit Off C Range Multi Bit Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the Opts R Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical ope
227. e different for each image Refer the following examples MERE Pattern Frame FEMNE R Pattern40 Pattern Frame Pattern Frame Pattern FG Color Set a color for the foreground pattern Pattern BG Color Set a color for the background pattern Frame Color Seta frame color 265 LSIS e Text The text settings for word lamp objects include the following Word Lamp General M Use Caption From Text Table ee State A F NS play Defaut Delete Caption Operation Pianisi Fort Tahoma Font Style Bold talic Strikeout Underline Horizontal Alignment C Left Vertical Alignment C Top Use Caption Click the checkbox to use a text caption with the object When you select this option you can input text from a Text Table On Click to configure options for the object in the on state You must input the text in a text table Off Click to configure options for the object in the off state You must input the text in a text table From Text Table Click the checkbox to add text from a text table The Text Table option will be activated and the text input area will close Add the required text to the text table before editing the object You must select text for the on and off states from the same text table Text Table Click to open the text table and select text The color and font properties set i
228. e editor object include the following File Recipe Editor General ee l Tahoma Display Tahoma Keypad Optior Size 12 T E Extended oe Font Style Bold T taice 7 Strikeout I Underline Horizontal Alignment C Left Center C Bight Font Select a font from the drop down list Size Set a text size from the drop down list or enter a value directly into the field Color Set a font color Font Style Set a font style bold italic strikeout or underline You can apply more than one option at a time Horizontal Alignment Set the horizontal alignment Left Center or Right 925 Display Trigger The display trigger settings for the file recipe editor object include the following File Recipe Editor General if Use Action Condition y Extended T Pa Display Trigger si f Bit On C Bit OF C Range C Mutt Bit Device Device w EE Range Size 1 bits Type Unsigned DEC lo NOP 0 Multi Bit No of Bit Device Ea Setting Cancel Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on Bit Bito The action is The action is performed when the device is switched off when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation re
229. e intieeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 32 2 2 2 10 Changing Extended Controller Settings 0 0 0 0 eee 34 2 2 3 Editing default settings cccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeneenneceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeseeeeensttiasaaes 43 2 2 3 1 Changing default editing OPtlIONS vesissesceeectessteteteestses eestor eee 43 2 2 3 2 Changing default project options s sssssssssseessesssrrrrrnrrrrrrssseerrrrrrnrrrrrnnnnee 44 2 3 Developing an Interface sssasnsnsnnsnsnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmn 45 AI WV AC OWS Or PANS ators gs a E eee gta stc aoa aca 46 D2 CON OOO WV INGOW E EEEE EE AE N aceasta ieee 47 2 3 2 1 Opening or Closing a WiINdOW 6 tient eteneneteneeeeeeeeeeee 47 2 3 2 2 Setting a Window as the Start Window eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeneeees 47 2 3 2 3 Renaming a WiINdOW cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaeaees 48 2 3 2 4 Changing Screen Properties ee ii i ii inne 49 2 3 3 Editing WiNdOWS cccccccccessseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeesaaaaaaaaaaaeasseeeeeeeeeeeseseesesaaaaaaags 52 2 3 4 Inserting mm 6 ole ae6 gO 0 1a 6 pee mrrerter fer enter Perret er Per erie Perret er fer ester freer er Perey er rrr rere 53 olee wea Dec lee ROGUE ee ee ee rr 53 ome a era Drawing B 8 2 61 cere eee eee ere eee rere een een ee er ere ree reer ee eee eee 57 2 3 4 3 Inserting Objects from the Object Library cceeeeeeeeee
230. e part objects to invoke parts based on the device condition There are four movement types of the part objects Fixed XY Line and Route e Fixed Display the part according to the registered location condition in XP Builder e XY Display the movement of the object followed by the dot registered as the device value The XY coordinates are set based on the device value regardless of the current XY coordinates that object is located Position Device PIO EE Type A Position P0100 Device Value Y Position P0101 Device Value In this case the X location value is same as the device address P100 and the Y location value is the device address plus 1 P101 For example if the device value is like below X coordinate P100 20 130 180 Y coordinate P101 80 200 18 The bit object movement is like below 3 180 18 PANNE 0 2 130 200 e Line Display the movement of the object through the straight line Set the minimum value as the starting point and the maximum value as the ending point Position Device D P0200 EE Min 0 Type Unsigned DEC Max 100 402 In this case the X and Y location are relative based on the maximum and minimum value The X location value is same as the device address P100 and the Y location value is the device address plus 1 P1012 lf the XY device value is like below Device 1 2 3 Device Value O 50 100 The bit object movement is like
231. e part to blink when the device is set to off Not Use Slow Normal and Fast LSis 404 Placement Set the location where the new part will appear on the screen Top Left Center Top Right Bottom Right or Bottom Left For example if you set the location to Top Left the part will appear in the upper left corner of the object lt Part gt lt E g Top Left gt Top Left Align the upper left corner of the part with the upper left corner of the object Center Center the part over the object Top Right Align the upper right corner of the part with the upper right corner of the object Bottom Right Align the lower right corner of the part with the lower right corner of the object Bottom Left Align the lower left corner of the part with the lower left corner of the object Nores e fan area of the part extends beyond the borders of the basic window only the area inside the window borders will be displayed 405 e The placement points for Window and Part objects are as follows Object Placement Point Window Object The start point of the edited window screen The start point where the parts are drawn in the edited part screen Part Object Position Set a device to control values for relative location of the part for Fixed XY Line and Route paths The size of the path position device is fixed at 16 bit The maximum and minimum values restrict the path of a part based on t
232. e product Ensure that all terminal screws are tightened to their specified torque ratings Failure to do so may result in short circuits fire or erroneous operation Use only HMI 3 type grounding for the FG terminal Failure to do so may result in erroneous operation Install a safety circuit external to the HMI to protect the whole control system in case of external power supply disruption The entire system can be seriously damaged by improper operation of the HMI Install communication cables at least 100mm from high voltage wires or machinery Failure to do so may result in improper operation Install the HMI only in an environment that meets the general specifications described in the XGT Panel User Manual Failure to do so could result in electric shock fire erroneous operation or deterioration of the product Install the HMI in an environment that is protected from vibration Failure to do so could result in electric shock fire erroneous operation or deterioration of the product Prevent foreign substances such as liquids and conductive debris from entering the HMI Failure to do so could result in electric shock fire erroneous operation or deterioration of the product Caution Usage and Maintenance Do not touch the terminals while the power is on Doing so may result in electric shock or erroneous operation Turn off controllers and disconnect all power supplies before cleaning or tightening terminals Failu
233. e project to the same type of panel you have specified in the project properties Refer to lt 2 2 2 Viewing and Editing Properties gt There is no executable file in the device Send the entire XGT file first The executable file has been modified or is incomplete Transfer the entire project to the XGT Panel This is not a 32 bit unsigned data type Enter a value between 0 4294967295 If the device size and type is 32 bit decimal you must set the conditional range between o and 4294967295 This project has an error Check the tool data Recheck your data and correct any errors before transferring the project Working Engine connection status is in early stage Try again The XGT Panel is in the operational mode instead of the update mode Touch and hold the XGT Panel screen to open the menu Then touch Update HMI Engine and select the engine download mode Wrong display number A display with the same number exists or the range of acceptable display numbers has been exceeded Change the display number XGT INI file open error The initialization file for transferring the XGT Panel engine is missing or in use Ensure that the initialization file is not in use and try transferring the project again XGT model types are not the Change the XGT Panel model in the project properties or same transfer the project to a different XGT Panel XGT Panel is not ready to XGT Panel is
234. e selected shapes to active graphic library The object is rotated or flipped n Rotate Left Rotate Right Flip Horizontal Flip Vertical 74 2 3 5 4 Resizing or Relocating Objects You can resize or relocate objects To resize or move objects 1 Right click an object 2 Click Position Scale Change Ctrl X Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Delete Guide Line H Rotate or Flip Align Order Group Ungroup Select All Zoom Object Property Screen Property Insert the selected shapes to active graphic library 3 Set values for a new location or size You can move the object to a precise position or specify a precise size Position and Scale Adjustment Left 280 Top Width Height Cancel 19 To move the objects incrementally on a grid click an object and then click Edit gt Nudge gt an option If you hold the P key while nudging the figure or object will move in seven pixel increments 4 Click OK To resize multiple objects 1 Select the objects to resize 2 Click Edit Make Same Size Width Height or Both KG XP Builder C Users hs Desktop aa xpd Project Edit View Common Tool Communication Window ja px Undo Align top Ctrl Z a iira s s ad tedo Ctr y p 4 cb qX Delete Alt Delete Lf fj BET A Cut Ctrl X me out a oe m Copy Ctrl C E lia paste ahv PIE OE Projec
235. e specified limit the device values are saved in the file Periodical Logging When the logging device turns on logging begins Bit Device Conditional Logging When the logging device turns on logging begins Logging does Bit Device not repeat unless the device is turned on again To create a log 1 Inthe Project pane double click Logging This will open a Logging tab in the editing area 3 1 4 Logging 4q Condition Repeat Count Repeat Period Device Device Count Description Bit Device HXO0000 Rising Edge J 191 4 Reference 2 Double click anywhere in a field to specify the following settings Logging Device Backup Area Buftfer Manage Backup CSV Format No The number of the logging viewer object Target Device Specify the device to read Enter the device address manually or click the keyboard to the right of the field to specify a device Device Count Specify the number of devices to read consecutively from the start device maximum of 32 LSis 192 193 LSis e Logging Condition Logging Backup Area Butfter Manage Backup CSV Format F C Device BIT O EI Rising eda Repeat by 1 Repeat Penod 0 H D E o H Conditional logging C DevceBN D B hiner i Control Device Optional Logging progress wy Clear logging area Logging area ful W Period Specify a period for logging every hour every day every week every month or on
236. e the result value Values entered by the user are always regarded as decimal numbers so they are not converted The maximum and minimum values differ according to the size and type of the device When an action fails during script execution the next action in the sequence is carried out When an action fails during script execution and a temporary variable variable is changed at the point of failure the next step is carried out with the changed value If a script result value does not meet the specified condition the message Invalid at Input Case appears and the action fails If Communication fails while writing a value the message Can t Write Data appears and the action fails e Output Script Process Read the value from the device Execute the script using the input value Change the display type Display the result value If communication fails when a value is read from a device the next action in a sequence is not performed If an action fails during execution of the script the next action in the sequence is carried out When an action fails during script execution and a temporary variable variable is changed at the point of failure the next step is carried out with the changed value If the device type does not match the BCD style the type is replaced with a tilde If the result value exceeds the number of figures you set the extra numbers on the left are displayed are replace
237. eaeeeees 611 5 7 2 Panel Design and Installation cccccceceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeesesenenees 612 EI A BOUNO a Pan peeeeeeeeeeeee reer errrererere E TEOT ree 612 57 aA MOUNINO GT Panel ses E sae aes 613 5 7 3 XGT Panel Wiring SPeCif iCAtiONS cccccccccsssssssssceceessessseesseeeseesecsesessseesessessees 615 P ONE I ea ee ee 615 5 7 3 2 Ground Connection Wiring sssssisssaxssanteenasapopesisavivsatssassaxssuateannnqubssstwasteesaune 620 GOSS AY oarra EE EAE EEA E AE 621 LIST Or ACO VIN i Sirecascccae meena decnennsaoncdtatconpwesen AEA EAA EE EOE 624 Safety and Legal INTOF Mat ON asncsncmencenweas srcmeanenicnccumennnmaneneanmansnneneaneneanenss 627 Caution Wiring and Installation ccceceeeee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ease eaesansaeeeeeeeeeenee 627 Caution Usage and Maintenance cccceeeeeeee ence e ee eee eee eee eee eee eeeeaasaasansaeeeeeeeeeenes 627 Lale E eee ee ee ee ee ee 629 yi XP Builder is software that allows you to create and manage projects for machine control devices You can use XP Builder to create projects for the XGT Panel XP Builder includes multiple features that allow you to design and edit projects conveniently such as e Customizable toolbars and hotkeys e Customizable tool project and editing panes e Functions to import and export common data e Tabs for viewing multiple windows easily e Previews of project windows e Customizable image and object librari
238. ecify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary 389 Display Mode Set an option for the color of the message based on the background color Transparent Display the message transparently in contrast to the background image Display the message in a color that is easily distinguished from the background image LSis 390 e Display Trigger The display trigger settings for text display objects include the following Text Display General Use Action Condition g Extended Detail ag Display Trigger Type m Device Device EEE Range Size 16bits Type Unsigned DEC onor o Multi Bit No of Bit Device 1 ET Seting Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the wt eeeiage TO TS Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation BN anatoa r Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you s
239. ecify device numbers individually or designate a control device to specify device addresses Control Device If the first bit of word control device is On it displays the number of continuous devices from a starting device at a graph If the second bit is On it removes the current graph area Each control device data is initialized into o after completing each operation If a new item is added the blank control device window is created to next row and you can add another item up to 8 Size Set the data size of the object Type Set the data type of the object Device Num Set the device number 482 e Offset Click the checkbox to use the offset function When you use the offset function the control device you specify offsets the starting device address by 2 to address M5 When you do not use the offset function the starting device address begins at M2 Address M1 is reserved as shown in the following illustration When Using the Offset Function When Not Using the Offset Function Control C Control C C M Reserved C 1 M Reserved C 1 M2 Offset C 2 M2 Starting C 2 Device M Device M5 Starting C 3 M Device n C n 1 Device Device n C 3 M n 1 e Description Enter a description for the object LS Is e Max Min The maximum and minimum value settings for the realtime scatter graph object include the following Real Time Scatter 4 General Basic Line and Dot Alarm Max Min Setting
240. eck the proposed location for the installation to ensure that the panel will be adequately protected from excessive heat or dust 5 7 1 1 Surrounding Condition e Install the XGT Panel in a position free from water and dust ingress The XGT Panel is designed to comply with IP Ingress Protection Standard The front of XGT Panel is rated IP65 and the rear is rated IP20 Bm e Ingress Protection IP is based on the IEC 60529 Standard for degrees of protection provided by enclosures It includes the degree of protection against solid objects and of protection against water ingress IP65 rating guarantees the enclosure is dust proof 6 and protected against jets of water 5 IP20 rating guarantees protection from solid foreign objects of 12mm diameter and greater 2 but it does not guarantee protection from water ingress a orm aa ee Rea objects non protected 50 mm diameter 12 5 mm diameter 2 5 mm diameter 1 0mm diameter Dust tigh Against ingress of water with harmful effects non protected Continuous immersion Supplementary information specific to High voltage apparatus Motion during water test Stationary during water test Weather conditions lt Source IEC60529 gt 609 LSIs e The XGT Panel is designed to mount on the panel so that the front side meets the standard However it does not guarantee the installation environment e The product may malfunction
241. ect the range condition specify the range Size a6bitor32bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Exp Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions Display Trigger The display trigger settings for text input objects include the following General Use Action Condition Extended Detail Keypad Option Action Condition y Display Trigger Type f Bit On f Bit Off f Range Multi Bit Type Unsigned DEC Multi Bit No of Bit Device 1 Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the 2 page RAS Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result PN Shoteeenene Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you select the range condition specify the range 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Click to designate the expres
242. ed Level o allows access by all users so it is not possible to specify a password only levels 1 9 are configurable Password Set a password XP Builder supports only Latin characters in passwords Passwords are case sensitive and can be up to 12 characters long TIAN Description Password Device Set a word device to control access to the XGT Panel Enter a device address or click the field and then click the keypad icon on the right side of the field to specify a device address Password Input e Set the length of time to grant access after entering the Interval min password The permission will expire based on your setting and will require the password to be re entered The default unit is minute and you can set an interval from o to 30 minutes e Ifyou set the interval to o a password must be entered for every operation where a security level is applied e Ifyou attempt to access an option that has a higher security level applied you must enter the password even when the password input interval has not yet expired For highly sensitive operations use shorter intervals Note gt You can apply security settings to the following objects bit switch word switch change screen switch special switch multi switch numeric input and text input LSiIs 26 2 Project Development 2 2 2 5 Changing Key Window Settings You can set the key window number for input devices The key window set here is
243. ed the event recording trigger device and an event recording time greater than o If you set Stop device of event recording device from the Project Property setting you cannot use the event recording function You must use the video playing and capture file function instead e You cannot set the Display Video File or Display Video Input option in the two screens at the same time e You cannot use video functions while creating a list of stored video files and video capture files The process of creating a file list may take several seconds to several minutes While the video file list is being created the 4th bit of the status device stays On and the sth bit of the status device stays On During this time you can watch the camera input screen and even start or stop monitoring the screen e You can creating a file list of video and video capture when Starting the monitoring Connecting a computer and XGT Panel to ActiveSync and then canceling the connection The storage device is installed e When the safe removal switch is turned on the switch lamp will be turned off after the applicable actions are completed in the following situations Ifthe safe removal switch is turned on while the file list was being created the switch will be turned off when the file list is completed Ifthe safe removal switch is turned on while recording the switch will be turned off when the recording is completed Ifthe safe remo
244. ed to windows For more information about scripts refer to lt 4 2 Scripts gt e Toapply ascript select a script name and execution condition gt Insert e You can specify an execution condition for a script Consecutive Periodic On Bit Rising On Bit Falling or On Bit Changed or specify a device to control execution of the script Etc Click the checkbox next to Run Script at Open Screen or Run Script at Close Screen and select a script for each case BEA Although an execution condition is fulfilled while processing a script there might be a slight delay because the conditions are rechecked after the script is completed 51 LSIS 4 When you are finished configuring properties click OK to save your changes Category g C Run Script at Open Screen General Sicriot Ho Background Se Local Script Setting _ Run Script at Close Screen v Script No Show How Aam 2 3 3 Editing Windows You can edit the windows with typical functions such as cut copy and paste To edit windows 1 In the Project pane right click a window name 2 Click an option such as Copy Paste Cut or Delete 3 Click OK If necessary When you paste a window into the project you can set the number for the window LSiIs 52 2 3 4 Inserting Figures or Objects You can add figures objects or text to windows You can also set properties such as a width height color or pattern and insert image
245. eeeeeeeeeaaaaaaeaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseseeesaaaaaaas 531 4 318 Memo Pad O0J Clsisriiecies taieri e eera e ADSR ian Eran na 533 Boe OVIOWIC FAVT OE n E E E E E AER 536 4 4 Using Program Monitor sssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 539 4 4 1 About Program Monitor cccceceeeececeeeeeeeeceeeaaaaaaaeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeessseeeeseaaaaaaaas 539 4 4 1 1 PLCs that Support Monitoring lt assacsesccasceseessasssesasessassseateesteremesss es ees 539 4 4 1 2 The Program Monitor Window ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaeeneeeeeeeeeees 540 Vim ea MONTONNG FrOGTOI mereernrerr re trerrr er trerrre rt nininini ira iTia arina rr ere rrr Tre 541 4 4 2 1 Monitoring Programs from the XGT Panel M Nnu cccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 541 4 4 2 2 Monitoring Programs with a Special Switch Object ccceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 542 4 4 2 3 Selecting Programs to Monitor ceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeneeseeeeeeeeees 542 E e CNA te OI AIAN A E 543 4 4 2 5 Changing the Display Format ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 545 4 4 2 6 Changing the Current Device Value ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeseseeeeeeeees 546 4 5 Viewing or Changing XGT Panel Information c cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 547 5 Managing an XGT Panel cccceceeeeeeceeeeseseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeseeeeeeeneaes 551 5 1 Configuring Syst
246. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 60 2 3 4 4 Managing Object Libraries ee ii iii iin 62 DO EOIN OO CCS EERE yams I NE E E E A EA 69 2 3 5 4 Copying Myltiple Objects cccccccssasasssssesasasasesasasesesecosasssaseessaassaseseneseeseese00030003 69 2 3 5 2 Arranging Objects ll ll nn nn nnn nn nn EEEE nn nn nn EEEE EEEE EEEE 72 Aara Ola WING OD JCS vaigaacacacacesnteecs cassasesseasanasaaeasacsesee cece saqsasesesasasaneaesseosesepsiaamence 74 2 3 5 4 Resizing or Relocating Objects eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 75 2 3 5 5 Setting VIEWING OPTIONS 0 00 teenie ee tanner tea eeeeaeeeeeas 78 2 3 6 Appiying gaL6 6 keener PRT ere rte PRPErT Tr PtrRrT eT Pr Ret PrP TTT Ter err erare aiarar etree Fr POrrs Ter en Te rrr 84 0 A aee MI UN Sh SS e temic enteric E E E 84 2 36 2 Replacing Mlgi 18ers 85 2 3 6 3 Setting an Image as a Background eee eee eee 86 2 3 6 4 Managing Image Libraries iisesssssesssterstesstssstessrs wre rsiersisesie ieee 87 24 Connecting CON ENON NOUS steers tse eines een wale esate eniraeeeee Yostent anne ss 101 De DCOMMCE ing WATCH CG das tis ascastocaee eects ase egestas E eee cee 101 2 4 2 Connecting with a Serial POst ccccseceeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeaaaaaaaeeeesseseeeeeeeeeeeseees 104 PaE a 92 ae ener r rere ere rere re eee eres 104 2 422 USNO By ee Aol eo 22 eee ie er rer er er ere rere rere rere errr re reer rere seers 107 2 5 Simulating amp Debugging sien ieee nace ca ciotn Sat enecewee ae nl
247. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 251 4 2 3 10 Understanding Other FUNCTIONS cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 252 4 2 3 11 Understanding the Script Watchdog ccccecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 254 A3 OD FOCUS tas ce pi sateece ann cuan E E 255 Ao OO O CS e sean cee cGecsasiesaetoswtantesnientninctce dosu sad toacteagaieweeiosnngention 257 PO dBi EO tee ee 257 BBD WY OIG aeS 263 Fe Pale NeState is 419 eee rete eee ee eee ee ee ee 270 Bi SWIG C0 e N rieev aime T A E A 277 Mee te RE E EE E ee ene TT 277 BETS OA A SVC p EEE E E E E ET 285 aa e 5 ChE Ci S N E 294 e Diels SC a SEC g E EE EEE E E E E E E 301 ie Dr NO V a tsa caceae cece cnenesandnceesaaceenunenesecdnapssesasenanccesasenenaebesceuees 323 Aes Feed A 0c 0 16 i ne eo Te E ree Tre rr Te er one tee 332 Tipe hes We 00 orcs o ee E A E 332 4 3 3 2 Word Message ccceceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaauaaaaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeessesaaaaaaaaaaaseeeeeeeesens 337 4 3 4 Numeric Text ODjCCtS ccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaeaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesesseseseaaaaaaaas 344 Fake ey NOE C A eE EEEE E EE er E eee 344 A a NUNE A DI A e A EEE AAE EEEE AA EEA 362 4 3 4 3 Text IN DU Uisccssecccsctcaccssecsesseneseneeeseesesnessecasncvsengsenesencuznc seers ecre vers venceencgatanezezs 373 fei Te VOX E Olay 2 2 400ceeeaeaeeeeceseeeeesaeaseacceseeesaasaseeccesaseseanaaseeccesesesanoassszeaeesanam 384 4 3 5 Window O10 CCUG srisnecriantomenencsane
248. een Switch Special Switch Mh Seatch 5533 4 ha nooi Toolbox i MP N State Lamp Project cos pane pos D Nissen Display EJ Numenc ingest a Test Deeply KI Test Inout T B Window Output and results tabs Toolbars Use tools or menus to perform tasks and specify options Project pane Show the elements contained in the project in a cascading tree You can open reposition or dock other windows such as the Graphic Library Object Library Device Map Script Toolbox and Data Viewer windows Editing area The center of the window where you can add and manipulate objects figures and graphics to create an interface Toolbox Use the objects or figures in the Toolbox to create a project Output and These tabs allow you to view interface messages error messages and results tabs search results 1 About XP Builder 1 3 2 Controls and Options Customize toolbars keyboard shortcuts menus and other options in the XP Builder interface 1 3 2 1 Customizing Toolbars In the XP Builder interface you can create custom toolbars add or remove icons on toolbars and select which toolbars to show To create a toolbar 1 Click Tool gt Customization Toolbars Rename 1 About XP Builder 2 Click New Customize Commands Toolbars Keyboard Menu Options Toolbar Name New _toolbart Cancel 3 Enter a name for the toolbar and click OK The new toolbar
249. een Thumbnails O54 sues OT die m A 229 LSIs 3 Click Function List to select from lists of pre defined functions such as device screen and communication operations Double click an operation to insert it into the script Script Toolbox x tE Function Control W Communication Operation Help Insert Property Value Buffer Size Result value Calculates 2 s complement of the variables fram source buffer to source buffer Source buffer size 1 freturn bool 4 Inthe script editing area enter values for the function as necessary i Copyright Cc 2004 2006 2 All nights reserved 3 ff Vistlus http www Isis biz ERROR ji 12 13 ADD_SUM_2S 1 M 230 5 Inthe Script Tool Box click Control Word to select from lists of commands device settings and operators Double click an item to insert it into the script Script Toolbox x E Function Control W Ei Control Word do while 2 return i ERROR El Device Setting Bit Device On Bit Device Off Word Device 16 Setting k Word Device 32 Setting on Operator 6 In the script editing area enter values for the control word as necessary 4 2 2 3 Specifying Local Scripts To select a script that will change what is shown on the XGT Panel display 1 Create a script as described in 4 2 2 1 or 4 2 2 2 2 Double click a window from the Pro
250. eeseeneenes 576 EO LCTO SIS ace cee eel eae cai 577 5 3 2 Viewing Connection IMONVOANON icnciiiinincnnciaiiiminnnaeeansnnabasoMaen 578 5 3 3 Ladder Program Monitoring ccccccccccssssneeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeasaaaaaaaanesssseeeees 583 5 3 4 Setting Up N 1 Communication cccceeeccneeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeaneeeeeaaeeesenaeeeeaaeeeseaaaees 584 5 4 Updating the XGT Panel stcstedecatsesenaqessads secenseeadsnncesaeksmsenannnsiseaniensgandsencesnutwacass 586 5 5 Managing Storage DeviceS s ssssssusnnnsnunnrununnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 588 5 5 1 Downloading PrOjeCtS cccccccccceeeeeeeecenannnaneeesecseeeeeeeeeeeeseseseesssaaaaaaaaeeessenenees 588 ET SUNON alge aceon etter eer rere tee reer ter err ere 590 BG FDO RIXT POMC ea bik ndnepddasaauaidarddetalanee tela vahiteteseaadandstaas 592 5 5 4 Select a USB Storage Device ccccccssssssssssessssssssscccsseeeececcennnnssssauaaaansssssseeess 594 5 6 Managing External Storage Sources for Backup 2 cecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 598 5 6 1 Managing the File Path for Backup Files 2 ccccceceeeeeeeeesnnseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeens 598 5 6 1 1 File Path for Logging Backup cccccccccccecececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 599 5 6 4 2 Path fOr REGDE BackUp ssn 600 5 6 1 3 Path for Screen Backup cccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaaaaaaaeeeeeeeees 600 5 6 1 4 Path for Memo Backup cccccccccccc
251. elect All Zoom Object Property Screen Property Grid Setting Position Scale Change Fit window to Shape Max size Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V gt Align Left gt Align Center Align Right Align Top Ctrl A Align Middle Align Bottom Ss as 72 13 Me You can also arrange all objects to the center of the editing area Select the objects to arrange and then click Edit Centerin Page gt Horizontal or Vertical To change the drawing order 1 Right click an object 2 Click Order an ordering option Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Delete Guide Line H gt Rotate or Flip gt Align gt Order gt Bring to Front Group Send to Back Ungroup Bring Forward Send Backward Select All Ctri A Zoom gt Object Property Screen Property Grid Setting Position Scale Change Fit window to Shape Max size The object ordering is changed 2 3 5 3 Rotating Objects You can rotate or flip objects in a desired direction To rotate objects 1 Right click an object 2 Click Rotate or Flip gt a rotation or flip optio Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Delete Guide Line H Rotate or Flip Align b Order b Group Ungroup Select All Ctrl A Zoom b Object Property Screen Property Grid Setting Position Scale Change Fit window to Shape Max size Insert th
252. elect the range condition specify the range 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 391 4 3 5 Window Objects Window objects allow you to invoke windows based on the conditions of the device 4 3 5 1 Bit Window This section describes available settings for bit window objects e Basic The basic settings for bit window objects include the following a General a4 K Device Eo EE Extended Window Screen No 8B Browse Bit Condition Window Type On t Of Popup C Overlap Placement Top Left C Center C Top Right Bottom Right C Bottom Left Description Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Window Screen No Set the window number to invoke or click Browse to locate the window Bit Condition Set the bit condition for invoking the window on or off Window Type Set the type of window to invoke Set to open a new window on top of the existing window Overlap Set to overlay a new window in an area where no figures or objects exist on t
253. em OPptiOns ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseesaesenseeseeseeneenes 551 TABAN SONGS e a E E E E E E E R 552 5 1 2 Touch Function SCttiGS cccccccccccccccccccecannneeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaaaaaaaaaesssesentes 554 54 21 Setting Touch Sensitivity seniorren ERT ANA PaT C aO rere pes oars eso E E E IEEE 555 5 1 3 Adj sting Date and TICs cess cinscinicossdepnqun cer euaduimevenduatoumcnabommmebevapasduennines 556 Got EVO SCE IOS IEE I SEE I ede ee asec I E AE A 557 RL AATE 1 OS EEEE EE E E EE E E enews 560 5 1 6 XP Remote settings casa tescsnanteeaeeescaceanaesead epsersenesaedsedaasecresusendeedecepseeeereeesetenendt 561 E EAE S E A E A E 563 E Lo DUZ SE I a E EE E E A A E rT eT 564 5 2 XGT Panel Function Diagnostics sipctneeorsterctnnsdacecne smowourasandecns saatingenanecosamateenees 566 5 2 1 Checking Screen Function s saaaasnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnreeeeennrrrnnnnnrrrrrnnnnrrreeeenrrnnrrnrrrrr ene 567 TA CHECKING POUCH F O e E EEE E E E 568 Be eC E GEAN OY aa E E ETO TE R 569 5 2 4 Checking Flash Memory ccccccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeseeeeeeeeesssneneees 570 G2 GOOG GP CAG OEE EEE PEE E EAE AEA PE E 571 2s EE e SOHO POM A EAE A A AAA T E 572 EAT NET T Goi ge amen nen nT E E E S 574 5 2 8 Checking USB MCMOSY scccccccccceeccceccceceneneeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeesesaaaaaaaaaaesseeeenees 575 5 3 Viewing Controller Information cccceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeseesensees
254. endwadeeemacignteeteanvdercecstveahias 110 pi B ce Utermiale Nola Eae e arte re ere ae reeeeree E tren re cere ree reer ent rrr yr ret ere 110 2 5 2 WA OEE AG VOC Oia ea ocean E 112 2 5 2 1 Monitoring DeVICES 00 0 eet eee ea ne eesa nessa eeeeaaeeeeaaeeeeaaeeees 112 pan oy ep a GH ann BW E VUE nr teen nen enna nee eee eee 114 2 5 3 RUNNING a Data CHECK cccccesseenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeensaaaaaaaeaecedseeteeeeeeeeeeeeees 115 2 5 4 Viewing the CVC COD rac ete oar eee eee ee 116 2 5 5 Evaluating Project Size Memory Usage iistisscisseisssseselserselneraeleeeeleeraeles 118 2 5 6 Finding and Replacing DeVICES ceteee ieee eee nein 119 2 5 6 1 Finding and Replacing Devices on the Active Window eee 119 2 5 6 2 Finding and Replacing All Devices eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 121 2 5 6 3 Viewing Device Cross References cceeeeeeeeeeee teen eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 123 2 5 7 Switching Project Windows 00c ilies 123 2 6 Managing a Project erate eect Paice eet ot ceeds eet tee eee nnmnnn 124 SGOINN COG TOON AGT PONE tats tages taste atcacetectorg eesti g niet taste eeicons 124 2 6 1 1 Using a Serial RS 232C CONNECTION cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeees 128 2 6 1 2 Using an Ethernet Connect ion eee eee neneeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeee 130 2 6 1 3 Using a USB CONNECTION eee eee n eee rane eee ee eaaeeeeeaeeeeeaieees 132 2 6 1 4 Using an Active
255. er which does not fit for characters the selected font in the text table or window contents 13001 The script selected as the The specified script does not exist Specify operation does not exist another script or create a new script 15000 Backup file transformation The The file may be in use Ensure that the file is backup file cannot be opened closed and try again 15001 Backup file transformation The The file may be in use Ensure that the file is output file cannot be made closed and try again 15002 Backup file transformation the The file may be in use Ensure that the file is backup file is not accessible closed and try again 15003 Backup file transformation The The file may be in use Ensure that the file is backup file cannot be read closed and try again 15004 Backup file transformation The The file may be in use Ensure that the file is output file is not writable closed and try again 15006 Backup file transformation The An incorrect character is included in the alarm alarm header is not ox5a4b header Contact the Customer Service Center 15007 Backupfiletransformation The The file offset exceeds the file size Contact the front offset is larger than the file Customer Service Center size 15008 Backup file transformation The The group name in the backup file exceeds the name of the group is longer than the maximum maximum number of characters 200 Contact the Customer Service Center 15009 Error Messag
256. er windows Nore To configure the email server click Server Settings Mail Server Mail Server Settings E mail Mail Server IP address or SMTP server name SMTP server port 0 Use SSL TLS Validate server certificate My SMTP server requires authentication i rae R E assivord IP Address or SMTP Enter the IP address or SMTP server name Server Name SMTP Server Port Enter the port number of the SMTP server If you use an anonymous SMTP account service in the intranet the port number is 25 Use SSL TLS Encode data when transferring it to the mail server Validate Server View the certificate of the mail server 33 LSIs rr Certificate My SMTP Server Unless you use an anonymous SMTP mail service in the intranet you Requires need authentication for the user information Authentication User Name Set the name for authentication Password Set the password for authentication 2 2 2 10 Changing Extended Controller Settings You can connect a bar code reader to an XGT Panel s RS 232C port COM2 and use video functions Ea a Storage Settings Global Script Settings Auniliary Settings Extended Controller Settings IV Barcode settings RS232c Detail Settings Recording screen size QCIF 1767144 QVGA 320 240 Recording frame rate 15Frame Second 30 Frame Second Recording bit rate 256KB Second 512KB Second 1024 KB Second As the encoding fa
257. eral Background Local Script Setting Ftc General Screen Type Screen Mo Screen Name Memory Size 20 Byte 800 Description Set basic information such as type number name or window size If you specify window names from a text table the text will be applied but additional font properties will not The name will appear in a fixed format white 15 point font To change properties for multiple windows at the same time hold the Ctrl key and click the window names Then right click any of the selected window names and click Properties The values you specify will be applied to all the selected screens at the same time Background Set the background pattern color or image To select a background image from your computer click the check box next to Use BG Image click Library and locate the image file For more information refer to lt 2 3 6 3 Setting an Image as a Background gt You can set a background with a color and image at the same time but the image setting takes priority over the color setting Supported background image formats include BMP JPG GIF TGA PNG TIF WMF ICO and PCX except for the XP30 BTE 50 Category Description which supports only BMP GIF and JPG Local Script e Set scripts to execute when the base window appears or Setting switches The script is executed only once when the window changes e Scripts must be created before they can be appli
258. ert Image You can also right click on the Graphic list and click Insert Image A B MATILE fee E TOGGLE_V 2 d VALVE_256_R ee d VALVE R amp VALVE V Delete Library Export Rename 3 Select an image file and click Open LS Is Several options are available when editing such as setting the transparency value of images and saving them in WMF format to maintain resolution when magnifying them To edit or apply changes to an image right click it and select from the following options n VALVE V As Background Image Delete Image Rename Replace Image Image Info Save As File m ar Graphic 2049 Fax Apply Transparent Color Select Transparent Color Dither Image to 256 Colors Functions Replace Image Description Replace an existing image in the user image library Image Info View the size of the image Save as File Save the image with a different file name Apply Transparent Color Apply a transparent color to the image see the following procedure Select Transparent Color Set the transparency value of an existing color in the image see the following procedure Dither Image to 256 Colors e Change the color value of the image to 256 colors to reduce the size of the file e Once the image is dithered it cannot be restored LSiIs 92 2 Project Development
259. erties 4001 The logging device of logging The device has not been specified Specify the XX is not correctly set device in the logging properties 4002 The logging display device of The device has not been specified Specify the XX is not correct device in the logging properties 4003 The logging stop device of XX The device has not been specified Specify the is not correct device in the logging properties 4004 The logging area pool device of The device has not been specified Specify the logging XX is not correct device in the logging properties 4005 The logging area deleting device The device has not been specified Specify the of logging XX is not correct device in the logging properties 4006 The logging backup device of The device has not been specified Specify the logging XX is not correct device in the logging properties 4007 The logging backup completing The device has not been specified Specify the device of logging XX is not device in the logging properties correct 4008 Logging area setting is not The logging storage area has not been specified correct Specify the storage area in the logging area settings 4009 The maximum size of the The sum of the specified storage areas exceeds Error Message logging area has been exceeded XX KB How to Resolve the Error the maximum logging area size Adjust the storage areas to fit within the maximum size 4 010
260. es e Scripts and advanced functions such as alarms logs schedules and recipes e Multiple language support 1 1 Overview This section describes the basic concept of using XP Builder to create interfaces for machine control devices and the types of hardware that XP Builder supports 1 1 1 XP Builder Concept XP Builder is the starting point for creating human machine interfaces HMIs for industrial applications With XP Builder you can design user friendly interfaces for XGT Panels that allow end users to control machine functions through configurable controllers such as programmable logic controllers PLCs inverters or servos With the XGT Panel you can monitor information from each controller via a graphical user interface GUI In addition simple control is possible with switch and writing objects The XGT Panel supports additional programmable functions such as scripts loggings recipes and alarms which allow you to fully customize the control environment As illustrated by the graphic that follows the interface running on an XGT Panel provides input controls in the form of bit objects that are linked to controller routines such as a ladder program or other parameters The controller parameters dictate the operation of connected machinery and may also provide feedback to the XGT Panel Data returned from a monitoring process can be displayed on the XGT Panel in the form of word devices 1 About XP Builder XP Bu
261. es to put to the right of the decimal point when you select formats other than binary octal and hexadecimal numbers If you have selected right justification select this option to insert zeroes 0 before the number Description Enter a description for the object 4 Reference e Display The display settings for data list object include the following General lot Fenn No of Row 5 No of Col 54 0 Kaas 0 v as Direction Left gt Right Frame Color N Flate Color Line Color N i Line Width 1 Ww se Header Plate Color Text Color a List Form Specify the form of the list Set the number of rows No of Col Set the number of columns Specify the size of the area where the data will be shown 0 to 32 for each axis Set the direction to display the data Top gt Bottom or Left gt Right Frame Display Set whether or not to use a frame Set the frame color Plate Color Set the background color for the table Line Color Set the line color for the frame Line Width Set the line width for the frame LSis 502 Use Header Set whether or not to use a header Plate Color Set the background color for the header Text Color Set the text color for the header Header Edit Click column headers to select text strings from a text table e Text The text settings for data list object include the following lt q General l t Tahoma Basic
262. et the number of columns to display Set the display direction Top gt Bottom or Left gt Right 519 LSIs Frame Display Set the display options for the frame Index Form Set the header format for the data list Plate Color Set the background color Text Color Set the text color e Keypad Option The keypad option settings for the data list editor object include the following General J Ae Kapal Display l Use Keypad set in Input Object Pa Reypad Option No of Keypad Browse Text Use User Keypad Position Extended a Position of X axis 0 Position of Y axis 0 Use Interlock f Not allowed on ON Interlock Device Hot allowed on OFF D EEE Basic Use Keypad Set whether or not to use a keypad Use Keypad set in Set whether or not to use a keypad specified in an Input Object object Enter the key window number or click Browse to locate the window Use User Keypad Set whether or not to specify the location of the keypad Position on the screen LSis 520 Use Interlock Set to prevent input when the interlock device meets the specified condition The input cursor will skip the locked unit and move automatically to the next unit in the sequence Not allowed on ON When the device is on input is not allowed Not allowed on OFF When the device is off input is not allowed e Text The text settings for the data list editor object incl
263. eted successfully Next Memo Set to move to the next or previous memo when the switch is activated Previous Memo Pen Setting Set the color and thickness of the pen to be used for memos You can also set a special switch to apply the color and line thickness you specify Redo Memo Set to restore a recently canceled memo when the switch is activated Reset Memo Set to delete all memo files from storage devices when the switch is activated The third bit of the memo pad status device indicates whether or not the memos were deleted successfully Storage of Memo Set to save memos in a storage location when the switch is activated The storage location must be designate in the project properties Undo Memo Set to undo the last action in a memo when the switch is activated 308 Movie Player Play Set to show video from a connected camera Camera capture file display or from a storage device Play recorded video or Video capture file display If a file order device is set in the Video Player object the applicable file will play If no file order device is set the most recently created video will play Stop Set to stop video playback when the switch is activated Pause Restart Set to pause or resume video playback when the switch is activated Fast Forward Set to fast forward video playback when the switch is activated Set the interval for fast forwarding in the video player status set
264. etesnseeeeeeeseteeeees 172 3 4 19 Cannot Retrieve Backup Data from an XGT Panel ssseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 172 3 4 20 Cannot Select the Path of a Removable Drive scseeeeesetseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 172 3 4 21 Cannot Download a Project to a Removable Drive sccsssssseeeeeeeeeeeeees 172 4 Reference ee nr ee ee er eee 174 Aa COMMON Data eee eee eee ne een nee sere ee een ser eee E er nse ee 174 DoD DS ar ies herders E em tone beeen nadie aera E eee eee eas 175 DBD VOTE VG CS ices EE E see onto oee eased A sigan doente ecienes ecd 185 Dy DS EOD ONG e natin ean a E E E E E 191 7 RUT A Gi 8 lt 5 eT re ee E ee ee eee 202 Te TOW FANS eaea EET EEE EE TE EAEE E EE E 207 LAO TOV AE a A A E A A E 209 Aa AEE E EEEE EE E EEE E EEE E EEE E 216 LDS SOUS A A E E A E 217 ABa Ae E oE AAA ETEA E E E E EE E A T T E 218 BP ADOTT S e nent az E E A A E 218 4 2 1 1 Understanding Script CommandS ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 220 4 2 1 2 Understanding Device Address Expressions ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 224 4 2 1 3 Understanding Constants and Data Types ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 225 4 2 1 4 Understanding Variables cccccccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeeaceeeeeeeeeeees 227 4 2 1 5 Viewing the Script Cross Reference ccececcceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnneneeeeeeees 228 4 22 CCT SOS asec ces eee cee 228 Ae Be ASEM EEL E E E
265. ether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specified range Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation ln result of multiple devices is met Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary 505 LSis n Range If you select the range condition specify the range Sie 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Exp Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 4 3 11 Logging Viewer Object This section describes available settings for the logging viewer object e Main The main settings for the logging viewer object include the following Logging Viewer i General Select Logging Group a Main z No of Lo ID 1 Display a ae Header Description E Select Logging Group Set the number of the logging group to monitor Description Enter a description for the object 906
266. evice Alarm Clear alarm area device Clear alarm area complete device ID a EEE l No of alams occured oo a Backup start device Backup complete device Send E mail after backup dori E Az D EEE Print Settings l Aam print Print start device Print complete device Top margin Left margin 2 Specify the following properties Backup Storage Path Description Set a location for the history alarm backup Clear Alarm Area Device Specify a device to initialize the history alarm area in the NVRAM Clear Alarm Area Complete Device Specify a device to activate after initializing the history alarm area in the NVRAM is complete No of Alarms Occurred Specify a device to save the number of alarms occurred Backup Start Device Specify a device to begin backup of alarm data Backup will only be performed if the backup location in the project properties is set to a USB device or CF card Backup Complete Device Specify a device to activate when backup of alarm data is complete Send E mail After Set to send an email when backup of alarm data is complete Backup Done To use this function you must specify backup start and backup complete devices Alarm Print Set to print history alarm data Print Start Device Specify a devi
267. evice Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you select the range condition specify the range Size 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 522 4 3 15 File Recipe Editor Object The file recipe editor object allows you to view and edit recipes This section describes available settings for the file recipe editor object Display The display settings for the file recipe editor object include the following File Recipe Editor E General Recipe Form No of Row J No of Col i Keypad Optior io Direction Left gt Right Extended r Frame Display W Lise Frame Color N Plate Color Line Color es Line Width 1 Index Form Plate Color Text Color N Description Recipe Form Set the display options for the recipe data Set the number of rows to display No of Col Set the number of columns to display Set the display direction Top gt Bottom or Left gt Right Frame Display Set the display options for the frame Us
268. evice to activate when data in the storage area for Complete logging data is deleted e Ifyou set the periodic logging setting to Period you can set the logging to repeat up to 100 times Logging starts at the time you set and repeats as many times as specified at the designated period Examples of periodic conditional operation Setting Repeat 4 times Logging start timer ON Repetition timer ON Logging Logging progress cc gt Repetition cycle e Ifyou set the periodic logging setting to Device Bit Device logging starts when the bit device is turned on or off and repeats as many times as specified at the designated period 194 Examples of periodic conditional operation Setting Repeat 4 times Logging start Logging start 2 7 timerON timer ON Repetition timer ON Logging progress Logging gt Repetition cycle e Backup Area Buffer Manage Backup CSV Format Logging Device Logging Condition Backup Area Buffer Manage Backup CSV Format Logging Common Property Storgeforbackup dats E icons Use ting buffer Do not clear log area at backup Auto backup if area full Backup Device Backup device D EEE Send E mail after backup comph Complete device oO EEE Setting CS file format File type CSVfile Encrypted CSV file File name device oO EEE BYTE swap of file name File name length le bytes 7 Append da
269. evice window you can also specify network settings if necessary Description Enter a description for the object 332 4 Reference e Display The display settings for bit message objects include the following General Transparent BG Image Basic a Frame Color Text Extended Use Border Open Border Color e Library Click to select an image from the library Open Click to browse for images on your computer When you select an image from your computer it will be added to the image library automatically Transparent BG Image Click the checkbox to make the image background transparent You cannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time Frame Color Set a frame color Plate Color Set a plate color Use Border Set whether or not to use apply a border to the message area Border Color Set a border color 333 LSIs a e Text The text settings for bit message objects include the following General Or OF Basic i Display Text Table gt Extended On Off Copy Size 14 Blink Not Use Delete On Msg i Change the Property of Text Table Coor a Font Style Bold talic Strikeout Underine Horizontal Alignment C Left Center Vertical Alignment f Top i Middle C Bottom Cancel On Click to configure options for the object in the on state You can input text only fro
270. ext table and click Property Korean Korea _ English United States Chinese Simplified PRC J Japanese Japan LSS 186 3 Click languages from the language list and then click OK Columns for alternate text will be added for as many languages as you select in the language list Text Table_01Property Name Text Table 01 Font size J Edit languages Korean Korea Select All English United States 7 Chinese Simplified PRC Deselect All Japanese Japan Invert Check 4 Enter the translated form of the string in the appropriate field Text Table_01 It will be available for display in objects when the user selects the alternate language from the drop down list on the XP Builder toolbar To add additional languages to the list of supported languages refer to lt 2 2 2 6 Changing Languages gt English Unite Korean Korez Bal To support multiple languages the operating system you are using must support the language as well 187 To apply text from a text table 1 Create an object that supports importing from a text table see the table that follows 2 Click Text in the object property window or click Header for a History Alarm Viewer object To apply the text table to a Flow Alarm or History Alarm select one of the text tables from the TextTable Name field in the Flow Alarm editing area or the Text table field in the
271. f 1 600 Text Plate Color Click to set the background color for figures Space Set the indent from the margin of the object If you select left alignment you can set the left indent If you select right alignment you can set the right indent Font Style Set a font style bold italic strikeout or underline You can apply more than one option at atime Horizontal Alignment Set the horizontal alignment Left Center or Right 349 General Basic Display Displ Operation Extended Input Case List Create delete or reorganize conditional expressions You can create only one condition for numeric input Up Down Click to create a new range condition You can create up to eight conditions Clicking this button opens the Range Edit window which allows you to create a condition For more information refer to lt 4 2 1 3 Understanding Constants and Data Types gt Click a condition and then click this icon to delete the condition Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higher in the list Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lower in the list LSis 350 e Display Case The display case settings for numeric input objects include the following Numeric Input J General Basic Display Text Input Case Pag Display Case Operation Display Case List PEI Display Case List Create delete or reorganize conditional expressions If
272. f the polyline press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking a point Image e Toimport your own images from the computer refer to lt 2 3 6 4 Managing Image Libraries gt e Tochange an image double click it Scale e You can select the location and direction horizontal or vertical of scales e Set the scale properties including the number of tick marks small or large ticks and tick intervals 55 e Set the appearance of the scale with the color options e You can create a table with the scale Text e Draw a text box on the screen and then enter text in the text input box e Toinsert text from a text table click the check box next to From Text Table and then select TextTable 4 When you are finished specifying figure properties click OK ees e The default size for figures varies by figure type e To draw a figure from the center point click the figure and then click Edit gt First Point As Center on the toolbar e You can apply 28 types of textures for figures except for line polyline image scale and text figures The texture option is not supported by XP30 BTA panels e The textures displayed by an XGT panel may differ slightly from their appearances in XP Builder LSiIs 56 2 3 4 2 Drawing Objects You can draw objects such as switches windows parts and graphs These objects are the most important components for operating a control system based on devi
273. f you selected the word condition type specify a word device Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Size 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal or BCD Click to designate the expression as conditional Use Lamp Offset Click to set an offset for the lamp e Action Condition The action condition settings for special switch objects include the following Special Switch General WM Use Action Condition Extended T e Detail pa Lamp Condition BtOn f Bit Of C Range Multi Bit Device Device e EEE Range size Type Unsigned DEC 0 NOP 0 Multi Bit No of Bit bees Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specified Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multiple e devices is met Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open th
274. fect data throughout the entire project The project ID has been deleted on the panel due to a communication error and therefore the project IDs cannot be compared between your computer and the panel e Project files are stored in the GENERAL folder except for BTE models where it is stored in the BTE folder On the XGT Panel you can view the file version on an XGT Panel by accessing the update menu and selecting the Displaying XGT Panel File Version option e Ifthe transfer is unsuccessful it may be due to different runtime versions between XP Builder and the XGT Panel Update the runtime file on the panel to match XP Builder and try the transfer again 2 6 1 1 Using a Serial RS 232C Connection A serial connection provides a 1 1 communication method between the control device and a computer A 6 pin cable is required to make a serial connection but this cable is not provided with the XGT Panel ee d Transfer failure errors can occur if the serial cable is not securely connected to the back of the XGT Panel s TOOL port Transfers can also be affected by proximity to devices that emit large amounts of noise such as high voltage switches or motors Ensure that the cable is securely connected and that it is shielded or placed away from devices that may cause interference 128 129 LSIs To use a serial connection 1 Connect the serial cable to the TOOL port on the XGT Panel and RS 232C port ona computer 2 On
275. fer a project using ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center Windows Vista and Windows 7 two possible causes exist for this situation e The wrong type of cable is connected or the cable is not connected properly Ensure that the cable is securely connected to the mini USB port on the XGT Panel and that the driver is up to date If necessary update the driver from the Device Manager in Windows e ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center is not installed properly These applications are installed automatically when you install XP Builder on your computer If you encounter problems reinstall the appropriate application from the Microsoft Mobile Device Center website 3 4 17 Cannot Update an XGT Panel An error occurs when you try to update an XGT Panel s software while it is not in update mode On the XGT Panel touch and hold the screen to open the menu and then select Update HMI Engine Then try again 3 4 18 I Cannot Receive a Project from an XGT Panel Two possible causes exist for this situation e The connection settings are incorrect Ensure that you have selected the correct type of XGT Panel and connection method For more information refer to lt 2 6 1 Transferring to an XGT Panel gt e No project exists on the XGT Panel In this case you cannot upload a project from the XGT Panel The Include Upload Project File option must be selected when transferring projects to the XGT Panel in order to extract the project late
276. ff Range The action is performed when the value falls within the E aeda R Molti Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result BN amesema Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you select the range condition specify the range Size 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Click to designate the expression as conditional Molti Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 300 4 3 2 4 Special Switch This switch is for carrying out key code alarm logging printing language switching script operation and other storage related actions This section describes available settings for special switch objects e Basic The basic settings for special switch objects include the following You can select the function for the special switch and set the properties in the Special Switch Function settings Special Switch Function i nee El Special Switch Function a E E History Alarm Viewer Check All Alarm Data in Alarm Viewer Check Selected Alarm Data in Alarm Views Delete Alarm Data in Alarm Viewer Page Delete All Occurence No Delete Recovered All
277. file avi saved in the storage device is displayed If the playback is stopped the latest file is played e Camera input display The video from a connected camera is displayed e Camera capture file display The video capture image jpg from a storage device is displayed Note Only TTM series panels support the movie player function with the special switch object iXP70 TTM iXP80 TTM and iXPgo0 TTM If you attempt to use the movie player function with other panels an error may occur Recipe File Recipe Manager e Set to transfer recipe data from the PLC to the XGT and Transfer Panel or vice versa when the switch is activated Method Description Transfer from PLC gt XP The recipe data in the controlle is transferred to the file recipe editor of XGT Panel Transfer XP gt PLC The recipe data in the file recip manager is transferred to the controller e Set to move to the specified area of the file recipe data when the switch is activated e You can also set to show the specific data in the file recipe editor when the switch is activated General Recipe Set to view selected recipe data when the switch is Manager activated or to select a transfer method NVRAM gt PLC Transfer backed up data from LSis 310 PLC gt NVRAM NVRAM gt Internal Device Internal Device gt NVRAM Internal Device gt NVRAM to the PLC If you tap the special switch the data is transferred vi
278. frequency of devices b Logging Area Size Calculate the size of the area required to save logging data e Bit 16 Header Information 8 Fixed size for saving bit Frequency 1 e Word 16 2 Device size Frequency 1 e Double word 16 4 Device size Frequency 1 LSis 198 4 Reference To set an external location for backing up log data 1 Click Common Project Property Setting gt Storage Settings Summary XGT Panel Settings Screen Settings Security Settings Key Window Settings Language Global Script Settings Aundliary Settings Extended Controller Settings Image ties Hash memory Upload project file Flash memory Sound files Fash memory Y SRAM memor Notused IT Delete old file if diek ful Notused 7 Delete old file if disk ful Notused I Delete old file if disk full Notused x I Delete old file if disk ful Notused 7 Delete old file if disk ful Notused I Delete old file if disk ful Video capture image Not used 7 Delete old file if disk full 2 Set the storage location in Logging data To specify the format for backup data 1 Inthe Project pane double click Logging 2 Double click a log entry to open the Logging window 199 LSIs a 4 Reference 3 Click Backup Area Buffer Manage Backup CSV Format Backup AreaButter Manage Backup CSV Format Storage for backup data Backup device
279. g unspecified all data up to 255 characters will be transferred from the bar code reader Save Data In Select a location for saving barcode data Data Storage Enter the first device to receive data from the bar code Read Complete Device Turn on the assigned device when data read from the bar code has been saved Baud Rate Set the RS 232C communication parameters to match the Data Bits bar code reader LSis 36 Flow Control adie Note P Stop Bit s The baud rate must match the setting in the XGT Panel To change the baud rate on the XGT Panel touch and hold the screen to access the menu Then touch Setting gt PC Conn Setting For iXP series XGT Panels the IP address is set by default To use the video option click the check box next to Use Video For more detail about the video option refer to lt 4 3 19 Movie Player Object gt You can set the video save options Max file size Max save time Recording trigger device Event recording trigger device Event recording time Before fis Second Stop device of event recording standby kai EE If event recording standby you can not play video files Using this device you can stop the event recording standby Save Settings Description Max File Size Set the maximum size for video files a 512 MB Max Save Time Set the maximum length for videos 5 3600 seconds 1 hour Recording Trigger Set a bit device to
280. ge Your Windows operating system may not be configured to support the language you are using in the project In this case you must add the language support from the Control Panel in Windows 3 4 7 Cannot Invoke Text from a File Three possible causes exist for this situation e The file is in use Ensure that the file is not being used by another or programs or users and try again e The file structure does not match the structure defined in XP Builder Open the file with an editor such as MS Excel and correct the file structure Then try again e The editing language set in XP Builder is different from the language in the file Ensure that the correct language is specified in XP Builder and try again 3 4 8 The Name of a History Alarm Changes When I Copy and Paste It History alarms cannot have redundant names If you copy and paste a history alarm XP Builder gives it a unique name automatically You can edit the name after pasting the alarm 3 4 9 I Cannot Edit the System Alarm The system alarm contains information from the XGT Panel and cannot be edited 3 4 10 I Cannot Import a Log or Schedule A maximum of 32 logs and schedules can be stored If you attempt to exceed the limit an error message will appear Delete a log or schedule and try again 3 4 11 Cannot Invoke a Tag froma Tag Table Three possible causes exist for this situation e The file is in use Ensure that the file is not being used by another or pr
281. ge specified SCRIPT An the variable to a temporary variable to display a unexpected result might occur result without writing it in the standard device 2013 There is no history alarm of The history alarm list in a special switch or multi which the printing has been set switch has been deleted Specify another history alarm list 2014 If the number of rows is XX and The number of rows and lines you set exceed the number of lines is YY the maximum device range Set the number of rows maximum device range is and lines to fall within the maximum device range exceeded 2015 Device XX is read only You have set a read only device where a write device is required Specify a write device for the object 2016 Lamp condition you wrote does The specified condition for a word lamp does not not exist Default condition will exist Add a condition for the word lamp apply 2017 The key pad location exceeds The key window location is outside the screen area dimensions of the window boundaries Change the window location to fit within the window boundaries 2018 The logging number does not The specified logging group does not exist exist Register the logging group in the logging properties 2019 Check whether there is another Two objects have the same automatic cursor and object whose cursor input group ID and Input order Number are the same as the object input order numbers Change the automatic cursor and input order
282. ght Setting Touch Setting Ch DateTime Setting IP Infomation IP Address 150 150 150 150 Set fiso 150 32 ji2c Subnet Mask 150 150 150 150 Set 9 ENT Gateway O00 000 000 000 4 5 6 MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 DEL oo If you select Disable the XGT Panel will not use the Ethernet connection and booting speed will be fast If the Ethernet connection has been disabled touch Enable to resume the connection me The following settings are recommended when connecting via 1 1 connection e XGT Panel settings IP Address 192 168 0 10 LSis 560 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 192 168 0 1 e PCsettings IP Address 192 168 0 11 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 192 168 0 1 5 1 6 XP Remote settings Adjust the settings for XP Remote to control the XGT Panel remotely 1 Touch XP Remote Setting System Configuration H Backlight Setting H Touch Setting Ch DateTime Setting 561 LSIs 2 Specify the options as shown below P Remote Settings Allow P Remote to connect Max of XP Remote connections 4 Timeout value 10 second 2 e Allow XP Remote to Connect Select this to allow a remote terminal to connect to XR Remote Max number of XP Remote Connections Select the maximum number of XP Remote connections that have access to the XGT Panel Timeout Value 10 second Select the time limit to end the connect
283. gt Cursor Mur Value T Device Constant Line Color Line Type Constant 10 m OO0000 Solid Use Reference Set whether or not to use a reference line in the graph e Num of Reference Line Set how many reference lines to use Setting property of reference line When you set to use a reference line the properties window appears 466 e Cursor The cursor settings for logging trend graph object include the following Graph Legging Trend q General Cursor B Use Cursor Display Reference Line m Extended Color Line Type Cursor Specify the following options for the cursor e Use Cursor Set whether or not to display the cursor on the XGT screen as illustrated below Logging Trigger 467 e Storage Cursor Information Set whether or not to save cursor data logging time of the current cursor position and related values Cursor data is saved at device and the size of the device is always 32 bit The cursor information is saved as follows based on the device set lt Logging device size 16bit gt 31 16 8 0 es 16bit data index 1 16bit data index The maximum number of logging groups 20 Saved in the lower 16bit lt Logging device size 32bit gt 3 16 8 we a e ata Index The maximum number of logging groups 20 0 Data Index n Saved at 32bit The cursor information is saved in the specified device whenever th
284. gt and lt Term 2 gt are false ando otherwise l I lt Term gt Provides 1 if lt Term gt is o and otherwise o e Relational Operators lt lt Term 1 gt lt lt Term 2 gt Provides 1 if lt Term 1 gt is smaller than lt Term 2 gt and otherwise o lt lt Term 1 gt lt lt Term 2 gt Provides 1 if lt Term 1 gt is smaller than or equal to lt Term 2 gt and otherwise o gt lt Term 1 gt gt lt Term 2 gt Provides 1 if lt Term 1 gt is larger than lt Term 2 gt and otherwise o gt lt Term 1 gt gt lt Term 2 gt Provides 1 if lt Term 1 gt is larger than or equal to lt Term 2 gt and Command Expression a Description otherwise o i lt Term 1 gt lt Term 2 gt Provides 1 if lt Term 1 gt is not equal to lt Term 2 gt and otherwise o lt Term 1 gt lt Term 2 gt Provides 1 if lt Term 1 gt is equal to lt Term 2 gt and otherwise o e Mathematical Operators lt Term gt lt factor gt Adds lt Term gt to lt factor gt 2 lt Term gt lt factor gt Subtracts lt factor gt from lt Term gt lt Term gt lt factor gt Multiplies lt Term gt by lt factor gt I lt Term gt lt factor gt Divides lt Term gt by lt factor gt lt Term gt lt factor gt Divides lt Term gt by lt factor gt and takes the residual e Bit Operators amp lt Term gt amp lt factor gt Performs the b
285. h he Sh ee ee Sh ee Sh ee ee Sh ee ee Sh ee ee Sh ee re Sh ee ee Sh he Sh ee ee Sh he Sh ee ee Sh ee Sh ee ee Sh tekh Sh ee e Sh ee oh ee ee Sh ee ee Ro i ee ee e ch ee fn se sesh rhea hahahaha ap apap act act act E S r A E A n S E A An r A n E S E A S E S E n ea E hahahahaha hay Pap SE apap tap M S E S E E S E E S E Ba EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE EEEE EELEE EEEE aaah lt 7 m fe a ae aA Ey ia rF T nh ut i i oo E t wi wi wi oo hy i i us T nh i us i 7 ni nh Hy i ut om hy ut ut ut Ty hh ut Hy ut Ty nh us ut us T ni H ut ut us ae re ut ut ut ae nh us us ut Ty a re hy ut us ase Et t r nF hy 7 a ie nF F rF ET T a re tt Dae 612 5 7 2 2 Mounting XGT Panel Ensure that there is 100mm clearance around all sides of the panel to prevent electromagnetic interference or heat from other equipment installed nearby When you mount the XGT Panel inside a panel consider access for power and communication wiring 100 L If the size of the panel cutout dimensions are beyond the error range o 1mm the contact surface between the gasket and the panel may be re
286. he off state or vice versa Delete On Off Caption Click to clear text settings for the current state Font Select a font from the drop down list Size Set a text size from the drop down list or enter a value directly into the field Width Ratio Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop down list or entering a value directly in to the field You can set a ratio of 1 600 Change the Property of Text Table Click to use different color and font properties for the text than what is specified in the text table This option is active only when you import text from the text table Color Seta font color Font Style Set a font style bold italic strikeout or underline You can apply more than one option at atime Horizontal Alignment Set the horizontal alignment Left Center or Right Vertical Alignment Set the vertical alignment Top Middle or Bottom 328 e Detail The detail settings for multi switch objects include the following MulttAction Switch General iw Security Level j Extended n Level 1 Lamp Condition M Action Delay Action Condition On Delay Security Level Set whether or not to require a password to use the object Level Set the security level for the object The higher the security level the shorter the authorization time when the password is entered When the authorization time expires the user must enter the pa
287. he base window so that the base window can still be seen 392 393 Placement Set the location where the new window will appear on the screen Top Left Center Top Right Bottom Right or Bottom Left For example if you set the location to Top Left the window will appear in the upper left corner of the object Target x Output Progress lt Window gt Target Output Progress lt E g Top Left gt ees e Ifthe input window area exceeds the borders of the basic window it is not displayed in the XGT Panel In this case the project download will not start If the window object area partially extends beyond the right or bottom of the basic window the portion of the object that is inside the borders will be displayed Bit window pa l l l l l l l SE l l l l eee l lt The top or left side is out gt lt The right or bottom side is out gt e There are two ways to close the bit window when the condition is met 1 Convert the reference device status 2 For a Pop up window click the close button The device status is converted automatically If the windows overlap the close button is not displayed e The placement points for Window and Part objects are as follows Object Placement Point Window Object The start point of the edited window screen Part Object The start point where the parts are drawn in the edited part screen Description Enter a description f
288. he device value only for line paths Description Enter a description for the object 406 e Detail The detail settings for text bit part objects include the following General Extended d Device Display Trigge W Ofset Offset Click the checkbox to use the offset function You can offset the device address based on the value of the offset device For example if the starting device address is P100 XP Builder reads the value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value If the offset value is 10 for example then the referenced device address is P110 Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary 407 e Display Trigger The display trigger settings for bit part objects include the following General W Use Action Condition q Extended Ten Detail wae E Display Trigger Bit On Bit Off Range Multi Bit Device Device Range Size 16bits Type Unsigned DEC o NOP 0 Multi Bit No of Bit Device 1 E Setna Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on Bit Bito The action is The action is performed when the de
289. he directory will then be deleted 5 6 3 3 ActiveSync Related Actions e When ActiveSync is connected no other actions are completed If the files in the storage unit are deleted or moved after ActiveSync is connected these changes would not be made e When ActiveSync is disconnected the list of saved video files and video captured files will be refreshed While the list of video files is refreshed recording or playing files cannot be completed File creation requests will be monitored with a status device 5 6 3 4 When a Storage Device Is Removed When a storage device is connected all of the video file and the video captured files are scanned and the number of files will be counted and listed While the files are scanned recording or playing cannot be started File creation requests will be monitored with a status device 604 5 Managing an XGT Panel 5 6 4 Monitoring External Storage Connection XGT Panel monitors connections with external storage devices Storage monitoring is set up in XP Builder as shown below Summary XGT Panel Settings Screen Settings Security Settings Key Window Settings Storage Settings Global Script Settings Auwdliary Settings Extended Controller Settings Destination Storage Image files Flash memory Upload project file Fash memory Sound files Hash memory SRAM memory Not used T Delete old file if disk full Notused 7 Delete old file if disk ful
290. he following values o Steady State Set a steady state 1 Shut down The program was shut down normally 2 Memory error A stack address value was not properly read or written 3 Direct Variable Memory error A direct variable address was not properly read or written 4 Temporary Variable Memory error A temporary variable address was not properly read or written 5 Internal Function Processing An internal function in XP Builder did not perform correctly 6 Data error A variable data value is invalid use for debugging 7 Invalid Data A data value is invalid when writing for variables use for debugging 8 Divide by o Error Illegal operation division by zero 9 Opcode Error Invalid opcode 10 Arrangement Subscript An arrangement subscript exceeds the max size Excess 11 Range Excess Not used 12 Function Error Not used 13 Semi Error Not used 14 Watchdog Time Error The watchdog time has been exceeded 15 Duplication Function Number Error 10 More than 10 scripts called 16 Dead lock State Not used 17 Memory Error An attempt was made to reference something outside of the global variable area g_DataBuffer 18 Memory Error The pointer s memory exceeds the range of the assigned variable 19 Memory Error The pointer s class is incorrect available only for global variables or stack
291. he image to display for On or Off status from raster vector or user registered images Same Image amp Change Select a vector image You cannot select a raster Color Pattern in On Off image Apply a pattern or color to the image Library Click to select an image from the library In the library list image categories are distinguished by the ends of their names The vector image 325 category ends with _V and the raster image category ends with _R Patterns can be applied only to the images Open Click to browse for images on your computer When you select an image from your computer it will be added to the image library automatically Pattern Click a pattern to apply to the image This option is available only when you select the change color or pattern option in Image Type Patterns are applied to specific parts of objects but not to the frames The frames are different for each image Refer the following examples Pattern Frame Pattern Frame Pattern Frame Pattern FG Color Set a color for the foreground pattern Pattern BG Color Set a color for the background pattern Frame Color Seta frame color LSis 326 e Text The text settings for multi switch objects include the following Mulcuon Switch
292. he other hand if it is less than warning upper bound it is displayed as lower bound line color Max Dot You can set the color of a dot to be applied when it is more or Min Dot less than the warning upper bound of logging distribution graph If the device value exceeds warning upper bound it is displayed as upper bound dot color On the other hand if it is less than warning upper bound it is displayed as lower bound dot color 487 e Display The display settings for the realtime scatter graph object include the following Real Time Scatter 4 General Transparent BG Frame Display Basic Max Min Transparent Border Border Color No of Display Data Line and Det sanaa E Alarm The amp Y Scatter is not setted g 4 i Plate Color Starting point Location Library Open Scale No of Horizontal Point 3 ands Height 16 Scale Color No of Vertical Point 3 1 y axis Width 16 E Library Click to select a background image for the graph from a library Open Click to locate background image for the graph on your computer Transparent BG Set whether or not to make the background of the graph transparent Transparent Border Set whether or not to use a transparent border No of Display data It fixes the number of dots to be displayed at a screen e X Y Scatter indicates a dot as two device values e Y Scatter indicates respectively each device va
293. his option the rows are displayed with the default color set in the Plate Color option from the Basic setting 494 e Restoration Text Color Set a text color for rows of restored alarms If you don t set this option the rows are displayed with the default color set in the Color option from the Text setting eH e Message Frequency 2010 0419 alarm 1 Groupi 2010 04 19 2010 0419 alarm 2 Groupi 2010 0449 alarm 4 Groupi 2070 0449 2010 04 19 alarm 3 Groupi 2010 04 19 alarm 5 Group F F r lt All occured alarms gt a 2010 04 19 alarm 3 Gro aaa 2010 04 19 alarm 2 Group 2010 0419 alarm 4 Group lt Different colored alarms gt Header Edit Set additional header options e From Text Table in Header Edit Set to import header labels from a text table When you set this option the Title row is shown Double click the title area to select the appropriate text string from a text table Header Edit iW From TextTable in Header Edit No of fiedref val J Fit to a max header length _ _f YY MMS et MM D D 495 e No of fixed ref val Set the number of reference value rows to show at one time on the XGT Panel display To see additional rows use the History Alarm Row Scroll function provided by a Special Switch For example if you set the options as follows Header Edit From Text Table in Header Edit O re re r e a a Frequency ell s 04 00 AULS04700 20
294. how File Dialog at Start Set whether or not to show the Select Project window Up when you launch XP Builder Recent Files Set the maximum number of recent files to show Auto Save Set whether or not to save project files automatically Interval Set how often XP Builder will automatically save project files Show Property Dialogon Set to show the properties window when you create a New Figure Object new figure or object Show Warning On Data Set whether or not to show a warning message and list of Check or Script Check errors in the following instances If you do not use this LS IS 44 45 option only the warning message will appear e When you run a data check Tool gt Data Check e When you download a project file to an XGT Panel e When you run a script check Tool gt Script Check 2 3 Developing an Interface You can use different types of windows when creating a project and draw or insert figures objects and graphics on windows The following table describes available window types Base Screen The main area for drawing and editing a project The window size varies by panel model To insert pop up windows or part windows drag and drop them onto the base window Window Screen Windows that pop up on the base window A project can support up to 65 534 windows but windows 65 531 65 534 are reserved for system key information You can insert figures and obje
295. ic Library 2 Right click an image 3 Click As Background Image Delete Image fofillbackO Rename Replace Image ate Image Info fofillback10 fofil Save As File Apply Transparent Color sE vee Select Transparent Color BAe WEES Dither Image to 256 Colors fofillbackl2 _fofilibackIS fofillbackl4 fofillback15 EEEE For more information about specifying background images refer to lt 2 3 2 4 Changing Screen Properties gt To remove a background image 1 Right click the image that is currently set as the background image 2 Click Screen Property gt Background Category General z Local Script Setting Etc LS Is 86 3 Clear the checkbox next to Use BG Image Category General Z Local Script Setting Etc 4 Click OK 2 3 6 4 Managing Image Libraries Learn how to manage image libraries Both the system and user image libraries can be managed but only the user image library can be edited System Graphic Library About 1 000 images in 26 categories are included in the System Graphic Library This library cannot be edited You can select raster 256 color or vector 65 535 color images depending on the color capabilities of the XGT Panels you are using The following table describes characteristics of raster and vector images Raster Displayed in pixels as a bitmap image Distorts when you zoom in or out If used as a background
296. id Tahoma hd e Bold taice Strikeout Underline Horizontal Alignment Left Center Right Font Select a font from the drop down list Size Set a text size from the drop down list or enter a value directly into the field Color Set a font color Font Style Set a font style bold italic strikeout or underline You can apply more than one option at a time Horizontal Alignment Set the horizontal alignment Left Center or Right 903 4 Reference e Case The case settings for data list object include the following General Basic Display Case List Angna Text E Extended Case List Create delete or reorganize conditional expressions Create Click to create a new range condition You can create up to eight conditions Clicking this button opens the Range Edit window which allows you to create a condition For more information refer to lt 4 2 1 3 Understanding Constants and Data Types gt x Delete Click a condition and then click this icon to delete the condition a Up Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higher in the list Down Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lower in the list LSis 504 M Use Action Condition Type Bit On Bt OF Multi Bit Device Type Unsigned DEC fo NOP 0 Exp Multi Bit No of Bit Device 1 a Setting Use Action Condition Set wh
297. iew the error history Information Contents PLE system properly shut PLC system properly shut Module detach error Module detach error PLC system properly shut PLC system properly shut Module detach error Module detach error e Controllers that can view this option are GLOFA GM CPU FEnet Cnet XGK XGB XGI XGR CPU FEnet Cnet e The MASTER K CPU model does not have the error history option LSis 580 581 LSIs e Mode You can review the run and stop history of LSIS controllers Information Lontents Remote Stop Remote Run Remote Stop Remote stop Remote stop Remote Stop Remote stop Remote Stop e Controllers that can view this option are GLOFA GM CPU FEnet Cnet XGK XGB XGI XGR CPU FEnet Cnet e The MASTER K CPU model does not have the run or stop history option e System You can review the system history of LSIS controllers Information System Contents 2007 01 15 15 02 16 Momently shut down 2007 01 15 15 02 17 Base information error 2007 01 15 15 02 17 Base information error 2007 01 15 15 02 17 Base information error 2007 01 15 15 02 18 Momerntly shut down 2007 01 15 15 02 21 Base information error 2007 01 15 Base information error 2007 01 15 15 02 21 e Controllers that can view this option are GLOFA GM CPU GM4C XGK XGB XGI XGR CPU FEnet Cnet e The MASTER K CPU model does not have the system history option Time Contents F 13 26
298. igned DEC jo NOP 0 Multi Bit No of Bit Device 1 Cancel Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is The action is performed when the device is switched off when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the baal soaaionoil Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result NN Shteeeensne Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you select the range condition specify the range Size 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 442 4 3 8 4 Closed Graph The following sections describe the options available for closed graph objects e Basic The basic settings for closed graph objects include the following Graph Ellipse General Control Device Device Display D Case Size Operation 2 Extended UpperLower Limit Value C Device
299. il Settings Retry count 34 30 100ms Wattosend 0H ms Use XG5000 simulator Program monitor 3 Set the controller manufacturer and the controller model Product Select a product with LINK at the end of the controller name v1 23 Ls s AGK LINK Refer to manual Detail Settings Timeout 30 100ms Watto send ya ms Retry count 3 T Use XG5000 simulator Program monitor e The connection type at the end of the controller name may differ by product e Available protocols may differ by product 4 Select the protocol to RS232C 105 LSIs Development Data bits Flow control Parity Stop bit s The baud rate must match the setting in the XGT Panel To change the baud rate on the XGT Panel touch and hold the screen to access the menu Then touch Setting gt PC Conn Setting For iXP series XGT Panels the IP address is set by default 6 Set the additional connection properties and click OK Storage Settings Global Script Settings Summary l v1 23 Ls s AGK LINK Z Refer to manual n RS232C Detail Settings Timeout 30 100ms Wait to send 0 ms Retry count 3 Use XG5000 simulator Program monitor LSis 106 2 Project Development LSS 2 4 2 2 Using RS485 RS422 1 Click Common P Project Property Setting gt XGT Panel Settings Storage Settings Global Script Settings Audliary Settings Extende
300. ilder XGT Panel Controllers Machines LSIs 2 1 1 2 Supported Hardware Types XP Builder supports XP and iXP series XGT Panels and a wide range of controllers Projects can be transferred from XP Builder only to XGT Panels manufactured by LSIS To view specifications for XGT Panels in XP Builder click Project New Project and then select a series and model number from the drop down lists New Project es Series Model iXPBO TTA x Specifications Screen size 12 1 Inch RS 232C Resolution 800 x 600 Picels z RS 232C R5 422 R5 485 LED TFT Color LED SB 4 Ports Color 65536 Colors On Memory 128 MB On Video input None Maker Product LSIS XGK LINK Communication Settings Conca e The iXP series XGT Panels are supported by XP Builder versions 1 30 or higher e Available memory for XP series XGT Panels is 10MB for TTA models with the exception of the XPgo model 20MB and 4MB for TTE models e Available memory for iXP series XGT Panels is 128MB 1 2 Installing and Updating This section explains how to install and update the XP Builder software as well as the operating system software for an XGT Panel 1 2 1 Installing XP Builder You may install XP Builder on a PC that meets the following minimum system requirements e Processor Pentium 4 or higher e Memory 512MB or more free memory e COM Ports RS 232C serial port Ethernet port or USB port e Hard Disk 1GB capacity or higher e M
301. ilter Set to filter history alarm data and display it with the history alarm viewer object There are five types of filters Occurrence Check Restoration Uncheck and Unrestoration unrestored alarms View the every history alarm data Occurrence occurred View the checked history alarm data Check with the special switch Restoration View the restored history alarm data Example of checked history alarm data Occurrence Message Group Recovery Acknowledge UU 407219 Thankyoul Thank yout 20070719 Thankyou Thank youd c007707719 00019 Thankyous Thank youd CUO A072 19 Thankyoud Thank yout COOP FOF 19 20070719 Thankyous Thank youd Acknowledge eUO7 O19 e0019 SOUR OF 19 Thank youz Thankyou COUR OF19 Thank youd Thankyou History Alarm Viewer Set to scroll history alarm data in the specified direction Line Down when the switch is activated History Alarm Viewer Uccurrence Message Group Recovery Acknowledge Line up z007707719 Thank youl Thank yout History Alarm Viewer 2007707719 Thank yous Thank yout CUO OFF 19 Thank youd Thank yout 20077 07719 Thankyous Thank yout Page Down History Alarm Viewer Page Up ccur rence ess Recovery 4cknowledge 20070719 Thank yous Thank yout 0007719 Thank youd Thankyou 2007707719 Thank yous Thank yout Occurrence No of Set to show the number of alarms that have been Selected Alarm triggered when the switch is activated Print
302. image in an object the pattern and color cannot be changed File names include the suffix _R Vector Expressed by connected lines Not distorted when you zoom in or out If used as a background image in an object 87 LSIS Development the pattern or color can be changed e File names include the suffix _V User Graphic Library You can register or delete images The images are saved in the current project and not in the XP Builder program You can import a User Graphic Library from another project or export it from the current project to use in other projects To open the Graphic Library pane click View Graphic Library The Graphic Library pane and the Graphic List will appear as shown in the following image gf ANIMATION gl BASIC_CIRCLE BASIC_RECTANGLE 7 BASIC_SQUARE lg INDICATOR 256 R Graphic Library pane E INDICATOR R fa PATTERN_R gg PIPE_256_R P PUSHDOWN_256_R P PUSHDOWN_R P PUSHDOWN_V wf ROTARY_R nf ROTARY_V gf SAMPLETEST Gis 3 Ga Da hi f RAB Ce ict assembly_ compressor conveyer_b 3 Graphic list e of Engine Engine_2 S Engine_4 Factory LSis 88 2 Project Development You can create your own user image library To create a library 1 Inthe Graphic Library pane right click Library Create Graphic Library Import Graphic Library os F i Wia J BASIC SQUARE INDICATO
303. in of Dev Value 0 Pan Min of Inp Value 0 Max of Dev Value 10 Max of Inp Value 10001 Any value above the maximum input value is recognized as the maximum value 1000 the device value becomes 100 Likewise if you enter an input value under o the value is recognized as o and the device value becomes o Above Pe the maximum input Device maximum value Below the minimum input value Device minimum value P a a a e The available device value range and displayable data value range differ by size and type of the device as described in the following table Device Type Minimum Maximum 16bit Signed decimal 32768 32767 LSS 364 365 LSIs Unsigned decimal o 65535 BCD O 9999 32 bit Signed decimal 2147483648 2147483647 Unsigned decimal o 4294967295 BCD O 99999999 e When you input a number the following errors can occur Condition Solution Can t Write When the communication Check the cable connection or Data fails between the the power of XGT Panel controller and XGT Panel Exceeded The When you inputa value that Input an exact value Refer to Maximum exceeds the device size or the available device value Value data limit range e Ifthe device size is changed the existing input condition and display condition are deleted e Ifthe communication with the controllers fails while inputting or reading the data only the background image is displayed on the
304. in the scale Set the color of the scales e Case The case settings for bar graph object include the following General Basic Display gt Operation Case List Create delete or reorganize conditional expressions Create Click to create a new range condition You can create up to eight conditions Clicking this button opens the Range Edit window which allows you to create a condition For more information refer to lt 4 2 1 3 Understanding Constants and DataTypes gt Delete Click a condition and then click this icon to delete the condition a Up Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higher in the list Down Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lower in the list LSis 424 4 Reference e Operation The operation settings for bar graph object include the following General W Use Script Basic Script Use Script Click the checkbox to use a Script with the object Select Script Select a script from the drop down list Script When you select a script it appears here To modify a script refer to lt 4 2 Scripts gt 425 LSIs o e Detail The detail settings for bar graph object include the following EI General C Offset Extended plete D gt E d Detail LIEVICE F Display Trigge Offset Click the checkbox to use the offset function You can offset the device address based on the value of the off
305. ing picture experts group PC personal computer PDF portable document format PIN personal identification number PIR passive infrared PLC programmable logic controller Q output OB bit output QCIF quarter common intermediate format OVGA quarter video graphics OW word output RAM random access memory RGB red green blue ROM read only memory S W software SD secure digital SDK software development kit SMTP simple mail transfer protocol SRAM static random access memory TCP transmission control protocol TIFF tagged image file format UDP user datagram protocol 625 LSIs List of Acronyms Ul user interface URL uniform resource locator USB Universal serial bus VGA video graphics array VM virtual memory VSP virtual serial port WAN wide area network LSIs 626 627 Read this manual carefully before installing wiring operating servicing or inspecting this equipment After reading the information keep this manual within easy reach for quick reference The following illustrations on the product and in the manual represent situations where you should use caution Caution Wiring and Installation Disconnect all power supplies to the HMI before making wiring connections Failure to do so may result in electric shock or damage to the product Verify each component s rated voltage and terminal layout before making wiring connections Failure to do so may result in electric shock or damage to th
306. inting capturing screens displaying flow alarms sending email alerts displaying system alarms and displaying communication errors Extended Controller Settings Settings for barcode readers 2 2 2 1 Changing Basic Project Properties The Summary tab in the Project Property window contains basic information such as the project name file path author creation date modification date last download date version and project description To change basic project properties edit the information in the appropriate field and click OK Project Prop Storage Settings Global Script Settings Audliary Settings Extended Controller Settings Summary XGT Panel Settings Screen Settings Security Settings Key Window Settings Language Project name aa File path C WuserswhsWDesktopWaaxpd Created 03 12 13 17 56 30 Modified 03 12 13 17 56 31 Downloaded Version 1 300000 ox caa Description Project The project name does not have to match the file name The file name Name you specify will appear at the top of the project tree in the Project pane File Path The location of the project file this cannot be edited Author The creator of the file Description A description of the project Created The date the file was first created this cannot be edited Modified The date the file was last modified this cannot be edited Downloaded The date the project was la
307. ion when there has been no communication within a specific time If XP Remote has control authority the value can be adjusted between 10 300 sec LSis 962 5 1 7 Sound settings This section outlines the adjustments to volume that can be made 1 Touch Sound Setting System Configuration P Backlight Setting Touch Setting Ch DateTime Setting H Ernviranment Setting Sound volume y1 T Input source Line in C7 MIC Line in MIC bypass to speaker Sound Volume Adjusts the volume Input Source Select the sound input type either Line in or MIC This function is only supported by XGT Panels that support multimedia Line In MIC Bypass Sound input is directed to connected speakers This function is only to Speaker supported by XGT Panels that support multimedia 563 LSIS 2 e Microphones without a power source for example combined ear and microphone devices cannot input sound e Line out sound recorded from the speakers without volume or amplification control may be affected by interference e This option is available only with iXP series 5 1 8 Buzzer settings Set the buzzer s sound level 1 Touch Buzzer Setting System Configuration Ch DateTime Setting H Envranment Setting Ethemet Setting H xF Remote Setting P Sound Setting Burzer Setting Oh Gote MainMenu LSiIs 564 5 Managing an XGT Panel 2 Specify the optio
308. ious Screen Q Next Screen W Export Font Install Font creen 2 Specify the data to find in the pop up window Find Device Find what 3 Specify matching and direction options as desired 4 Click Find Next to find the next instance of the data LSiIs 236 4 Reference To replace part of a script 1 With the script tab open in the editing area click Tool Replace in Active Screen View Common Tool Communication Window Toolbox Help B ft EA a atl Data Check V fe Script Check Find All Script B Register object caption to TextTable automtically Previous Screen Q Next Screen W Export Font Install Font i Word D Poooo1 ID poo003 3 Specify matching options as desired 4 Click Replace to replace data instances one at a time or you can click Replace All to replace all data instances that match your search at once 237 LSIs a To move to a specific line in the script 1 With the script tab open right click on the script editing area 2 Click Goto E 7 COpyngnt cy 2004 2005 2 ff All nghts reserved S ff istus http www ISIS DIZ a lt Cut Cor x 6 Copy Ctrl C 3 Paste Ctrl S s Member List 10 Insert Remove Breakpoint 11 12 Outline 13 v Enable Outlining Auto Outlining Line Number 3 Enter a line number and click Goto Notes e You can use the Find Replace All function from the Tool menu to locat
309. ipe e While reading backup data from the XP server through an XP Link connection e While browsing backup lists to upload from XP Builder e While loading a sound file or an image that belongs to a project e While transferring project backup data to a storage device or from XP Builder e While downloading a project using XP Builder or a storage device e While changing an image in the start menu While ladder program monitoring is being saved in a storage device Function Sub Classification Action Data Backup Alarm Writing Logging Writing Recipe Writing Screen Writing Memo Writing Sub Classification Action Video Writing Still Shot Writing Data Upload Alarm Reading Logging Reading Recipe Reading Screen Reading Memo Reading Video Reading Still Shot Reading Data by Function Part Image Reading Edit File Recipe Reading Writing Send File Recipe Reading Writing Web Server Create Webpage Writing Sending XP Link File Reading Inquire file list Reading Project Upload Project Backup Reading Communication Project Backup Storage Writing Download Project Image Writing Sound Writing Project Backup Writing Ladder Monitor Download Writing Execute Reading Change Start Menu Image Reading Project Data Reading Download Storage LSiIs 608 5 7 Installing and Wiring 5 7 1 Installing an XGT Panel Prior to installing the XGT Panel ch
310. iption Set the default color for device and object IDs The Color setting is applied immediately Background Set a semi transparent background for device or object AlphaBlend Use IDs The setting is applied immediately Object ID Address Font Size Set the default font size for device and object IDs The setting is applied immediately Default Text Color of Figure Object D Set the default font color for character strings in figures or objects The setting is applied when you create new figures or objects Default Line Color of Figure Object Set the default line color for character strings in figures or objects The setting is applied when you create new figures or objects Use Background Color from New Screen Set a background color to use for new windows The setting is applied when you create a new window Default BG Color from Select the default background color The setting is New Screen applied when you create a new window Screen Limit Check on Prevent figures and objects from extending beyond the Object Figure s Editing boundaries of the editing area The setting is applied immediately 2 2 3 2 Changing default project options To edit project management properties click Tool gt Option Project Edit Option esl I Show Property Dialog on New Figure Object I Show Waming On Data Check or Script Check Apply S
311. iption for the object e Display Trigger The display trigger settings for the memo pad object include the following Size bits Type Unsigned DEC Jo NOP 0 Exp Multi Bit No of Bit Device 1 r Setting Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off ae Cia Range The action is performed when the value falls within the Opto OAS Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of BN apamama o LSis 534 935 Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you select the range condition specify the range Constants are based on device size Size 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 4 3 19 Movie Player Object This section describes available settings for movie player object This object is available only with TTM series XGT Pa
312. is changed according to the data type Description Enter a description for the recipe No of Device Set number of devices Recipe data will be transferred consecutively from as many devices as you specify Block count Set the number of data blocks A file recipe has only 1 block and it cannot be edited a Device View the device list Recipes use consecutive data so you cannot set each device address b Data The block number is assigned stating from o and you cannot change it If you reduce the block number the oldest data is deleted first LSis 206 207 4 1 5 Flow Alarms You can use flow alarms to display text at the bottom of a window in the XGT Panel when the specified condition is met as shown in the following figure Thank youl To create a flow alarm 1 Inthe Project pane double click Flow Alarm 2 Specify the following properties Flow Alarm Settings Flow Alarm Option Device count 2 o No of alarm occurred D 4 Flow speed j2 ms Alarm Device Continuous Back ground color L JIH Move pixel 1 Pixel Single Message position Bottom of screen w Fontsize 8 Display Mode Redraw atoccurred After current display list Nof Device Data Type Bit Condition TextT able Name Text Index Preview ae BIT On Off Text Table_01 On CO Off Device Count Set the number of alarm devices to monitor Alarm Device Set a range contin
313. isplay for On or Off status from raster vector or user registered images Same Image amp Change Select a vector image You cannot select a raster Color Pattern in On Off image Apply a pattern or color to the image 2 3 Library Click to select an image from the library In the library list image categories are distinguished by the ends of their names The vector image category ends with _V and the raster image category ends with _R Patterns can be applied only to the images Open Click to browse for images on your computer When you select an image from your computer it will be added to the image library automatically Pattern Click a pattern to apply to the image This option is available only when you select the change color or pattern option in Image Type Patterns are applied to specific parts of objects but not to the frames The frames are different for each image Refer the following examples BEELER EE E M E E M Pattern Frame Pattern Frame Pattern EEEL EEE fi f Frame ee EIT ies Pattern40 Pattern FG Color Set a color for the foreground pattern Pattern BG Color Set a color for the background pattern Frame Color Seta frame color LSiIs 274 e Text Settings The text settings for word lamp objects include the following N State Lamp General R Use Caption From Text Table Basi a State A Display Delete Caption Fot Tahoma bi
314. isplay up to 64 If the number of digits is less than the capacity of the device empty spaces are filled with placeholders If the device value N M oe n cannot be displayed in BCD format it is expressed as If you have selected right justification select this option to insert zeroes 0 before the number Set how many places to put to the right of the decimal point when you select formats other than binary octal and hexadecimal numbers Header Edit Click column headers to select text strings from a text table e From Text Table in Header Edit Set to import header labels from a text table Click a column header to select the appropriate text enna from a text table Header Edit From Text Table in Header Edit W Display the Number Fit to a max header length SS No of Nerimal 4 esl o Tom mee al From lt Text Table _01 Langui ri e Display the Number Set to show logging numbers with respect to logging data Header Edit M From Text Table in Header Edit M Display the Number IW Fit to a max header length SS S SS When you set this option you can edit the header for the Number option e Fit toa max header length Set to fit the longest header length when you use the text table to input header titles If you don t set this option the header length changes whenever the runtime language is change
315. it operation AND of lt Term gt and lt factor gt lt Term gt lt factor gt Performs the bit operation OR of lt Term gt or lt factor gt lt bit gt Reverses the lt bit gt value lt Term gt lt factor gt Performs the bit operation EOR of lt Term gt or lt factor gt lt lt lt Term gt lt lt lt factor gt Shifts lt Term gt to the left by the value of lt factor gt gt gt lt Term gt gt gt lt factor gt Shifts lt Term gt to the right by the value of lt factor gt e Assignment Operators lt Device gt lt term gt Assigns the value of lt term gt to lt Device gt lt Device gt lt term gt Adds lt term gt to lt Device gt and assigns the value of the result of the operation to lt Device gt 222 223 Command Expression lt Device gt lt term gt Description Subtracts lt term gt from lt Device gt and assigns the value of the result of the operation to lt Device gt Pe lt Device gt lt term gt Multiplies lt Device gt by lt term gt and assigns the value of the result of the operation to lt Device gt lt Device gt lt term gt Divides lt Device gt by lt term gt and assigns the value of the result of the operation to lt Device gt lt Device gt lt term gt Divides lt Device gt by lt term gt and takes the residue and then assigns the value
316. it or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 372 4 3 4 3 Text Input You can write the entered texts in the word device in ASCII code This section describes available settings for text input objects e Basic The basic settings for text input objects include the following Text Input General Device Display Display Format Text No of BYTE 4 Extended Use Data Byte Swap Use Cipher Description Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Display Format Set the display format No of BYTE Set the number of characters to display 2 to 64 Use Data Byte Swap Set to change output data into word form Use Cipher Set to encode the numeric value that a user inputs The input value will appear as in the interface Description Enter a description for the object Notes e Spaces are counted in the number of bytes allowed for text input 373 e 16 bit word devices allow entry of double byte characters e The starting address of the specified reference
317. it or 32 bit Changing the data size for an existing object will delete the conditions specified in the case settings Type Select a data type Signed decimal number Unsigned decimal number or BCD Select Message Set the message type Changing the message type for an existing object will delete the conditions specified in the case settings Indirect A value is read from the referenced device to invoke the message from the table 337 4 Reference If the reference device meets the conditions specified in the case settings the message is invoked Description Enter a description for the object e Display The display settings for word message objects include the following General Transparent BG Image g Den y Color oe Opeon nnn Color Extended T E z a a Border tray Oven o IF Library Click to select an image from the library Open Click to browse for images on your computer When you select an image from your computer it will be added to the image library automatically Transparent BG Image Click the checkbox to make the image background transparent You cannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time Frame Color Set a frame color Plate Color Set a plate color Use Border Set whether or not to apply a border to the message area Border Color Set a border color LSis 338 e Text The te
318. it signed Device Enter the device that will activate the sound file Condition Enter a condition for running the sound file Choose On Off for bit devices and enter a condition formula for other types of devices File No Enter the file number of the sound file Play Select a play mode for the sound file mc Play or stop the sound file Size Display the size of the sound file Sound File Enter the sound file name Nores e MP3 files may not play if the sound codec is not supported by your PC Install the proper codecs to play sound files e MP3 files must have the following characteristics MPEG 1 Layer III Sample rate 32 48 KHz Bit rate 32 320 kbps e WAV files must have the following characteristics Raw PCM Audio 8 16bit signed unsigned Stereo Mono e Sound files cannot exceed 10MB 4 2 Scripts You can program operations by writing scripts instead of creating objects in the XP Builder interface 4 2 1 About Scripts Scripts perform specified actions based on inputs from a user or from the system You can control the system entirely with figures and objects in the XP Builder interface but using scripts can allow you to organize the project more conveniently or effectively Scripts characteristics include e Easy system management e Control of windows with clearly defined functions and complex mathematical operations e Simplified programming based on a limited form of the C language e Simplified editing pro
319. ive was detected _No_Alarm_Backup_Storage BIT HSog951 3 External memory for alarm backup is not available _ON BIT HSoooo Always contains the value of ON O _OFF BIT HSoooo Always contains the value of OFF 1 _T200MS BIT HSoooo Repeat On and Off on a regular 6 cycle of 200ms LSis 176 177 LSis Device Description _T1S BIT HSoooo Repeat On and Off on a regular 7 cycle of 1 seconds T25 BIT HSoooo Repeat On and Off on a regular 8 cycle of 2 seconds 255 BIT HSoooo Repeat On and Off ona regular 9 cycle of 5 seconds _T10S BIT HSoooo Repeat On and Off on a regular A cycle of 10 seconds _T30S BIT HSoooo Repeat On and Off ona regular B cycle of 30 seconds _T60S BIT HSoooo Repeat On and Off on a regular C cycle of 60 seconds _OSVER_MASJ WORD HSooo1 Display the OS version info Major of the XGT Panel _OSVER_MIN WORD HSooo2 Display the OS version info Minor of the XGT Panel _YEAR WORD HSooo4 Time info Year for the XGT Panel _MON WORD HSoo05 Time info Month for the XGT Panel _DAY WORD HSoo006 Time info Day for the XGT Panel _HOUR WORD HS0007 Time info Hour for the XGT Panel _MIN WORD HSo0008 Time info Minute for the XGT Panel _SEC WORD HSo009 Time info Second for the XGT Panel _BASESCREEN_NO WORD HSoo10 Display the number of the current basic window _GLOBALWNG1_NO WORD HSoo11 Display the number of the 1 global window _GLOBALWNG2_N
320. ject pane 3 Inthe editing area right click and then click Screen Property 4 Click Local Script Setting Screen property Category Script Select General Sa ea Background cipt Name fae Local Script Setting ee a E Fic Esecution Condition Cond Address E EEE 1 Sec Insert Delete Modify Up Down Exe Condition Detail Condi Script Preview 231 5 Select a script and execution condition from the drop down lists If you choose an execution condition other than Consecutive or Periodic specify the device condition address Script Select Name Script_ 0000 6 Click Insert and if necessary click Up or Down to prioritize the script 7 Click OK 4 2 2 4 Specifying Display Change Scripts To specify a script that will execute when a window opens or closes 1 Create a script as described in 4 2 2 1 or 4 2 2 2 2 Double click a window from the Project pane 3 Inthe editing area right click and then click Screen Property 4 Click Etc Category General Run Script at Open Screen cript Mao Background Script Mo Local Script Setting _ Run Script at Close Screen kr Script Mo LSIs 232 4 Reference 5 If desired click the check box next to Run Script at Open Screen or Run Script at Close Screen and then select a script to execute based on the window status acl i I IT Ope aF Category Run Script at Open
321. l Settings gt Program monitor Connection Property Protocol RS232C lt Detail Settings Timeout aH 100ms Watto send 0 ms Retry count 3 Run Other Application Set to launch an application on the XGT Panel XGT Panels support Windows CE operating systems 5 0 Core 5 0 ProPlus and 6 0 In Windows CE 5 0 Core this function cannot launch the following executable files pdfviewer exe presviewer exe docviewer exe imageviewer exe and xls exe Runtime Exit Set to quit program monitoring when the switch is activated XP Remote Set to enable remote monitoring of the XGT Panel You 314 315 can specify functions for obtaining and terminating authorization for remote monitoring e Display The display settings for special switch objects include the following Special Switch General Basic pe EEN Text Extended Transparent BG Image Image Type Use Image Reverse Not Change Color Pattem On OF Same Image amp Change Color Pattem Pattem BG Color FAEMREER Frame Color Transparent BG Image Click the checkbox to make the image background transparent You cannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time Use Image Reverse The switch image is reversed when you tap the object ora condition is met If you set this option you cannot use the Transparent BG Image option or the On Off image If you set the Transparent BG Im
322. l is touched a 5V power supply will be available from the 9 pin RS 232C port When the XGT Panel monitor is off and the display returns to the menu screen the 5V power supply will be shut down Set Background Image This option sets the background image for the XGT Panel It is displayed on the idle and background screens Select Folder Select Source SE Storage Tree 800 32 6mp Tree_800 brmp If the Use boot image option is checked you can only use the 558 559 LSIs Description image with 32 bit and other specified resolutions Delete Background Enables you to delete the background image from the XGT Panel Image screen Buzzer Test Selecting this option allows you to test the buzzer Clear Data This option erases all of the downloaded files stored in the XGT Panel If a password is set enter the preset password the same password used when downloading a project The password is set in XP Builder Deleted data includes project data web server VNC activation module option card driver RAPIEnet communication setting data XP Manager settings and other downloaded data System settings will be saved eee d You can also set buzzer options in Communication gt XGT Panel Information from XP Builder 5 1 5 Ethernet settings This section describes the configuration of Ethernet communication settings 1 Touch Ethernet Setting System Configuration CE Backli
323. lamp is on When the condition is met the lamp is on Bit If you selected the bit condition type specify a bit device e Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Word If you selected the word condition type specify a word device Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Size 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal or BCD Click to designate the expression as conditional Use Lamp Offset Click to set an offset for the lamp 330 e Action Condition The action condition settings for multi switch objects include the following MulttAction Switch General W Use Action Condition Extended T Detail FR Lamp Condition i Bit Off Range Multi Bit Device Range Size Unsigned DEC DNOP O Exp Multi Bit No of Bit Device om Cancel Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is perfor
324. le Device Select this option to transfer a project a removable device that is connected to your computer For more details refer to lt 2 6 2 Transferring toa Removable Drive gt Update XP Runtime By default XP Builder determines whether or not the Forcedly runtime files need to be updated on the XGT Panel However you can select this option to force XP Builder to update the runtime files on the panel Delete All Monitoring Data Select this option to delete alarm logging and recipe data stored in the SRAM of the XGT Panel Include Upload Project File Select this option to transfer a compressed project file to the XGT Panel in addition to the normal project files You 125 LSis 2 Project D evelopment must select this option to extract images from an XGT Panel later The compressed file size requires only a small amount of memory so this option is highly recommended Download Click to transfer the data to the XGT Panel 3 If necessary click Settings to view or change the connection settings Connect Type Set the connection type between your computer and the XGT Panel Details For Ethernet and RS 232C connections you can specify the detailed connection settings In Windows XP a virtual IP address is created automatically when the computer and panel have different IP addresses In Windows 7 or Windows 8 you must set the same IP address manually or communication is not possible S
325. lect this option to use 24 bit color instead of the default setting 65 536 colors 24 bit mode improves the appearance of images on the screen but may result in slower screen refresh speeds RS 232C 5V Power This mode is supported only by iXP series Select this option to Supply use the RS232C connection 5V 250mA as the power supply Add Controller This mode is supported only by iXP series You can connect Delete Controller controllers with multiple protocols including RS232C RS422 485 or Ethernet XGT Panel Settings Description e Click Add Controller to insert a new controller tab The connection number for the new controller will be one higher than the previous controller s connection number automatically XP series panels support up to 4 connection numbers 0 3 and iXP series support up to 16 connection numbers depending on the connection protocol you use For more information refer to lt 2 7 1 Using 1 N Communication with Multiple Protocols gt e Click a controller tab and then click Delete Controller to delete it This option is active only after you have added at least one controller e Connection numbers are automatically renumbered when a controller is deleted For example if you have 3 controllers numbered o 2 and you delete controller 1 the last controller will be renumbered from 2 to1 automatically Controller Settings Set the controller manufacturer and controller type Product
326. llers with recipes You must set both read and write devices to execute recipes e Read device When the read device is in a rising or falling edge data is read from the specified starting device address for as many devices as have been specified Read device On or Off Read the recipe number from the recipe numbering Read the recipe block number from the block specifying device Read the recipe data i i Error occurs i i Transferring complete device On Error display device On e Write device When the write device is in a rising or falling edge data is written from the specified starting device address to as many devices as have been specified Write device On or Off Read the recipe number from the recipe numbering Read the recipe block number from the block specifying device Transfer the recipe data i i l Error occurs E ispl i l Transferring complete device On rror display device On 202 Two types of recipes are available basic and file recipes Description Basic Export data to non volatile internal memory in an XGT Panel If power is interrupted to the XGT Panel the most recent data is saved If you set the Delete all the monitoring data option all data is deleted when downloading the project to an XGT Panel File Export data to a CSV file You can download the file to an external device such as a USB drive or CF card The name of the file recipe is written as shown below
327. llowing Ex General Transparent BG Image Bae GE PEE Transparent Border Basic m E E a Frame Display Case Border Color Operation E eared sas ew RS H i N GZ lw Plate Color FANT INS eZ ERS Pattern2 Library Open Scale Paint 5 Location Left Interval 5 Alignment Right Transparent BG Image Set whether or not to make the background of the graph transparent Library Click to select a background image for the graph from a library Open Click to locate background image for the graph on your computer Direction Set the direction for the graph Top gt Bottom Bottom gt Top Left gt Right or Right gt Left Pattern Set a pattern for the ranges in the graph Transparent Border Set whether or not to use a transparent border for the graph Frame Display Specify the following options for the frame Border Color Set a border color Plate Color Set the background for areas not filled by value ranges 422 423 LSIs Fill Type Specify the following options for the fill Pattern FG Color Set a foreground color for the pattern Pattern BG Color Set a background color for the pattern Scale Specify the following options for the scale Set the number of points in the scale Set the space between points on the graph 0 to 10 Location Set the location of the scale in the graph Alignment Set the alignment of labels
328. lly across the entire interface based on the device value Windows specified here are called based on the specified device values and have no priority over each other LS Is 24 25 LSis 2 2 2 4 Changing Security Settings You can change security settings for a connected XGT Panel to regulate access by different types of users XGT Panels support 10 security levels o lowest to 9 highest To change security settings edit the information in the appropriate field and click OK Project Property Storage Settings Global Script Settings Awdliary Settings Extended Controller Settings Summary XGT Panel Settings Screen Settings Security Settings Key Window Settings Language Password modei Password device mode Lp Password input intery iw Maximum length of password is 12 characters Maximum length of password is 12 bytes from password device IAN aee Description Password Mode Set to require a password to access the panel Enter the passwords in the Password field for the corresponding security level Password Device Set to use a word device to control access to the XGT Panel Mode Authentication is initiated by user input but the first 12 bytes of data in the device max specifies the password You can use this feature to provide encrypt authentication or change authentication parameters frequently Security Level Set passwords for security levels as desir
329. lose to return to normal monitoring p g z H 4 4 2 4 Managing Programs You can save or delete programs from the Program Monitor To manage programs 1 Touch the program list button at the top left of the window To update the program list touch Update 543 4 Reference salami vy lt gt gt 2 Touch a program to monitor P Select to move to the monitoring window 3 To read comments touch Comment gt Read bar graph 239 Steps Program Manager COMMENT gt cE analog_set bar graph set 4 To save a program as a file touch a program and then touch Save When the program is saved Match appears in the Status column If the file cannot be saved to the PLC Mismatch appears in the Status column COMMENT Removed analog_set Removed Wlatch ternp_set Removed Sis 544 545 LSIs 5 To delete a file touch a program and then touch Delete When the program is deleted Removed appears in the Status column 4 4 2 5 Changing the Display Format In the Program Monitor you can choose from four display formats for data as described in the following table Unsigned decimal Displays the current device value as an unsigned decimal number Signed decimal Displays the current device value as a signed decimal number Hexadecimal number Displays
330. lude the following 421 General gt Display Case Operation J Extended Control Device Device Ra EEE size 16bits Type Unsigned DEC UpperLower Limit Value Device Upper Value 10 f Constant Lower Value Description Control Device Specify the following options for the control device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Set the data size of the device 16 bit or 32 bit If you change the data size of an existing object the conditional statement will be deleted Set the data form of the device signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float If you change the data type of an existing object the conditional statement will be deleted Upper Lower Limit Value Set the maximum and minimum values of the data to display The maximum and minimum values must be within the range supported by the device type Otherwise only the minimum or maximum value supported by the device will be displayed Device Set the specified device value as the maximum and minimum Value Constant Set the specified fixed value as the maximum and minimum Value Description Enter description in the relevant object e Display The display settings for bar graph object include the fo
331. lue with a dot Frame Display Specify the following options for the frame Border Color Set a border color Plate Color Set the background for areas not filled by value ranges Starting Point Location Set a starting point for the scales Left Bottom or Right Bottom 488 Scale Specify the following options for the scale No of Horizontal Set the number of points on the X axis Point No of Vertical Point Set the number of points on theY axis X axis Height Set the height of the X axis scale Y axis Width Set the width of the Y axis scale Scale Color Set the color of the scales Display Trigger The display trigger settings for the realtime scatter graph object include the following Real Time Scatter General q Extended y Display Trigger Use Action Condition Type m Device Range Size 16bits Type Unsigned DEC 0 NOP 0 No of Bit Device 154 Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specified range Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multiple devices is met Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button
332. m Viewer Datalist Logging Viewer Alarm Navigator MemoPad Datalist Editor File Recipe Editor Movie Player e Draw the object on the editing window or click the editing window to insert the object in its default size e The size of the history alarm graph datalist and logging viewer are fixed 4 When you are finished editing properties click OK To change properties of an object double click it Nore The following table describes limits when creating objects History Alarm Viewer 1 you can insert only one object per screen Logging Viewer Alarm Navigator Bit Window 8 there is no limit for overlapped windows LSiIs 58 Word Window MemoPad 1 you can insert only one object per screen Recipe Navigator e 1for basic file recipes e You can choose the recipe type in the properties window e Ifyou exceed the limit an error will occur when transferring the project to a panel Datalist Editor File Recipe Editor 1 you can insert only one object per screen Figure and other objects Unlimited 59 LSIs 2 Project Development 2 3 4 3 Inserting Objects from the Object Library You can insert figures or objects from the Object Library For more information about libraries refer to lt 2 3 4 4 Managing Object Libraries gt 1 Click View Object Library Project ToolBox P G Data Viewer Rey sy a 7 Property Viewer K Qut
333. m a text table Off Click to configure options for the object in the off state You can input text only from a text table Text Table Click to open the text table and select text The color and font properties set in the text table will be imported with the text On lt gt Off Copy Click to copy the text and formatting from the on state to the off state or vice versa Delete On Off Msg Click to delete the text for the selected state Size Set a text size from the drop down list or enter a value directly into the field Blink Set a blink speed for the object Not use The object will not blink The object will blink every three seconds Normal The object will blink every two seconds Fast The object will blink every second 334 Change the Property of Text Table Click to use different color and font properties for the text than what is specified in the text table This option is active only when you import text from the text table Set a font color Font Style Set a font style bold italic strikeout or underline You can apply more than one option at atime Horizontal Alignment Set the horizontal alignment Left Center or Right Vertical Alignment Set the vertical alignment Top Middle or Bottom e Detail The detail settings for bit message objects include the following Bit Message General i Offset Extended Device Display Trige i
334. mal unsigned decimal BCD or float Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 480 4 3 8 8 Realtime Scatter The following sections describe available options for realtime scatter objects e Basic The basic settings for the realtime scatter graph object include the following Real Time Scatter General ge Type of Scatter MaxMin Line and Dot Scatter Basic Setting Alarm W Setting of Device num Mum Contorl Device size Type Device Mum Offset 16 Uns 1 E 2 16 Uns 1 F Description 481 Type of Scatter Set the type of scatter chart Y Scatter Shows device addresses including the logging start device in order along the X axis The data displays in a loop so you do not need to designate the minimum or maximum value 40 30 20 M0000 M0001 M0002 M0003 M0004 X Y Scatter For two continuous device addresses from starting device shows the previous device value along the X axis and the next device value along the Y axis and displays dot or value where the two coordinates intersect You must designate a minimum and maximum value for the axes M0001 M0003 M0002 M0000 Scatter Basic Setting Specify the following options for the scatter Setting of Device num Set the number of devices to be monitored 1 to 1 000 You can sp
335. match For more information refer to lt 2 6 1 Transferring to an XGT Panel gt 170 171 3 4 14 Cannot Transfer a Project Ethernet Three possible causes exist for this situation e The wrong connection method is specified in the project Check the communication settings and specify the correct connection method For more information refer to lt 2 6 1 Transferring to anXGT Panel gt e The wrong type of cable is connected or the cable is not connected properly Use an Ethernet cable and ensure that the cable is securely connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the panel For more information refer to lt 2 6 1 2 Using an Ethernet Connection gt e The IP address or COM port of the XGT Panel is incorrect The IP addresses and COM ports must match between the XGT Panel and the computer XP Builder saves the settings from the previous transfer so if the IP address or port has changed you must re specify the communication settings For more information refer to lt 2 6 1 2 Using an Ethernet Connection gt 3 4 15 I Cannot Transfer a Project USB Serial Converter If Communication times out when using a USB to serial converter try to reconnect and transfer the project again If communication is not possible at all when using a USB to serial converter reinstall the USB driver 3 4 16 I Cannot Transfer a Project Active Sync or Mobile Device Center This error occurs with iXP series XGT Panels only If you cannot trans
336. med when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specified range Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation lea result of multiple devices is met Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you select the range condition specify the range Size 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 331 4 3 3 Message Objects You can use message objects to display messages based on specified conditions of bit or word devices You must add the messages to a text table to invoke them with a message object 4 3 3 1 Bit Message This section describes available settings for bit message objects e Basic The basic settings for bit message objects include the following Bit Message General Display Text Description Extended Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the D
337. n click Rename LIL ol F Library BJ OBJ_ALARM AND LOGGING fg OBJ_KEYPAD RE OBJ LAMP Ep OBJ_PUSHDOWN_SWITCH 2 5 OB _ROTARY_SWITCH 2 Project Development To change the preview image of the object 1 Inthe Object List right click an objects 2 Click Load Icon i Library Ej OBJ ALARM AND LOGGING foj OBJ KEYPAD EA OBJ_LAMP i OBJ_PUSHDOWN_SWITCH 4 OB8J_ROTARY_SWITCH 3 Select an icon and click Open To export the user object library 1 Inthe Object Library pane right click a library to export 2 Click Export i Library EJ OBJ_ALARM AND LOGGING o OBJ_KEYPAD Ep OBJ_LAMP E OBJ_PUSHDOWN_SWITCH W OBJROTARY_SWITCH fi OBJ_SLIDE_SWITCH OB TOGGLE SWITCH 3 Enter a name for the file and set the file destination 4 Click Save Note The exported library is saved with the file extension xpo You can either import a library into the project as a new library or you can import objects into an existing user object library To import a new library 1 Inthe Object Library pane right click Library 2 Click Import Object Library BL SS em of ettin fi EF OBJ_LAMP Ing fie OBJ_PUSHDOWN_SWITCH M OBJ_ROTARY_SWITCH ff OBJ_SLUIDE_SWITCH OBJ_TOGGLE_SWITCH pad on Object08193 pad p mM gt Ypac Ley pe 3 Select a file with an xpo extension and click Open The new library will be adde
338. n the XGT Panel close any open programs 3 Touch and hold the screen to open the menu 4 Touch Settings gt Ethernet Setting 5 Set the Ethernet IP Gateway and Subnet mask 6 Touch Go to Main Menu If you are connecting an iXP model panel the setup is complete the port number is set by default 7 Touch Settings PC Conn Setting and set the Port number The default value is 2143 130 8 In XP Builder click Communication gt Send gt Settings Ethernet Communication Settings Connect Type 2145 Scan XGT Panel con 9 Set the IP address and port number Notes e You can use the automatic search function in XP Builder Scan XGT Panel to locate and connect XGT Panels on a network The feature uses the UDP protocol to retrieve information about the XGT Panel and returns it via broadcast messages to a default address 255 255 255 255 This search is performed only on the local network If a gateway exists between the search computer and the XGT Panel the message may be blocked e By default the last address used will remain in the settings until you replace it manually or update it by performing a scan for connected XGT Panels e Ifyou are transferring information to multiple XGT Panels the data will be transferred in order by IP address When you view IP addresses as shown in the following example they appear in ascending order 131 Scan AGT Panel E pene poor
339. n the text table will be imported with the text 266 267 Select From Text Table mym v Language Engish United States v Select a text table Fea Ye and the language Registered text table list Delete Caption Click to clear text settings for the current state Font Select a font from the drop down list Size Set a text size from the drop down list or enter a value directly into the field Width Ratio Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop down list or entering a value directly in to the field You can set a ratio of 1 600 Change the Property of Text Table Click to use different color and font properties for the text than what is specified in the text table This option is active only when you import text from the text table Color Set a font color Font Style Set a font style bold italic strikeout or underline You can apply more than one option at atime Horizontal Alignment Set the horizontal alignment Left Center or Right Vertical Alignment Set the vertical alignment Top Middle or Bottom 4 Reference e Operation Operation settings for word lamp objects include the following Penda iT Use Soript Basic Display Select Script Text Script Extended Use Script Click the checkbox to use a script with the object Select Script Select a script from the drop down list Script When you select a s
340. n to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the specified range Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multiple devices is met Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary 4 Reference Range If you select the range condition specify the range Size a6bitor32bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Exp Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 4 3 8 3 Meter Graph The following sections describe available options for meter graphs LSis 436 e Basic The basic settings for meter graph objects include the following General Coid eee gt Device Display 7 Case Size Unsigned DEC Operation 9 Extended Upper Lower Limit Value f Device Upper Value f Constant Lower Value Description Control Device Specify the following options for the control device Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard butto
341. n to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Set the data size of the device 16 bit or 32 bit If you change the data size of an existing object the conditional statement will be deleted Type Set the data form of the device signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float If you change the data type of an existing object the conditional statement will be deleted Upper Lower Limit Value Set the maximum and minimum values of the data to display The maximum and minimum values must be within the range supported by the device type Otherwise only the minimum or maximum value supported by the device will be displayed Set the specified device value as the maximum and minimum Value Set the specified fixed value as the maximum and minimum Value Description Enter description in the relevant object 437 e Display The display settings for meter graph objects include the following Ex General Frame Display Transparent BG Image Basic Border Color ne me gt Display Transparent Border Case N Shape and Direction Operation e Plate Color Shape Circle Direction Needle Color Clockwise Top Cmos Library Click to select a background image for the graph from a library Open Click to locate background image for the graph on your computer Fram
342. naging Image Libraries gt Not Change Color Pattern Use the original image You can apply the pattern or color to the image Select the image to display for On or Off status from raster vector or user registered images Same Image amp Change Select a vector image You cannot select a raster Color Pattern in On Off image Apply a pattern or color to the image Library Click to select an image from the library In the library list image categories are distinguished by the ends of their names The vector image category ends with _V and the raster image category ends with _R Patterns can be applied only to the images Open Click to browse for images on your computer When you select an image from your computer it will be added to the image library automatically Pattern Click a pattern to apply to the image This option is available only when you select the change color or pattern option in Image Type Patterns are applied to specific parts of objects but not to the frames The frames are different for each image Refer the following examples Pattern Frame Pattern Frame Pattern Frame Pattern FG Color Set a color for the foreground pattern Pattern BG Color Set a color for the background pattern Frame Color Set a frame color Blink Set a blink speed for the object To use the blink function you must set the Use Lamp Condition option in the
343. nal device type can be specified for this function Change the device type to an internal device 2028 Font for the language is not set Go to Common Project properties Language No font is specified for the selected language Specify a font in the language settings 2029 Execution path is not correct The path and filename are incorrect for an external program Enter the correct path and filename 3000 Initial screen setting XX is incorrect The specified start window does not exist Specify an existing window or create a new window to use as the start window 154 155 Error Message How to Resolve the Error 3002 Key window XX is not correct The specified key window does not exist Specify an existing window or create a new window to use as the key window 3003 The base screen change device is The window change device has not been not correct specified Specify the device in the project properties window 3004 Window 1 change device is not The window change device has not been correct specified Specify the device in the project properties window 3005 Window 2 change device is not The window change device has not been correct specified Specify the device in the project properties window 4 000 The logging start device of The device has not been specified Specify the logging XX is not correct device in the logging prop
344. nd Group column size as follows PPD AAV YVAN The cell sizes of the Message and Group columns are changed to 5 and 3 respectively Occurrence Wessage Restore Check Frequency Ref 1 01 3 04 08 AU S040 2013 04 08 2013 04 08 2013 04 08 2013 04 08 2013 04 08 2013 04 08 2013 04 08 2013 04 08 2013 04 08 2013 04 08 01 3 04 08 Aagi 2013 04 08 y 5 3 e You can change the order of headers Occurrence Message Group Restore Check and more Drag and drop a header to the desired place ROEE meae Go Res i ence lessage Restore CEET h hl E e You cannot reduce the row size below the size of the header text The minimum row size is same as the header text length e The height of each cell is fixed by the font and text size 497 e Text The text settings for the history alarm viewer object include the following Alarm History General Basic Header gt ies 9 Extended Font Ey Tahoma ii Size 12 Font Style Bold taic Strikeout Underline Horizontal Alignment f Left fe Center Right Font Select a font from the drop down list Size Set a text size from the drop down list or enter a value directly into the field Color Seta font color Font Style Set a font style bold italic strikeout or underline You can apply more than one option at atime Horizontal Alignment Set the horizontal alignment Left Center or Right 498
345. nditional expression in the alarm list XX is incorrect list contains an error Verify the expression in the alarm list settings 7009 The detailed display number The detailed display setting in the alarm list setting of alarm list XX is contains an error Verify the setting in the alarm incorrect list settings 7010 The alarm message setting of No alarm message has been set Select a text alarm list XX is not correct string from a text table in the alarm list to use as the alarm message 7011 Alarm list XX and YY areset Two history alarms are set to monitor the same to supervise the same device device Specify a unique device for one of the alarms or delete one of the alarms 7012 All the alarm list devices of Some devices in the alarm list have not been alarm list XX must be set specified Specify all devices in the alarm list 7013 The lists to supervise of alarm Two history alarms are set to monitor the same list XX have been redundantly device Specify a unique device for one of the set alarms or delete one of the alarms 7014 The supervision device word The specified conditional expression in the alarm condition information setting of list contains an error Verify the expression in the alarm list XX is not correct alarm list settings 8000 Writing start device setting is The device has not been specified Specify the not correct device in the recipe properties window Error Me
346. nels iXP70 TTM iXP80 TTM and iXP90 TTM For more information about the movie player object refer to lt 4 3 2 4 Special Switch gt e Basic The basic settings for the movie player object include the following Movie Player General gt Ge Initial Display Target C Display Video File f Display Video Input Display Camera Capture File Use Title i H Height 15 Font Size BG Color Text Color Index Device FFE Description Initial Display Target Set the default target for the movie player object Display Video File Set to play a video file avi on a storage device CF card USB SEEN eee Display Video Set to show the feed from a camera connected to the XGT Display Camera Set to show an image file jpg on a storage device CF card Capture File USB device or SD card Set to loop the display target 936 Use Title Set whether or not to display video information The title area is shown above the display area Movie 1 777 120270_05051 l av aaa E E ass Display Mode Display the Index Number Title area Dispaly area Set to show the mode Set to show the index numbers of files being played Display File Name Set to show the names of files being played Set the height of the title Set the background color of the title Font Size Set the font size of the title Text Color Set the text color of the title Index Device When
347. nk Slow The object will blink every three seconds Normal The object will blink every two seconds The object will blink every second Width Ratio Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop down list or entering a value directly in to the field You can set a ratio of 1 600 Text Plate Color Click to set the background color for figures Space Set the indent from the margin of the object If you select left alignment you can set the left indent If you select right alignment you can set the right indent Font Style Set a font style bold italic strikeout or underline You can apply more than one option at atime Horizontal Alignment Set the horizontal alignment Left Center or Right 367 e Display Case The display case settings for numeric display objects include the following General Basic Display Case List exa Display Text ae Display Case Operation Extended Display Case List Create delete or reorganize conditional expressions If the device value meets multiple conditions the display settings will be based on the first condition met Create Click to create a new range condition You can create up to eight conditions For more information refer to lt 4 2 1 3 Understanding Constants and Data Types gt x Delete Click a condition and then click this icon to delete the condition Up Click a condition and then click this i
348. nly non alphanumeric character that can be used is the underscore _ Blank Character If a blank character appears before or after the name the tag name will not be recognized Device Name A device address expression cannot be used as a name e g Doo12 or MW123 Hexadecimal Number A hexadecimal number cannot be used as aname Notes e Tag names must be unique You cannot use special characters in tag names The following table describes rules for tag names e Tags are stored in the same table If the properties for a registered tag are modified all the objects that use the tag are affected e Consecutive copying is not performed when you specify a device address with a tag Two types of tags are available system tags and custom tags The following table describes the system tags available in XP Builder _NVRAM_Low_Battery BIT HSog50 The voltage of the XGT Panel O battery is low _NVRAM_lnvalid_Data BIT HSo950 1 The XGT Panel s SRAM memory is damaged _No_Logging_Backup_Storag BIT HSog951 External memory for logging e O backup is not available _No_Recipe_Backup_Storage BIT HSo951 1 External memory for recipe backup is not available _No_Screen_Backup_Storage BIT HSo0951 External memory saving the project 2 is not available _No_Printer BIT HSog51 No printer is connected 4 _USB_Over_Current_Warnin BIT HSo9g50 An over current from the connected g 8 USB dr
349. nnot be played or captured If you want to play video or create a capture file while standing by set the interval recording stand by device to Off In such cases interval recording is not available so if you want to continue with interval recording set the device to On You can change properties for input video images Brightness Set brightness of the input video Contrast Set contrast of the input video Color Set color of the input video Notes e This option is supported only by iXP multimedia type e Inthe following situations recorded video cannot be played and the current camera input cannot be captured When recording is in progress When designating a stop device for event recording standby and and interval recording start time greater than o But when the device is On playing video and creating capture files is possible while recording is not When the device is Off interval recording is possible while playing videos and creating capture files are not e If recording is in progress a video cannot be played back e You cannot play video on a Window screen and a default screen at the same time e You cannot preview a camera on a Window screen and a default screen at the same time e Video capture files can be created only once per second In other words even if LSis 40 41 you trigger video capture special switch several times very quickly only one file per secon
350. not in the XP Builder program You can import a User Object Library from another project or export it from the current project to use in other projects To open the Object Library pane click View Object Library The Object Library pane and the Object List will appear as shown in the following image Object Library yf apes pe library BJ OBJ_ALARM AND LOGGING fg OBJ_KEYPAD ff OBJ_LAMP K OBJ_PUSHDOWN_SWITCH OBI ROTARY_SWITCH fi Object Library pane JE OBJ_SLIDE_SWITCH E OBJ_TOGGLE_SWITCH pi Alarm_che Alarm_che Alarm_che F Alarm_che Alarm_che Alarm _che i Object list f Alarm_dele Alarm_dele Alarm_dele l i I m p 4 LSiIs 62 2 Project Development To create an object library 1 Inthe Object Library pane right click Library E OB _SLIDE_SWITCH OBJ TOGGLE_SWITCH fo OBJ KEYPAD va OBJ LAMP i OBJ_PUSHDOWN_SWT M OBJ_ROTARY_SWITCH E OBJ SLIDE_S5SWITCH OB TOGGLE SWITCH Object08193 3 To change the name of the library 63 LSIs a 2 Project D evelopment 4 Right click the library name and click Rename a o Object Library ax Bit i i Library EJ OBJ_ALARM AND LOGGING a OBJ_KEYPAD ip OBJ_LAMP fi OBJ_PUSHDOWN_SWITCH M OBJ_ROTARY_SWITCH JE OBJ_SLIDE_SWITCH OBJ TOGGLE SWITCH FE
351. nput Permit Bit Device is on Input Permit Device ON OFF OFF Input Permit Bit Device Set to move the cursor only when the bit device is switched on Clear Type Set whether or not to clear input data automatically when switching to input mode 358 Use Keypad Set whether or not to use a key window for data input If you don t use the keypad you can also use the key switch option from the special switch object Use Keypad set in Set whether or not to use the keypad specified in the Input Object key window settings Enter the number of the key window or click Browse to locate the key window Use User Keypad Set whether or not to specify a location for the key Position window Set the coordinates for the X andY axes If you do not specify the location the key window will appear at the upper left or upper right of the screen Use Auto Cursor Set whether or not to use the auto cursor function When the user touches Enter while entering data in a key window the cursor moves to the next input field automatically Use Interlock Set to prevent input when the interlock device meets the specified condition The input cursor will skip the locked unit and move automatically to the next unit in the sequence Input order 720 720 Ea gt a Interlocked 9780 359 e Action Condition The action condition settings for numeric input objects include the following M Use Acti
352. nput Output Power ee I Main Circuit Main Circuit Power Separate the XGT Panel power supply cable from the main circuit cable high voltage and current and input output cable Maintain a minimum separation of 100mm between cables e Use a lightning surge protector to prevent damage from lightning strikes B men a mn a Sn ae ne omen Sm me mn mw an me ee Hn nn me Surge Protector to prevent lightning damage 618 Notes e Separate E1 the ground connection for lightning surge protector and E2 the ground connection for XGT Panel e Set lightning surge protector to below the allowable surge voltage to provide protection if the voltage increases to its maximum e Use an insulation shielding transformer or noise filter when the electromagnetic interference occurs Keep the stripped ends of the terminated cables twisted and as short as possible When running the wiring avoid running the cables for the insulation shielding transformer or noise filter pass through the cable duct e When you use the magnetic lighting contactor MC for AC DC it is recommended to use a ferrite core close to the power terminals as shown below EN i S Ferrite core CU1330B E TECH CU1330G E TECH ZCAT 3035 1330 TDK 619 5 7 3 2 Ground Connection Wiring When you use the ground connection refer to the following information e Use the exclusive ground connection When you install the ground connection
353. ns as shown below Buzzer Settings I l Buzzer volume I Buzzer tone a Buzzer On Select to make the buzzer sound Buzzer Volume Adjust the buzzer volume Buzzer Tone Adjust the buzzer tone Notes This option is available only with iXP series 565 LSiIs a 5 2 XGT Panel Function Diagnostics You can diagnose the functions for iXP series including screen and touch function external memory status or serial communication method To diagnose functions touch Diagnostics in the XGT Panel main menu LSIS XGT Panel gt Settings PLC Information Update XGT Panel Storage Function Ver 1 30 B 005 LS Is 566 5 2 1 Checking Screen Function You can view and check the screen s functions for example screen color and graph performance by touching Screen Diagnostics i Backup Memory P Flash Memory OCF Card gt Serial OSD Card USB Memory Goto MainMenu To change the screen color keep touching the screen to change from red to green blue black and white Then you can view graph performance by touching the screen consecutively To end screen diagnosis touch Close in the graph screen 567 LSIS 5 2 2 Checking Touch Function Check the touch spot to verify touching accuracy 1 Touch Touch Diagnostics j nm Backup Memory O Flash Memory OCF Card gt Serial OSD Card USB Memory
354. nsigned DEC lo NOP O Exp Multi Bit No of Bit Device 1 E Setting Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the ete en Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result me apese 419 LSIs Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you select the range condition specify the range 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Exp Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 4 3 8 Graph Objects You can use graph objects to express various device values Eight types of graphs are available including bar pie meter closed trend logging trend logging scatter and real time scatter graphs 4 3 8 1 Bar Graph The following sections describe options available for bar graphs 420 e Basic The basic settings for bar graph objects inc
355. nt if else false Statement for for Expression Condition This command repeats the Expression statement if true a value other than o as a result of judgment of Statement the condition and shifts to the location next to the statement if false while while Condition This command repeats the statement if true a value other Statement than o as a result of judgment of the condition and shifts to the location next to the statement if false do while do This command shifts to the Do f location and performs the statement if true a value other Statement E than o as a result of judgment of while Condition E J 3 the condition and shifts to another location if false return return Ends the script 220 221 Command Expression break break Description e The break statement within the loop gets out of the loop wrapping the break e Ifthe break statement is within the nested loop it only affects the loop which is furthest inwards in the program continue continue e Skips the remaining part within the loop and shifts to the next loop execution e The continue statement is within the nested loop it only affects the internal loop structure containing it e Logical Operators amp amp lt Term 1 gt amp amp lt Term 2 gt Provides 1 if both lt Term 1 gt and lt Term 2 gt are true and o otherwise lt Term 1 gt lt Term 2 gt Provides 1 if both lt Term 1
356. ntering into the XGT Panel e Install the XGT Panel in a location and height that makes control and operation comfortable e Do not install the XGT Panel in the same location as high voltage devices e Maintain a minimum clearance of 100mm around the XGT panel from wiring ducts and other devices e Install the XGT Panel away from excessive noise 610 5 7 1 3 XGT Panel Thermal Control Considerations e Ifthe XGT Panel is installed in a sealed location consider the heat generated by other devices as well as the heat generated by the XGT Panel itself If fans or a ventilating system are used to circulate the air carefully consider any particulates that may be blown through the air towards the XGT panel Dust accumulation may result in the device malfunctioning or affect the performance of the system e It is recommended to use air filters or a heat exchanger for sealed plant rooms where equipment is located Note Be careful when handling the XGT Panel while unpacking it and getting it ready for installation e Do not drop or cause impact to the device e Do not disassemble or repair XGT Panel Unauthorized repairs and disassembly will invalidate the device s warranty and LSIS will not accept responsibility for any damage e During installation and wiring take extreme care to prevent dust and debris entering the XGT panel 611 5 7 2 Panel Design and Installation When you install the XGT Panel a panel designed
357. o OFF Cuat ion H State Lamp gt m Poooo OFF Moooo ON H State Lamp gt im Poooo ON Moooo OFF N State Lamp gt Alarm Poooo ON Moooo ON 2 0 General The Num of State Display Text State Change Condition Change Condition by Bit Combination Device Setting Device 1 Device 2 Device 3 Device 4 Description The Num of State Select the number of statuses to display for the object from 3 to 16 State Change Condition Set a method for changing device statuses e Change Condition by Bit Display the on off status for up to four controllers with one lamp The maximum number of statuses is five Refer to the following example Type Po P1 P2 P3 Display example Status 1 OFF OFF OFF OFF oy Status 2 ON OFF OFF OFF O Status 3 OFF ON OFF OFF Status 4 OFF OFF ON OFF O Status 5 OFF OFF OFF ON e Change Condition by Bit Combination Displays the combined on off status for up to four controllers with one lamp The maximum number of statuses is 16 Refer to the following example 271 LSIs n Type Po P1 P2 P3 Display example Status 1 OFF OFF OFF OFF Status 2 ON OFF OFF OFF O Status 3 OFF ON OFF OFF ei Status 4 ON ON OFF OFF O Status 5 OFF OFF ON OFF Device Setting Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address
358. o the numeric input object is as follows Value from controller Value displayed in XGT Panel Read not set D10 AB 0x4241 AB 0x4241 D20 CD 0x4443 Read set D10 AB 0x4241 CD 0x4443 D20 CD 0x4443 The values in the controller are same but the data displayed in the XGT Panel is different Write Check Device Set a device to verify the returned device value Set this option when the bit device is On after inputting the number 377 Write Check Device Off Set when to turn off the write check device if the data cannot be verified Display Mode Set an option for the color of the message based on the background color Transparent Display the message transparently in contrast to the background image Display the message in a color that is easily distinguished from the background image LSS 378 e Keypad Option The keypad options settings for text input objects include the following Text Input General a Extended Detail Pag keypad Option Cursor Touch C Input Pemit Device O amp amp Focus Type Input Permit Bit Device Action Condition Display Trigger Clear Type f Auto Clear OFF f Auto Clear ON If Use Keypad Use Keypad set in Input Object No of Keypad 1 Use User Keypad Position Position of X axis I Position of Y axis I Use Auto Cursor Input Order Use Interlock m r Interlock Device
359. of controllers when connected to multiple protocols RS232C RS422 485 and Ethernet 2 7 1 Using 1 N Communication with Multiple Protocols When setting up 1 N communication with multiple protocols you can connect various types of controllers via the different protocols The RS485 connection uses only one port and therefore can be assigned only one connection number However it provides additional flexibility by allowing you to add different controller types via RS232C and Ethernet channels The RS232C protocol allows you to connect only one controller while the Ethernet protocol allows you to connect up to 2 different types of controllers for XP series panels or up to 14 different types of controllers for iXP series panels A multi channel setup of 1 N communication is illustrated by the following image XP Series XGT Panel Hub Controller Q RS232C Ethernet RS485 R5422 Controllers O U U U U Controllers e When you connect controllers via RS232C only you can connect only one controller from each series e When you connect controllers via RS232C and RS485 RS422 you can connect 142 only one controller form each series per protocol e When you connect controllers via Ethernet only you can connect 4 XP series controllers and 16 iXP series controllers To use 1 N communication 1 In XP Builder click Common gt Project Property Setting gt XGT Panel Settings gt Add Controller
360. of the video file backup storage device is LSis 166 167 deactivated 11 A video is being played Recording is not available 12 A recording is in progress Recording cannot be started again 13 A file cannot be created in the current storage device 14 This file format cannot be played 101 The path for saving a video capture file is not specified in XP Builder 102 The storage device for saving video capture files is not installed or the saving path cannot be created in the device 103 The current free space is not enough to save the video capture file At least 10MB of free space is required to save the video capture file 104 The number of files in the video capture file backup path exceeds the limit Format the storage device and reinstall it Up to 1 000 files can be saved in the backup route 105 The number of files per directory in video capture file backup path exceeds the limit Format the storage device and reinstall it 106 The video capture file cannot be deleted due to a file system problem Format the storage device and reinstall it 107 The video capture file cannot be created due to a file system problem Format the storage device and reinstall it 108 Creating a list of stored video capture files is in progress Try again later Refer to 6 bit of status device 110 The safety removal switch for a video file backup storage device is deactivated 111 Pre recording
361. ograms or users and try again e An incorrect file is specified for the rule If you attempt to open a file that does not match the rule specified the tag cannot be invoked Open the file in an editor such as MS Excel and ensure that the tag information meets the rule requirements Then try again e The device information stored with the tag does not match the controller specified in the project Ensure that the correct controller type is specified and then try again 3 4 12 I Cannot Import Common Data Settings The file is in use Ensure that the file is not being used by another or programs or users and try again 3 4 13 Cannot Transfer a Project RS 232 Three possible causes exist for this situation The wrong connection method is specified in the project Check the communication settings and specify the correct connection method For more information refer to lt 2 6 1 Transferring to anXGT Panel gt e The wrong type of cable is connected or the cable is not connected properly Use the 6 pin RS 232 cable provided with the XGT Panel Ensure that the cable is securely connected to the TOOL port on the back of the panel For more information refer to lt 2 6 1 Transferring to anXGT Panel gt e The baud rate is incorrect The baud rate and COM port settings must match on the XGT Panel and the computer Ensure that the baud rate in the XP Builder project properties and the COM port settings in the computer s Device Manager
362. ol Whether or not the string is copied char pszDst The the length of the source string is longer than the char type s variable it cannot be copied false is returned Example char szSrc 10 12345 szDst 10 Strcpy amp szDst amp szSrc Parameters Parameter 2 target string the address of the character type s variable char pszSrc The source string the address of the character type s variable Strlen Lengthen the string Example char buf 10 12345 int nLen nLen Strlen amp buf The value of nLen is 5 Return value int The length of string char pszString The Parameter 1 address of the character type s variable LSS 244 4 2 3 6 Understanding Device Functions The following table describes properties for the device functions CopyData Read data from the source device and inputs them into a destination device Example CopyData W MWooo W MW41o00 10 Parameters Parameter 1 DEVICE src The source device to copy from destination device number of devices CopyDataEx Read data from the source device up to the source offset and inputs them into the destination device up to the destination offset Example int index if X IXo 0 0 true 3 index o f else 4 index 100 f CopyData W MWooo o W MW100 index 10 If statement is true offsets 10 word value
363. om an XGT Panel x ma Summary XGT Panel Settings Screen Settings Security Settings Key Window Settings Language Storage Settings Global Script Settings Aundliary Settings Extended Controller Settings m Destination Storage Image fies TEEN Fesh memory E Sound files Flash memory Recipe data SRAM memory Backup Storage Storage Settings Description Image Files e XGT Panel has a fixed amount of memory for saving project files e Ifyou want to download XGT Panel data that exceeds the size of the allocated memory you can save files on removable media e Use the entire path to specify the storage file path on the XGT Panel Upload Project File Specify locations where files are stored Sound Files Recipe Data Alarm Data Specify an external location where the data will be backed Logging Data up If disk is full existing data will be overwritten Recipe Data Capture Image Memo File Video File Video Capture Image LSiIs 30 31 LSIs Nores e XGT Panels support three types of removable storage devices USB devices CF cards and SD cards iXP only e X30 BTE XP30 TTE XP40 TTE XP40 TTA and XP50 TTE models do not support CF cards 2 2 2 8 Changing Global Script Settings Global script conditions are monitored through an XGT Panel and executed if the conditions are met Up to 8 global scripts can be created If two or more conditions are me
364. on Send or select the download icon on the toolbar a xpd Tool Communication Window To T Panel en AEs ich reat iP PUSHDOWN_V a T ti ROTARY 75A R 2 Click the checkbox next to Save to removable device and select the location of the removable drive By default the project will be saved in the XP_Project folder unless you specify a different folder name To download the project file you must create a Project folder inside the XP_Project folder The folder will be created automatically Download C Dowload to XGT Panel Ethernet 192 168 0 1 2143 Browse Update XP Runtime forcbly W Delete all monitoring data This will format all the Logging Recdpe Alaram data that are stored in SRAM Memory M Incude Upload Project file ree 135 3 Click Download Notes e Ensure that your removable drive has sufficient space to store the project files that you choose to transfer If the drive has insufficient space available an error message will appear that describes the available memory and the total memory required to transfer the project files e Itis recommended to let XP Builder transfer only the updated portion of a project except in the following conditions You are transferring the project to the panel for the first time or the project has been deleted from the panel The project ID has been deleted on the panel due to a communication error and therefore the project IDs cannot
365. on Condition Type Bit On Bit Of Multi Bit Extended Detail Keypad Option l Device Display Trigger No of Bit Device 1 reo Setting Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the n specified range Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation _ result of multiple devices is met Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Sis 360 Range If you select the range condition specify the range Size a6 bitor 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Exp Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions e Display Trigger The display trigger settings for numeric input objects include the following mE M Use Action Condition Detail Ei dl Keypad Option Oia ein Range Multi Bit Action Condition gt Te Device lisplay Trigger Ses Deve
366. on connection has been failed There is no connection to the XGT Panel Check the connection to the XGT Panel and the communication settings Connection passwords are different The password you entered is incorrect Re enter the connection password for the XGT Panel Disconnected Try again after connection This error occurs when the XGT Panel is disconnected Check the connection between your computer and the XGT Panel and ensure that the communication settings are correct Edit device is Read Only Use writable device Device input fails when the object does not support writing Some objects support both reading and writing but other devices such as lamps are read only devices To support device input you must use a writable device such as a switch number input or character input object For more information about object types refer to lt 4 3 Objects gt File transformation error This error occurs when the file to be transferred cannot be read due to an error in the file Download the project to the XGT Panel again Refer to lt 2 6 1 Transferring toanXGT Panel gt Graphic library load has been failed The image library is corrupt or damaged You must create a new image library More than 10M cannot be downloaded The XGT panel that is currently connected has only 10M of available memory You cannot transfer a file larger than 10M No reply within the set period or disc
367. ond additional index information will be added at the end of the file name 5 6 1 2 Path for Recipe Backup e Adirectory named Recipe will be created under the USB CF SD storage root directory e A subdirectory will be created with filenames identified by Year Month under the logging number directory e The rest of the directory structure is the same as the logging backup file structure e Logging backup files have hour minute and second information as their file name Backup files will be created in CSV format The filenames will begin with L representing logging and the rest of the name will contain hour minute and second index information If backup files are created simultaneously in the same second additional index information will be added at the end of file name 5 6 1 3 Path for Screen Backup e Adirectory named Screen Image will be created in the USB CF SD storage directory e A subdirectory named by Year Month will be created in the Screen Image directory e The rest of the directory structure is the same as the logging backup file structure e Screen Image backup files use hour minute and second information as their file names The backup files will be created in bitmap format The file names will begin with S representing Screen Image and the rest of the name will contain hour minute and second index information 600 If backup files are created simul
368. onitor Minimum resolution of 1024x768 e OS Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 or Windows 8 e Peripherals Mouse and keyboard To install XP Builder in Windows XP 1 Run the XP Builder setup file You can download the file from the LSIS website http eng sis biz support download 2 Select an installation language Chinese Simplified English or Korean 3 Follow the instructions in the installation wizard to complete the installation To install XP Builder in Windows Vista 1 Log in to your computer with an administrator account 2 On your computer click Start Control Panel User Accounts and Family Safety 3 Click User Accounts Turn User Account Control on or off and uncheck the tick box next to Use User Account Control UAC to help protect your computer 4 Run the XP Builder setup file You can download the file from the LSIS website http eng sis biz support download 5 Select an installation language Chinese Simplified English or Korean 6 Follow the instructions in the installation wizard to complete the installation To install XP Builder in Windows 7 or Windows 8 1 2 Log in to your computer with an administrator account On your computer click Start Control Panel User Accounts and Family Safety Click User Accounts Change User Account Control Settings and drag the slider to Never notify Run the XP Builder setup file You can do
369. onnected This error may occur during data transfer Check the connection between your computer and the XGT Panel and the power cable for the XGT Panel Object library load has been The object library is corrupt or damaged You must create a 162 163 Error Message failed How to Resolve the Error new object library Password setting has been failed The new password cannot be set Check the connection to the XGT Panel and the communication settings Problem with data This error occurs when incorrect data is included in the transfer Try the transfer again Save the project file Enter a file name and save the project file Save the project first This error occurs when you attempt transfer a project without saving it first Save the project and try again Shift to the XGT Panel program update mode This error occurs when you attempt to update the XGT Panel while the panel is in the normal operating mode instead of the update mode On the XGT Panel touch and hold the screen to access the XGT Panel menu and then select the update mode The XX set lines exceed the maximum display range The number of lines set in the object exceeds the horizontal dimensions of the screen The XX set rows exceed the maximum display range The number of rows set in the object exceeds the vertical dimensions of the screen Set the number of rows below the maximum
370. or C Program monitor Detail Settings N 1 Settings aH 100ms Wait to send 0H ms Retry count 34 to set the properties 145 LSIs a 4 Check the box next to Custom setting 5 Set the station number 0 LSIS XGK LINK Device Select P ka 00700 P gigg XGK PLC P I O Register Bit PO123A 0 2047F Word P0123 0 2047 Network C Use default Cancel 2 7 3 Using N 1 Communication This is a useful way to make several XGT Panels to communicate with one PLC N 1 communication is available only with the RS 485 communication protocol and uses a token ring bus to regulate communication Only one XGT Panel can hold the token at a time and the token is passed after a defined holding time The XGT Panel that you set to station o is the starting point for communication After the token is released it is delivered to station 1 and so on 146 2 Project Development To use N 1 communication set the communication parameters 1 In XP Builder click Common P Project Property Setting XGT Panel Settings Storage Settings Global Script Settings Auxiliary Settings Series lixP Seres 24 BIT color mode AS 232C 5 power supply ixP80 TTA Add Controller Delete Controller at v1 23 Lsis AGE LINK Referto manual N 1 Settings 30 100s Wai to send wH ms Retry count Timeout aH 100ms Wai to send 0H ms Retry count 34 3 Click N 1
371. or include the following Alarm Navigator General If Use Action Condition Extended C Bit OF C Range C Multi Bit Device Device E Range Size bi Type Unsigned DEC o NOP Q Multi Bit No of Bit Device i Seting Cancel Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the S apea TR Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of AN aeaaea S Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you select the range condition specify the range Size 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 514 4 3 13 Recipe Navigator Object This object displays a list of the file recipes saved in the storage device USB CF Card or the basic recipes edited in XP Builder You can write the recipe data sh
372. or the object LSis 394 e Detail The detail settings for bit window objects include the following General 5 Offset y Extended d Device 54 Offset Click the checkbox to use the offset function You can offset the device address based on the value of the offset device For example if the starting device address is P100 XP Builder reads the value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value If the offset value is 10 for example then the referenced device address is P110 Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary 395 4 3 5 2 Word Window This section describes available settings for word window objects e Basic The basic settings for word window objects include the following Word Window General Control Device gt P Devices w B Operation Size 1 bits Type Unsigned DEC Extended Window Type Display Window Popup 0 Ovedap Indirect C Case Placement Top Let C Center C Top Right C Bottom Right Bottom Left Description Control Device Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to o
373. or those files to an external drive that is connected to the XGT Panel 118 e Additional information is included in the size of the communication driver module e The font size includes not only the font used in the XGT Panel but also the font used in code pages required for multi language display for text display objects 2 5 6 Finding and Replacing Devices This function allows you to locate the addresses of objects used in a project and if necessary relocate them to a new address 2 5 6 1 Finding and Replacing Devices on the Active Window To find and replace devices on the active window 1 Click Tool gt Find in Active Screen The object s address is shown in the Find Device window Find Device Find what Bit word D Poo FEI Find Next Range search 1 i Find all address tag Close Replace 2 Click Find Next to determine if another object exists with the same address 119 3 Torelocate the device to a new address click Replace The Replace Device window appears Replace Device Find what Bit word D poood1 3 Replace with O Poaon3 Range search 1 H W Find all address tag Close 4 Enter anew address in the Replace With field or click the keypad to the right of the field to specify a device address 5 After entering the new device address click Close es ee e By default the find function locates either device addresses or tags based on the type of information
374. ores e To export tag data to a CSV file 1 Run an XG5000 program of version 3 0 or higher 2 Click Project Save as Variables Comment 3 Select the variables and click OK e Ifthe PLC type is different when you import the data an error will occur 4 1 2 Text Tables Text tables allow you to store and manage text for reuse translation and simplified management The advantage of using text tables is that you can register text strings and then use them throughout the project For example you can import text from a text table to use as an object caption and format the color size and other font properties You can also create multilingual interfaces by adding language columns to the text table and registering translations for the text strings To create a text table 1 Inthe Project pane right click Text Table 2 Click Insert Mei Script Alt Tag Insert Alarm fe Schedule Open fl Logging Close lg History All gt lt Recipe Ea File Re cal Bs Sound jm Property Rename As Start Screen Import Export 185 3 Enter text and set properties such as font color and typeface When you enter text in a text table the text appears in the language currently set in the project properties To specify languages in a text table 1 Inthe Project pane double click a text table to open it 2 Right click anywhere in the t
375. ortcut Key field and then press a key combination on the keyboard If you press a combination that is already in use the action that is assigned to the shortcut will appear below this field Customize Commands l Toolbars Keyboard Menu l Options Category Set Accelerator for Project Default Commands Close Project Print Preview Print Settinin Press New Shortcut Key Open project 4 Click Assign 5 To remove a shortcut select one from the Current Keys field and then click Remove 6 When you are finished customizing keyboard shortcuts click Close 10 11 1 3 2 3 Customizing Menu Options In the Customize window you can select which Application Frame windows and Context menus to show To customize menu options click Tool gt Customization gt Menu and then select the desired options from the drop down menus 1 3 2 4 Customizing Pane Positions To view or hide panes click View and then click the name of a pane You can drag and drop panes in new positions within the XP Builder window To change properties for a pane right click the pane and click an option You can set panes to dock or float and set whether or not the pane will hide automatically To dock the pane move the pane to the desired location indicator A shadow will appear to provide a preview of the docking location To set a pane to float on the pane click F gt Floating To hide a pane onthe pane click
376. ow Set to close the current pop up window when the switch is activated Data List Editor Set to view additional data lists when the switch is activated You can set an option to view the data such as Line Up Down or Page Up Down Key Switch Set to open an input window when the switch is activated Select the function and set a key code in Setting for Special Switch Function Setting for Special Switch Function Setting for Special Switch Function lt Backspace Key Code Cf Asdi char supports only low chai Unicode char does not support C You can apply text numbers or special functions clear Space enter caps lock and more When you select the special switch in the XGT Panel the key code is entered to the numeric or text input device LSis 312 313 Text Input Numeric Input When you enter ASCII characters or Unicode characters you can input the value from each table only via a keyboard When you set the text input object if you set the multilingual option to English the Unicode value is changed according to code page 1252 OEM United States and saved to the device If you set the multilingual option to Korean the Unicode value is changed according to code page 949 ANSI OEM Unified Hangul and saved to the device E To enter upper case characters e ASCII You cannot input upper case characters directly To input upper case
377. own in the Recipe Navigator object directly to the controller This section describes available settings for the recipe navigator For more details about recipes refer to lt 4 1 4 Recipes gt e Basic The basic settings for recipe navigator include the following Recipe Navigator J General Recipe Type BCIPE IYDpE Text 0 File Recipe Extended C Basic Recipe Intemal Device 3 LELI FFE Frame Display Line w d cert ME Frame Color No of Row 5 Flate Color Width 1 Recipe Navigator Display Format File Name 3 Colum Width if File Des ar Colum Width Colum Width is the relative size of the total File Namager Description Recipe Type Set the type of recipe to display File Recipe Set to show the XPRXXXXxX csv list in the recipe folder ona storage device such as a USB drive CF card or SD card Set to show the basic recipe list Internal Device Specify the internal device that is used for transferring edited basic recipes from NVRAM Frame Display Set whether or not to use a frame Set the frame color Plate Color Set the background color for the table No of Col Set the number of columns to show Line Set the line properties 915 Recipe Navigator Display Format Set the data format for the recipe navigator File Name Set to show the recipe file name The file recipe displays the name of the CSV file saved in the storage device The ba
378. pad JE 65533 ASCI Keypac tf 65534 FLOAT Keypa ER Part 47 2 Project Development To set the start window 1 Inthe Project pane right click one of the base windows 2 Click As Start Screen ee jE Eb ha Project Property Communication Settin ia Special Device Setting i a Screen Fal Base Screen E Insert Insert Alarm gt Open Close Copy Cut Delete Paste 2 3 2 3 Renaming a Window 1 Inthe Project pane right click a window 2 Click Rename i sane 5i T ee 3 Enter anew name and press the Enter key C e Window names are composed of numbers spaces and text characters You must separate the window number and name with a space or the window name will not be recognized for example if you enter 1 Base Window the name will not be recognized e Keypad windows have fixed numbers DEC 65531 HEX 65532 ASCII 65533 and FLOAT 65534 2 3 2 4 Changing Screen Properties 1 Right click anywhere on a base window 2 Click Screen Property Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Delete Guide Line H gt Rotate or Flip gt Align gt Order gt Group Ungroup Select AIl Ctrl A Zoom gt Screen Property Grid Setting Position Scale Change Fit window to Shape Max size Insert the selected shapes to active graphic library 49 3 Set the following properties Screen property Category Ea Gen
379. pen the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Size Set the data size for the object 16 or 32 bit Set the data type for the object Signed decimal Unsigned decimal or BCD Window Type Set the type of window to invoke Set to open a new window on top of the existing window Overlap Set to overlay a new window in an area where no figures or objects exist on the base window so that the base window can still be seen 396 397 Display Window Set the method for invoking the window Indirect Invoke the window based on the device value Case Invoke the window when the condition is met Placement Set the location where the new window will appear on the screen Top Left Center Top Right Bottom Right or Bottom Left For example if you set the location to Top Left the window will appear in the upper left corner of the object B lt Window gt lt E g Top Left gt Nores e Ifthe data size or type are changed the input and display condition are deleted e Ifthe Display Window setting changes to Indirect the input and display condition are deleted e Ifthe input window area exceeds the borders of the basic window it is not displayed in the XGT Panel In this case the project download will not start If the window object area partially extends beyond the right or bottom of the basic window the portion of the o
380. performed when the value falls within the OF adma R Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of teense Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you select the range condition specify the range 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Exp Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 517 4 3 14 Data List Editor Object The Data List Editor Object interprets PLC device values continuously and displays them ina table for editing This section describes available settings for the data list editor object e Basic The basic settings for data list editor include the following Data List Edit a sia Conton Device a Device Yooo Display Keypad Optio size 16bits bd Text Extended No of Edit Device a Display Format Numeric Format Unsigned DEC No of Display Digits 2 No of Decimal Digts 0 m Description Control Device Specify a device to monitor values Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify
381. play type and number of the object 2002 The device address in incorrect The device type is incorrect or the device address has not been set Set or change the device address 2004 You have used a deleted or wrong text table The specified text table does not exist Specify another text table 2005 You have selected a script that has not been set The specified script does not exist Specify another text table 2007 The XX font you selected cannot express all the headings set as YY The font you selected cannot be found or the font you selected does not support the double byte characters you used in the heading You must re install the font select a font that supports the characters in the heading or change the heading 2008 There is an object or picture The object is outside the boundaries of the 152 Error Message 153 outside the screen area How to Resolve the Error window Relocate the object or adjust the size until it fits within the window boundaries 2009 The XX font you selected has The font you selected cannot be found You must not been installed inthe system re install the font 2011 The image you specified is not The specified image type is not supported Delete available the image or select an image type that is supported 2012 The standard device exists inthe The variable type is incorrect in the script Chan
382. ps change based on the on off state word lamps change based on the text value and N state lamps change based on up to five device statuses ees e falamp object is not connected to a PLC device the lamp is not displayed on the XGT Panel e Do not overlay lamps on top of other objects They may not be displayed correctly 4 3 1 1 Bit Lamp The form of a bit lamp changes based on the on off state of the connected device This section describes available settings for bit lamp objects e Basic The basic settings for bit lamp objects include the following Bit Lamp 4 General 2 Device Ka EEE Display Text Extended Description Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Description Enter a description for the object e Display The display settings for bit lamp objects include the following General Transparent BG Image Image Type Basic f Not Change Color Pattem s On Off Same Image amp Change Color Pattem in On Off Text CJ Extended Library Open Pattern2 Blink Not Use Transparent BG Image Click the checkbox to make the image background transparent You cannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time On Cli
383. ptions on the editing area 189 LSIs 2 Click Tool Register Object Caption to Text Table Automatically Tool Communication Window Toolbox Help Cross Reference D f Find in Active screen gt Replace in Active screen G Find Replace All amp Memory Statistics i Data Check V Fe Script Check Find All Scripts Previous Screen Q Next Screen W eal Enter a name for the text table select an editing language and click OK The text table will appear in the Project pane Add Text Automatically New text table name Select edit language You can double click the name of the text table in the Project pane to open and edit the translations of the object captions B 1 Text Table_01 Text Table_ 02 Text tables can contain up to 1 000 entries When you attempt to add more than 1 000 WN I entries a new text table is created with an incremental suffix _01 _02 etc LS Is 190 4 1 3 Logging You can use up to 32 logs to record and save device values to a file when specified conditions are met Logging can be used to trace device trends You can view the logs in the Logging Viewer or Logging Trend Graph object Periodical Logging Logging starts on a specified schedule and is repeated Time periodically as specified in the schedule The log can repeat up to 100 times When the repetition timer reaches th
384. put Bar b Graphic Library H Screen Thumbnails 2 Inthe Object Library pane click an object category t Library IX g Library gl OBJ ALARM AND LOGGING fa OBJ_KEYPAD EP OBJ_LAMP fp OBJ_PUSHDOWN_SWITCH M OBJ_ROTARY_SWITCH JE OBJ_SLIDE_SWITCH frei ies 3 Inthe Object List drag and drop an object onto the editing area Object Library ax B 1 g Library ijl OBJ_ALARM AND LOGGING be i OBJ_PUSHDOWN_SWITCH M OBJ_ROTARY_SWITCH JE OBJ_SLIDE_SWITCH wll OBJ TOGGLE SWITCH gold keyGold keyGoldL keyGoldLset keyGoldS keyHorizBl 4 Double click the image and change the properties if necessary 5 When you are finished changing properties click OK Nore M When you drag an object to the editing area the object is created in the default size The default sizes of objects vary 61 2 3 4 4 Managing Object Libraries Learn how to manage object libraries Both the system and user object libraries can be managed but only the user object library can be edited For more information about inserting or editing objects refer to lt 2 3 4 3 Inserting Objects from the Object Library gt and lt 2 3 5 Editing Objects gt System Object Includes seven categories of objects such as lamps and Library switches and cannot be edited User Object Library You can register or delete objects The objects are saved in the current project and
385. r from the XGT Panel For more information refer to lt 2 6 1 Transferring to an XGT Panel gt 3 4 19 Cannot Retrieve Backup Data from an XGT Panel Two possible causes exist for this situation e The connection settings are incorrect Ensure that you have selected the correct type of XGT Panel and connection method For more information refer to lt 2 6 1 Transferring to an XGT Panel gt e No backup data exists on the XGT Panel In this case you cannot upload data from the XGT Panel 3 4 20 I Cannot Select the Path of a Removable Drive Two possible causes exist for this situation e A removable drive is not connected Connect a removable drive such as a USB drive or a CF card to the XGT Panel or computer and try again e The removable drive is not recognized Remove and reconnect the removable drive and try again If this does not solve the problem try updating the driver for the removable driver Refer to the manufacturer s website for more details 3 4 21 Cannot Download a Project to a Removable Drive Three possible causes exist for this situation e There is insufficient memory available on the removable drive Delete files on the removable drive to make at least 10MB of free space available or use another removable drive Then try again e Write protection is enabled on the removable drive Disable write protection and try again e The removable drive was disconnected improperly Reconnect the removable drive and
386. ration result BN amesema LSis 470 Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you select the range condition specify the range 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Exp Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 471 4 3 8 7 Logging Scatter Graph The following sections describe available options for logging scatter graph objects e Basic The basic settings for the logging scatter graph objects include the following Logging Scatter General Type of Scatter Y Scatter MaxMin Line and Dot Scatter Basic Setting Alarm Display 9 Extended Group ID Start Device Type S ZE 16bits Unsig Description pO OK Cancel 472 Type of Scatter Set the type of scatter chart e Y Scatter Shows device addresses including the logging start device in order along the X axis The data displays in a loop so you do not need to designate the minimum or maximum value 40 30 20 M0000 M0001 M0002 M0003 M0004 e X Y Scatter For two continuous device addresses from starting device sho
387. rding file or video capture file if the total number of file exceeds 1 000 delete the oldest file so that the total number becomes less than 1 000 3 1 Resolving Error Codes Found in the Results Pane The following table lists error codes that appear in the Results pane The errors and suggestions for resolving them are listed in order by code number Error Message 1000 There is no background image How to Resolve the Error The image set for the background does not exist Choose another image for the background 1003 You have selected script XX which has not been set The selected script does not exist Replace the script with another one or create and register a new script 1004 You cannot insert more than 8 window objects in a window More than 8 window objects have been registered Delete window objects until 8 or fewer remain 1005 The window size has exceeded the maximum size of the HMI window A window cannot be larger than the dimensions supported by the XGT Panel type specified Set the window size to fit within the maximum dimensions allowed by the XGT Panel type 2000 The set image information is incorrect The specified image has been deleted or the file extension is incorrect Select another image or select an image type that is supported 2001 Number XX of Display YY is incorrect The display specified does not exist Change the dis
388. re to do so may result in electric shock or erroneous operation e Do not charge disassemble heat short circuit solder or otherwise attempt to open or repair the battery Mishandling the battery may result in overheating discharge of corrosive chemicals fire or injury e Do not disassemble the PCB from the product case or modify the product Doing so may result in fire electric shock or erroneous operation e Use wireless and radio devices at least 30cm away from controllers Failure to do so may result in erroneous operation e When disposing of the product or battery adhere to all applicable local and federal regulations Treat the product or battery as industrial waste and contact the appropriate authority for disposal instructions 628 629 1 N communication with multiple protocols 142 with RS 485 144 acquisition time table 211 ActiveSync connection 134 171 auxiliary settings 32 bar graph object 420 barcode reader See extended controller base screen 45 basic recipe 203 bit lamp 257 bit message 332 bit part object 404 bit switch 277 bit window object 392 change screen switch 294 closed graph object 443 common data 174 control statement 220 controller drivers supporting N 1 communication 149 data check 115 device finding and replacing 119 121 viewing cross references 123 device address expression 224 Device Map 116 display change script 218 download project See project transfe
389. right c 2004 2006 2 f All nahts reserved S f f istus Attp Aww Its biz k amp Function Name GetLastError T amp int num 0 Executed g int opnd A 10 opnd_B 0 Executed 10 11 num opnd_ opnd_B Division by o error 12 2 PAH WTO num Gan Not executed a FRROR Script execution resumes here oi 16 j int Error GetLastError Executed 17 Script errors and explanations are shown in the Output tab at the bottom of the XP Builder window You can add single line or multi line comments to your scripts To add a single line comment enter two backslashes in front of the comment To add a multi line comment bracket the comment with backslashes and asterisks as shown in the following example You can also add a single line comment at the end of a line of code I This is a single line comment This is line 1 of a multi line comment This is line 2 of a multi line comment This is line 3 of a multi line comment 4 2 1 1 Understanding Script Commands Learn how to write commands in scripts The following table describes the control statements and operators available for programming scripts Command Expression e Control Statements Description if if Condition This command performs the f statement if true a value other Statement than o as a result of judgment of the condition and shifts to the location next to the stateme
390. rn value int The swapped data value int nSrcData The data value to be swapped Parameter 1 4 2 3 9 Understanding Data Conversion Functions The following table describes properties for the data conversion functions Parameters int NSTC 0X1234 number FALSE is ASCII2HEX Convert ASCII data to BOOL If the number is hexadecimal data beyond the range of the buffer FALSE is Example returned char buf 4 1234 Parameter 1 char pSrcBuffer The int nResult om source buffer to be converted ASCIIZHEX amp buf o nResult Parameter 2 int pRetValue The 4 variable that will store The value of nResult is eas Tavs converted 0X1234 int nCount The number of bytes to be converted 1 8 HEX2ASCII Convert hexadecimal data Return value BOOL If the number of to ASCII data data to be converted is not between 1 and 8 or Example the size of pDstBuffer char buf 4 is lower than that HEX2ASCII nSrc amp buf o 4 251 LSIs returned int nValue The value to be converted Parameter 2 char pDstBuffer The destination buffer that will store the data to be converted Parameter 3 int nCount Number of bytes to be converted 1 8 Parameters ASCII2DEC Convert ASCII data to Return value BOOL If the number is decimal data beyond the range of the buffer FALSE is Example returned char buf 4 1234 Parameter 1 char pSrcBuffer The int nResult source buffer to be converted
391. rop down list or entering a value directly in to the field You can set a ratio of 1 600 Change the Property of Text Table Click to use different color and font properties for the text than what is specified in the text table This option is active only when you import text from the text table Color Seta font color Font Style Set a font style bold italic strikeout or underline You can apply more than one option at atime Horizontal Alignment Set the horizontal alignment Left Center or Right Vertical Alignment Set the vertical alignment Top Middle or Bottom 2 6 2 7 4 3 2 Switch Objects Switches execute one or more functions based on the switch type Five switch types are available bit word change screen special and multi Bit switches control on off states word switches execute scripts or change values change screen switches change windows in the XGT Panel interface special switches perform storage related actions and multi switches carry out multiple functions 4 3 2 1 Bit Switch Bit switches control on off states of bit devices This section describes available settings for bit switch objects e Basic The basic settings for bit switches include the following Bit Switch mm gt Ez Device Ka EEE Copy to Lamp Display Action Type i Momentary Atemative Extended W Use Lamp Condition f Bit Device Ra FEE Copy to Main 0 Word Device Size
392. rring to XGT Panel error code 152 error message 161 Ethernet connection 101 130 171 extended controller 34 figure drawing 53 inserting 53 file extensions 14 file recipe 203 flow alarm 174 207 fonts installing exporting 14 global script 218 settings 31 graphic library managing 87 graphic library pane 88 graphic list 88 history alarm 174 209 image inserting 84 library See graphic library replacing 85 setting as background 86 interface XGT Panel simulating 110 interface XP Builder customizing 7 viewing options 78 key window settings 27 keyboard shortcuts 10 languages changing 28 local script 218 log 174 191 logging See log logging scatter graph 472 logging trend graph 459 managing a panel 612 managing an XGT Panel downloading projects 588 installing an XGT Panel 609 updating projects 592 uploading projects 590 wiring an XGT Panel 615 managing backup files 598 menu options 11 meter graph object 436 mobile device center 171 multi switch 323 multi channel 142 multi drop 144 N 1 communication 146 N State lamp 270 numeric display object 362 numeric input object 344 object alarm navigator 513 animation 418 arranging 72 clock 527 data list editor 518 datalist 500 drawing 57 editing 69 embedded screen 531 file recipe editor 523 graph 420 history alarm viewer 491 inserting 53 inserting from library 60 lamp 257 logging viewer 506 memo pad
393. s To add an alarm group 1 Inthe Project pane right click History Alarm Delete Paste Property Rename 2 Click Insert An Alarm Group tab will appear in the editing area Group name Group ID 16777215 Display Name From Text table No fo Preview f Manually input Synchronize manually input name with History Alarm Group Name of Project tree 3 Specify the following properties for the alarm group Group Name The name of the alarm group Group ID The ID number of the alarm group Display Name Click From Text Table to import a group name from a text table or Manually Input to input a group name manually If you import a name from a text table set the No value to identify the correct string in the table The group name will appear in the Preview field Click the checkbox next to Synchronize manually input name to update the alarm group name in the Project pane 4 Reference To create a history alarm 1 In the Project pane right click a history alarm group F System Alarm ee History Alarm bee aa Alarm Grou zm Property Mm Rename As Start Screen 2 Click Insert An Alarm List tab will appear in the editing area Name Alarm List 0 I Show current selected alarm O m Reference Device Count of reference device 0 Data type Bit v Send E mail No l
394. s from MWooo to MW100 If statement is false offsets 10 word values from MWooo to MW2o00 ay Return value BOOL If the device address is exceeded FALSE will be returned Parameter 1 DEVICE src The source device to copy from Parameter 2 int nSrcOffset Offset of the source device destination device Parameter 4 int nDstOffset oo Offset of the destination device Parameter 5 int nCopyCount The number of devices SetData 245 Input values to a device Example Return value BOOL If the device address is exceeded int nLoop for nLoop 0 nLoop lt 1o nLoop SetData W MW1oo nLoop 0 Set o in devices from MW4100 to MW109 Parameters FALSE will be returned Parameter 1 Parameter 2 env ales value DEVICE src The source device int nSrcOffset Offset of the source device GetData e When copying data the source and destination devices must be of the same type Retrieve and add values from a device Example int nLoop nValue for nLoop 0 nLoop lt 1o0 nLoop i GetData W MW100 nLoop amp nValue nValue nValue f Retrieve and add values from MW4100 to MW109 Otherwise communication will fail Return value Parameter 1 DEVICE src The source device Parameter 2 Parameter 3 BOOL If the device address is exceeded FALSE will returned be int nSrcOffset Offset of the source device
395. s displayed as lower bound line color Max Dot Min You can set the color of a dot to be applied when it is more Dot or less than the warning upper bound of logging distribution graph If the device value exceeds warning upper bound it is displayed as upper bound dot color On the other hand if it is less than warning upper bound it is displayed as lower bound dot color 477 e Display The display settings for the logging scatter graph object include the following Logging Scatter General C Transparent BG Frame Display Basic Max Min Transparent Border Border Color No of Display Data Line and Dot Hiii A Alarm The Y Scatter is not setted iy W Plate Color E Bitended g Starting point Location Left Bottom Library Open Scale No of Horizontal Point 3 X axis Height 16 Scale Color No of Vertical Point 3 4 Y axis Width 16 E Library Click to select a background image for the graph from a library Open Click to locate background image for the graph on your computer Transparent BG Set whether or not to make the background of the graph transparent Transparent Border Set whether or not to use a transparent border No of Display data It fixes the number of dots to be displayed at a screen e X Y Scatter indicates a dot as two device values e Y Scatter indicates respectively each device value with a dot Frame Display
396. s 4 2013 03 29 Line 1 21 31 2013 03 30 Line 2 22 32 2013 03 31 Line 3 23 33 2013 04 01 Line 4 24 34 I If the total object area is greater than the width of the rows the part that exceeds the width of the rows is shown in gray Alarm Navigator Alarm Navigator Viewer Line Down Set to move up or down a line in the alarm search results when the switch is activated Alarm Navigator Viewer Line Up LSiIs 306 Logging Trend Next Log Trend Data View the next log You can set the number of logs to show For example if the number is set to 8 the graph will display the trend for the next 8 logs Current logging data Moving direction Previous Log Trend Data View the previous log You can set the number of logs to show For example if the number is set to 8 the graph will display the trend for the previous 8 logs The First Log Trend Data The Last Log Trend Data View the first or last logged data 307 LSIs Memo Pad Change Memo Mode Set to switch the memo mode when the switch is activated In active mode memo input is allowed In non active mode only memo viewing is allowed When switching from active to non active mode any unsaved memo inputs are discarded Then the first saved memo is displayed Delete All Memo Set to delete all or selected memos The third bit of the memo pad status device indicates whether or not the Delete Memo memos were del
397. s P100 XP Builder reads the value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value If the offset value is 10 for example then the referenced device address is P110 Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary 416 Display Trigger The display trigger settings for word part objects include the following Word Part General W Use Action Condition Extended T E Detail w fe Bj i Gj E f i Bi PE Display Trigger Bit On Bit Of Range Multi Bit Device Device Range Size 1 bits Type Unsigned DEC o NOP 0 Multi Bit No of Bit Device i Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the hee specified range Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of multiple devices is met Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can
398. s from the graphic library 2 3 4 1 Drawing Figures You can draw figures such as lines circles and rectangles To draw a figure 1 Inthe Toolbox pane click Figure ToolBox x Figure Line Circle Fie gt Chord 3 Multiline 22 Palygoan _ Ellipse C Rectangle RoundRect T Text Te Image mo Scale 2 Click a figure type 53 3 Click the editing area and specify options for the figure y Type T Description Line e To draw multiple lines click multiple points and then double Polyline click to insert the figure Double click e To delete part of a polyline press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking a point e To drawa line drag the line on the editing area If you want draw a straight line press and hold the Shift key while dragging Circle e To draw a perfect circle or square press and hold the Shift key Pie while dragging Chord e When drawing circles pies or chords draw a circle first then Ellipse click the circle to mark the starting point Rectangle RoundRect Draw the circle again until you complete the circle pie or chord 54 Description lt Pie gt lt Chord gt e To draw an ellipse rectangle or roundrect click and draw the figure Polygon e Todrawa polygon click multiple points and then double click to insert the figure Double click Click e To delete part o
399. s of objects but not to the frames The frames are different for each image Refer the following examples RRB E RK F FE E m E BB Pattern iE IZ N BB ERP A a a mN ZNEEMRZ Frame RETR R Pattern40 Pattern Frame Pattern PEERED A Z Frame PETRER Pattern40 Pattern FG Color Set a color for the foreground pattern Pattern BG Color Set a color for the background pattern Frame Color Seta frame color LSis 316 e Text The text settings for special switch objects include the following Special Switch General I Use Caption From Text Table eal i On 0f Copy Font Ey Tahoma Delete On Caption Size 12 Width Ratio 100 Basic Font Style M Bold M talic Strikeout Underline Horizontal Alignment Left Center C Right Vertical Alignment f Top Middle C Bottom Use Caption Click the checkbox to use a text caption with the object When you select this option you can input text from a Text Table On Click to configure options for the object in the on state You must input the text in a text table Off Click to configure options for the object in the off state You must input the text in a text table From Text Table Click the checkbox to add text from a text table The Text Table option will be activated and the text input area will close Add the required text to the text table before editing the object Yo
400. s switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the E Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation AN tettetmiipecometonct o Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you select the range condition specify the range Size 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 343 4 3 4 Numeric Text Objects Numeric and text objects show values from devices or input values from keypads to devices Four types of numeric text objects are available as described by the following table Numeric Input Enters and displays the value in the word device connected to the PLC in XGT Panel Numeric Displays the word device data connected to the PLC in numbers in XGT Display Text Input Writes the entered texts in the word device in ASCII code Text Display Displays the text recognizing the data saved in the word device as the ASCII code value 4 3 4 1 Numeric Input You can use numeric input devices to enter values in word devices This section de
401. s the projects and creates file backups these files can be mixed with Project A s backed up files In this situation the operator should classify Project A s and Project B s backup files by their download time 5 6 2 Managing Memory for Backups If there is insufficient memory in the external storage sources data is deleted or backup processes stop depending on XP Builder s configuration Using XP Builder to delete the oldest data for backup click Common Project Property Setting gt Storage Settings set the Backup Storage location for each file and then click the checkbox next to Delete old file if disk full Backup Storage Alarm data CF card C Delete old file if disk full Logging data USB memory Delete old file if disk full Recipe data CF card Delete old file if disk full Capture image USB memory Delete old file it disk full Memo file SD card Delete old file if disk full Video file SO card Delete old file if disk full video capture image SD card Delete old file if disk full When you backup the file by erasing the oldest files e If there is insufficient backup space look for the earliest Year Month subdirectories in Logging Recipe and Screen Image directories When looking at Logging look for subdirectories under the current back up logging number For example if Logging number 2 is on the current back up list but does not have data in the file s directory data in logging n
402. s types of data can be returned or expressed by script functions Variables can be added to data types as well For more information about variables refer to lt 4 2 1 4 Understanding Variables gt The following table describes the data types used by scripts in XP Builder Description Data range Example Boolean Expresses either True or False oto1 bool bState 2 bit e The abbreviation bool true comes first followed by the variable name e Initializes as true or false Charact e Expresses a character oto 255 char cChar a er 8 bit Short e This data type uses less 32768 to short wValue 16 bit memory than an integer 32767 10 e Toinitialize variables place or the assignment operator o to 7FFF after the variable name and specify a value Integer e This data type is a signed 2147483648 int nValue 100 32 bit integer This means that the to 2147483647 data must be an integer and or can be a positive number a o to 7FFFFFFF negative number or o e To declare more than one variable place the abbreviation int first followed by the variables separated by commas e Initialization of a variable assigns the initial value Place the assignment operator after the variable name and specify a value Unsigne To initialize variables place the o to 65535 unsigned short dShort assignment operator afterthe or wValue 10 16 bit variable name
403. scribes available settings for numeric input objects e Basic The basic settings for numeric input objects include the following General Display Text Input Case Display Case Operation Extended Device Size 16bits Display Format Numeric Format Unsigned DEC No of Display Digits 5 No of Decimal Digits 0 s Use Scaling Min of Dev Value 0 gt Min of Inp Valve 0 Max of Dew Value 10 Maxof Inp Value 10S Use Cipher Description LSis 344 Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the 345 keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Size Set a data size 16 bit or 32 bit If you change the data size of an existing object input and display conditions will be deleted Display Format Set the display format Numeric Format No of Display Digits No of Decimal Digits Set the number format Signed decimal Unsigned decimal Octal Hexadecimal Binary BCD or float Set how many digits to display up to 64 If the number of digits is less than the capacity of the device empty spaces are filled with placeholders If the device value cannot be displayed in BCD format it is N M B expressed as Set how many places to put to the right of the decimal poin
404. series of standards for serial binary single ended data and control signals connecting between data terminal equipment DTE and data circuit terminating equipment DCE The maximum throughput for 622 an RS232 connection is 115Kbps RS485 a standard for defining the electrical characteristics of drivers and receivers for use in balanced digital multipoint systems RS485 offers data transmission speeds of 35 Mbit s up to 10 m and 100 kbit s at 1200 M screen the physical component of a computer monitor or XGT panel display script a small program written for a command interpreter or another scripting language Servo servomechanism a device used for control of a desired operation through the use of feedback the term correctly applies only to systems where the feedback or error correction signals help control mechanical position speed or other parameters token a credential used to control usage rights the node that holds the token has the current usage rights toolbar part of the XP Builder interface where menu shortcuts are designated by icons and buttons unsigned decimal a system for expressing negative numbers vector image an image based on paths or strokes for the representation of geometrical primitives such as points lines curves and shapes or polygons because vector based images are not made up of a specific number of dots they can be scaled to a larger size without lo
405. set device For example if the starting device address is P100 XP Builder reads the value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value If the offset value is 10 for example then the referenced device address is P110 Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary 426 427 Display Trigger The display trigger settings for the bar graph object include the following General W Use Action Condition a Extended Type Detail f Bit On C Bit OF C Range C Multi Bit a Display Trigger Device Device Range Size zi Unsigned DEC Multi Bit No of Bit Device Cancel Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the hale specified range Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result _ of multiple devices is met Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to
406. shown below 123456 Connect pin1 to ping and pin2 to ping Pin Name Function 1 TX Send Data 2 TX Send Data 3 RX Receive Data A RX Receive Data 5 SG Signal Ground 6 FG Frame Ground e These connections illustrations are based on iXP series For more illustrations about XP series refer to XP series XGT Panel user s manual 573 LSIs 5 2 7 Checking SD Card You can check SD card information including folder name total space used and available memory To view SD card information touch SD Card Diagnostics Screen Touch Backup Memory P Flash Memory OCF Card OSD Card USB Memory Goto MainMenu HMIManager C0 Card Spec Folder Name SO Storage Total Space 1938 13 MBytes Used Space O26 25 MBytes Available Space 1011 88 MBytes Write Operation SUCCESS eee d e When an SD card is inserted and an error message ReadDisk Information Error is displayed reinsert the card If the error message repeats contact the A S center e This option is available only with iXP series LSiIs 574 5 2 8 Checking USB Memory You can check USB memory information including folder name total space used and available memory To view USB memory information touch USB Memory Diagnostics Screen Touch Backup Memory O Flash Memory OCF Card gt Serial OSD Card
407. sic recipe displays the data generated in XP Builder in order For example lt RCP 1 gt lt RCP2 gt and so on File Des Set to show the recipe file description The description of the file recipe is the title of the CSV file or the name of the edited recipe in XP Builder Description Enter a description for the object e Text The text settings for recipe navigator include following Recipe Navigator General Basi Font FT Tahoma Size 1 Font Style Bold talic Stikeout Underline Font Select a font from the drop down list Size Set a text size from the drop down list or enter a value directly into the field Color Set a font color Font Style Set a font style bold italic strikeout or underline You can apply more than one option at a time 916 Display Trigger The display trigger settings for recipe navigator include the following Recipe Navigator General if Use Action Condition qj Extended T Pa Display Trigger py f Bit On 0 Bit OF f Range C Muti Bit Device Device EEE Range Size 16bits Type Unsigned DEC o NOP 0 Multi Bit No of Bit Device Je Setting Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is
408. sing image quality window either the windows of the operating system MS Windows or the windows being created in XP builder does not refer to the screen the screen is part of the hardware e g the physical part of the XGT Panel display or the computer monitor word object an object in an XP builder project that is controlled by a word device XGs5ooo Simulator a simulator for testing project files before downloading them to an XGT panel the simulator allows for debugging or verification of project files A V audio video ASCII American standard code for information interchange BCD binary code decimal CF compact flash CMY cyan magenta yellow CMYK cyan magenta yellow black COM communications CPU central processing unit DEC decimal GIF graphic interchange format GUI graphical user interface H W hardware HEX hexadecimal used in device expressions to represent input IB used in device expressions to represent byte input IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IL intermediate language IP internet protocol IP ingress protection IW used in device expressions to represent word input JPEG joint photographic experts group LAN local area network LC liquid crystal display LSis 624 LD ladder diagram LED light emitting diode M metadata MPEG mov
409. sion as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 383 4 3 4 4 Text Display You can display text from a word device that is saved in ASCII code For example you can display four letters with the Moo device as the reference device as shown here Moo 4241 The Reference Device M00 M01 omo aas asco The data is read by word unit with the low byte of the device value read first and the high byte read next High byte Low byte High byte Low byte oae Low byte High byte Low byte High byte When you input the four letter ASCII code the value is displayed in the four bytes of the reading range from the device address This section describes available settings for text display objects 384 4 Reference e Basic The basic settings for text display objects include the following General Device ro ic Display Display Format Text Num of 7 4a ba Extended ite oN Use Data Byte Swap Display Type Device Vaue Description Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Display Format Set the display format e Num of Byte Set the number of characters to displa
410. splay Condition a vays Display Sort Oldest Latest Cont Add Delete All Mum Index Device Add Line Color Line Type g ioo Solid Logging Device Specify the following options for the logging device Set the data size of the device 16 bit or 32 bit You can change the data size only in the Logging data from the project pane Set the data form of the device signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float If you change the data type of an existing object the conditional statement will be deleted Sis 460 Upper Lower Limit Value Set the maximum and minimum values of the data to display The maximum and minimum values must be within the range supported by the device type Otherwise only the minimum or maximum value supported by the device will be displayed on Pi af PN a o 4 bd 6 I WL Device Set the specified device value as the maximum and minimum Value Constant Set the specified fixed value as the maximum and minimum Value Alarm Value Set whether or not to trigger an alarm if the data value exceeds the maximum or minimum limits Set the specified device value as the alarm limit Set the specified fixed value as the alarm limit Logging Group Set the number of the logging group which is set in the Logging TT Bit Device POOTOO Rising Edge 100 OD 00 00 10 Poo i
411. ssage 8001 Reading start device setting is not correct How to Resolve the Error The device has not been specified Specify the device in the recipe properties window 8002 Backup device setting is not correct The device has not been specified Specify the device in the recipe properties window 8003 The recipe numbering device setting is not correct The device has not been specified Specify the device in the recipe properties window 8004 The recipe block numbering device setting is not correct The device has not been specified Specify the device in the recipe properties window 8005 The recipe data transfer completion signal device setting Is not correct The device has not been specified Specify the device in the recipe properties window 8006 Recipe data transfer error display device setting is not correct The device has not been specified Specify the device in the recipe properties window 8007 Recipe device setting is not correct The device has not been specified Specify the device in the recipe properties window 8008 The maximum recipe setting size 63KB has been exceeded The sum of the specified recipes exceeds the maximum memory size Adjust the number of data blocks within the recipes to fit within the maximum size 8009 The recipe backup path has not been specified Set the recipe backup path in the recipe properties
412. ssword again to use the object Action Delay Set to delay the action triggered by the switch by a specified time Type Set the type of action delay On Delay When the switch is activated the action is performed after the delay time that you specify Press Twice When the switch is activated once a dialog box is invoked to allow the user to verify the operation When the switch is activated a second time the action is performed after the delay time that you specify Time Set the length of time for the action delay Offset in Write Operation Set to use the offset function Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary 329 e Lamp Condition The lamp condition settings for multi switch objects include the following MulttAction Switch General W Use Lamp Condition j Extended Detail Pe Lamp Condition Action Condition Bit i Bit Device Word Device 55 Size 16bits Type Unsigned DEC 0 NOP O Use Lamp Offset Use Lamp Condition If you want to control a lamp with a method other than simply turning it on when the switch is activated you can select a different action Type Select a condition for lamp control When the device state is on the
413. st downloaded to an XGT Panel this cannot be edited Version The version of the XP Builder software you can change this information to create a unique identifier for customized properties LS Is 20 21 LSis 2 2 2 2 Changing XGT Panel Settings Edit the XGT Panel and model type You can also set the connection method settings for connecting to controllers The options vary by the connection method To change XGT Panel settings edit the information in the appropriate field and click OK Storage Settings Global Script Settings Auwdliary Settings Extended Controller Settings Summary XGT Panel Settings Screen Settings Security Settings Key Window Settings Language Series EO 24 BIT color mode 7 RS 232C 5V power supply Model IXP80 TTA Add Controller Controller O Controller Settings Maker WSS v1 23 Product LSIS XGK UNK o Refer to manual Connection Property n RS232C Detail Settings Timeout 30 4 100ms Watto send Ons ms Retry count EE Use XG5000 simulator Program monitor XGT Panel Settings Description Series e Select an XGT Panel type The initial information is the same as you selected when you created the project e iXP series allow you to select color mode and power supply options as well Model Select a model number based on the XGT Panel type you selected 24 BIT Color Mode This mode is supported only by iXP series Se
414. st logging data The oldest data The logging type linked to logging trend graph is set as tracking mode circular buffer the data displayed at the current screen will be removed someday with continuous logging process Then the equipment updates a screen automatically and displays the oldest data Starting Point Location Set a starting point for the scales Left Bottom Right Bottom Left Top or Right Top 464 Data Order Specify the following options for the data order for example 8 10 10 8 20 20 8 30 30 8 40 40 8 50 5O e Latest gt Oldest Show data in order from most recent to oldest The starting point is on the left poor The Starting Point Location is on the right e Oldest gt Latest Show data in order from oldest to most recent The Starting Point Location is on the left The Starting Point Location is on the right aa Scale Specify the following options for the scale No of Horizontal Set the number of points on the X axis Point No of Vertical Point Set the number of points on theY axis 465 X axis Height Set the height of the X axis scale Y axis Width Set the width of the Y axis scale Scale Color Set the color of the scales e Reference Ling The reference line settings for the logging trend graph object include the following Graph Logging Trend Y General Basic Use Reference a a Num of Reference Line i
415. st or entering a value directly in to the field You can set a ratio of 1 600 Multilingual Set an option for a second language ASCII If you select a language other than English you cannot change the font Fonts for other languages are displayed as set in the Language option of the Project Property settings Text Plate Color Click to set the background color of the figures at XGT Panel 388 Space Set the indent from the margin of the object If you select left alignment you can set the left indent If you select right alignment you can set the right indent Font Style Set a font style bold italic strikeout or underline You can apply more than one option at atime Horizontal Alignment Set the horizontal alignment Left Center or Right e Detail The detail settings for text display objects include the following Text Display General 5 Offset Extended n Device 334 Display Trigge Display Mode Transparent Offset Click the checkbox to use the offset function You can offset the device address based on the value of the offset device For example if the starting device address is P100 XP Builder reads the value from the offset device and offsets the address by that value If the offset value is 10 for example then the referenced device address is P110 Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to sp
416. start or stop recording When the device is Device turned On recording starts and when the device is turned Off recording stops Status Device Set a word device to control video recording Consecutive devices will include the following information e For devices HWoooo to HWooo0 4 Status of video recording 37 LSIs e Save Settings Description Error codes during recording Video recording file number Video capture file number Video capture error codes Video recording status o bit On when recording ave S 1 bit On when playing the video ate NN d 1 H 1 2 bit e On when exceeding the maximum HWoo000 2 number of saved videos e It becomes Off in the following situations When starting the recording process When starting to collect the video file list When deleting video files from the storage device 3 bit e On when exceeding the maximum HWoo00 3 number of video capture files that can be saved there is not enough free space in the backup route or total number of files is 1000 However if you have set to delete old files when there is not enough storage space On will not appear e Turns Off in the following situations When creating the video capture file When starting to collect the video capture file list When deleting video capture files from the storage device 4 bit e On when an error occurs
417. stop the program monitor 1 Touch XGT Property gt XGT Panel Setting 2 Touch the checkbox next to Program Monitor 4 4 2 2 Monitoring Programs with a Special Switch Object To start the Program Monitor with a special switch object 1 Create a special switch object in XP Builder and transfer the project to the XGT Panel For more information about special switch objects refer to lt 2 3 4 Inserting Figures or Objects gt and lt 4 3 2 4 Special Switch gt 2 Onthe XGT Panel access the window that contains the special switch 3 Touch the special switch to activate the Program Monitor ee While the Program Monitor is active objects on the current screen cannot be monitored but scripts and logging functions will work normally 4 4 2 3 Selecting Programs to Monitor Once you activate the Program Monitor you must select which programs to monitor To select programs 1 Inthe Program Monitor window touch a program from the program list and then touch Select Program Manager File analog set temp set E C in ber graph LSiIs 542 2 To begin monitoring the program touch Mon The LD program will appear in the monitoring area of the window analog_set 620 Steps 0 XGK CPUH R wee x Pecteleteca 5 hi F ul U J 3 Ifthe command is longer than the window can display you can double tap PUT to the right of the command to expand it Tap C
418. storage path will be displayed as shown below e USB USB Storage XP_ Software e CF Storage Card XP_Software e SD SD Storage XP_Software 4 Touch OK The update will start ees e When updating XGT Panel software do not turn off the device or disconnect the external storage source as it may interrupt the update and create faults Do not delete or move any subdirectories unless there are copies held on external storage sources Deleting or moving subdirectories may create faults e Only remove external storage sources when the safe removal switch has been used and the removal lamp has been turned off Unsafe removal of storage sources may result in the device being unable to be recognized e When reconnecting storage sources wait at least 3 seconds after removing the storage source Reconnecting storage sources too soon may result in the device being unable to be recognized 593 5 5 4 Select a USB Storage Device When multiple USB devices are connected to the XGT Panel you must select a device for uploading downloading or backing up projects You can change your selection at any point during a project To select a USB storage device 1 Inthe XGT Panel main menu touch Storage Function Settings Diagnostics PLC Information Update XGT Panel gt Storage Function Ver 1 30 B 008 2 Touch Select USB Storage Function Project Download Project Upload
419. sult of NN aeea Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you select the range condition specify the range Constants are based on device size Size 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Click to designate the expression as conditional Molti Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 926 4 Reference 4 3 16 Clock Object This section describes available settings for the clock object 2013 0425 13 14 56 e Basic The basic settings for the clock object include the following General Date Time Date Time gt Display yyYy MM DD F Display Day Text Extended Time HH MM 55 l I Zero A 2012 14 12 21 54 44 Logging Trend Clock Most Recent Time Oldest Time Cursor Time Description Format Set the data format Date Set the date format Time Set the time format Display Day Set whether or not to show the day of the week Zero Fill If you have selected right justification select this option to insert zeroes 0 before the number Preview Shows a preview of the data format 527 LSis
420. t Initialize the buffer with a designated value Example char src 9 Memset amp src o o 10 Parameters Return value Parameter 1 Parameter 2 char byData Value to be initialized BOOL If the number is beyond the range of the buffer FALSE is returned char pSrcData The source buffer to be copied int nDataSize The number of data to be initialized char number Memcmp Compare two buffers to each other Example char src 9 123456789 dst 4 3456 int nResult Memcmp amp src 2 amp dst o 4 amp nResult Return value Parameter 1 Parameter 2 BOOL If the number is beyond the range of the buffer FALSE is returned char pBufferz buffer 1 char pBuffer2 buffer 2 int nDataSize The number of data to be compared char number int nResult If the two buffers are the same 1 is returned If they are different o is returned SwapWord Swap upper and lower word data values of WORD data Example int nSrc 0x1234 nResult nResult SwapWord nSrc The value of nResult is OX3412 Return value int The swapped data value int nSrcData The Parameter 1 data value to be swaped LSiIs 250 SwapDWord Swap upper and lower word data values of f D WORD data Example int nSrc 0x12345678 nResult nResult SwapDWord nSrc The value of nResult is 0x56781234 Parameters Retu
421. t amp Local Disk C Folder Computer Make New Folder LSis 140 OOOO 5 Select Backup data You can click the checkboxes in the list to specify which types of data to transfer Upload Connect to Ethernet 192 168 0 1 2143 Settings File path Pe Browse Project file Refresh M Logging H USB Storage Logging w 1 200001 01 fF 3 e 01 00 fF USB Storage 4 Alarm 200902 10 fF Recipe Capture Image D Memo n DI viden 4 a 6 Click Upload 7 If necessary enter a communication password for the XGT Panel and click OK In XP Builder the transfer progress will be shown in the output window Enter password Receiving project file gt B Requesting the device information Logging alarm and recipe data are stored in CSV format Memos and screen captures are saved in BMP format Videos are saved in AVI format and video capture images are saved in JPEG format 141 2 7 Configuring Advanced Communication Settings XP Builder supports several communication types to allow for flexible controller and panel configurations This section describes the communication types available Multiple controllers can be monitored from a single XGT Panel The XP series panels support up to 4 connection numbers 0 3 and the iXP series panels support up to 16 connection numbers 0 15 for different types
422. t 3 MultiCopy Vv tbs 7 a F S ioe wi ALARM AND LOGGI f 350 iz Delete All Shift Del F itig Delete Al Delete KEYPAD Grouping gt LAMP SEE PUSHDOWN_SWITG eg Rotate or Flip gt ROTARY_SWITCH Align gt SLIDE_SWITCH Order gt TOGGLE_SWITCH ae Make Same Size gt ga Width Center in Page gt Height gt Space Evenly EA Both Snap to grid R Glue gt Sy 1 Fe First Point As Center x mt s F Nudge W gt F Position Scale Change Z l 7 Fit window to Max shape size J a ty I 76 The objects are all resized the same To space objects evenly 1 Select multiple objects 2 Click Edit Space Evenly Across or Down KG XP Builder C Users hs Desktop aa xpd Project Edit View Common Tool Communication Window ja p o Undo Align top Ctrl Z L a ealta 4 op qX Delete Alt Delete Ly j BET a Cut Ctrl X wig ot REBEL Copy Ctrl C rai n _ a 2 lg paste ahv lE e gt Project amp MultiCopy V a aS a Me Select All Ctrl A E nsa ALARM AND LOGGI Delete All Shift Delete f q i id KEYPAD Grouping gt LAMP oS S _PUSHDOWN_SWITC Eg Rotate or Flip P ROTARY_SWITCH Align gt SLIDE_SWITCH Order gt TOGGLE_SWITCH ee Make Same Size gt Center in Page gt Space Evenly gt ef Across i Snap to grid Down F Glue b I 1 AB First Point As Center X Fa h b 3 5 Nudge W E Position Scale Change Z 7 Fit
423. t Controls objects and functions No limitation with program commands Sound Emits sounds fromthe XGT Panel 512 174 175 LSis 4 1 1 Tags You can use tags to perform various functions Tags can be input anywhere a device address can be input and when you change the value for a tag all devices with the same tag have the same change applied at once Object Set the device address using the tag when you set the object Flow Alarm Set the device address using the tag when you set the flow alarm HistoryAlarm Set the tag to supervise the history alarm When you set the viewing mode as consecutive the tag is expressed as tag name number Recipe Recipes are expressed as tag name number Etc A tag is available everywhere a device can be input The tag setting is not possible in the project properties information To create a tag 1 In the Project pane double click Tag This will open a Tag tab in the editing area B 1 Script_0000 History Alarm Property Alarm Group AlarmListO Text Table_01 Tag 1 Tag Group No Device Type Address Description Default 1 Default ae _ Default 3 Default e Default 5 Default 2 Inthe Tag Group tree click the Default tag group System tags cannot be edited 3 Inthe tag list set the tag name device type address and a description for the tag Numbers A name cannot begin with a number e g 3ABCD Special Character The o
424. t simultaneously scripts are executed based on the priority that you specify Project Property x Summary XGT Pane Settings Screen Settings Security Settings Key Window Settings Language Storage Settings Global Script Settings m Global Script 7s He ee Up Auxiliary Settings Extended Controller Settings oe fo oF BeYel a are Description Name Set a script name Device Set a bit device that meets the conditions required to execute the script Type Choose a trigger type for executing the script Rising edge or Falling Edge Insert Delete Modify Click to insert delete or modify global scripts Up Down Specify the execution priority for when two or more conditions are met simultaneously 2 2 2 9 Changing Auxiliary Settings You can set the printing direction locations for saving screen captures and properties for the system alarm display Summary XGT Panel Settings Screen Settings Securty Settings Key Window Settings Language Storage Settings Global Script Settings Auxiliary Settings Extended Controller Settings Print Direction m E mail Property Direction Verti Use E mail function y ea Alarm Window Alarm window pop up Communication Error Display M Show communication eror window i Auxiliary Settings Description Printing Dire
425. t the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 930 531 4 3 17 Embedded Screen Object You can use the embedded screen object to open other windows on the base window You can insert a frequently used page without additional editing through this object This section describes available settings for embedded screen object To embed a screen into the base window in the Project pane drag and drop a window base window window or part window onto the editing area Fa Screen Base Screen fj 1 Base Screen Window fj 1 Window 0 65531 DEC Keypad FBR 65532 HEX Keypad H 65533 ASCI Keypa FBR 65534 FLOAT Keyp Tl Part e eee Line 1 e GH 2 Part fq Text Table Fel Script a Tag E Scheduler 4 Logging 4 Flow Alarm Gy System Alarm Fa History Alarm 1 25 Recipe FE Basic Recipe ES File Recipe a Sound Line 2 The window will be embedded as follows Screen 1 Screen 1 Line 1 234 Fmbedded Line 1 Line 2 2325 i j l cmoeaded Line 2 General Screen Type e IEC Hy Basic Base Screen C Window Screen C Part Screen lf Goto Screen Screen Number Screen Type Set the type of window to be opened Go to screen Set whether or not to open an existing window Screen Number Set the window number to open Notes e When you insert a base window into another base window Background settings
426. t when you select formats other than binary octal and hexadecimal numbers Use Scaling When a user scales and inputs random values to an established PLC device address this function can be applied Actual PLC values and displayable values differ by data size and display type If the value input by a user exceeds the maximum value the maximum value is input to the device instead If the value input by a user is lower than the minimum value the minimum value is input to the device instead Min of Dev Value Input the minimum device value to allow Max of Dev Value Input the maximum device value to allow Min of Inp Value Input the minimum data value to be displayed at scale Max of Inp Value Input the maximum data value to be displayed at scale For example set the maximum input value and the maximum device value to 1000 and 100 respectively then suppose the actual input value is 2000 W Use Scaling Min of Dev Value S Max of Dev Value 100 Min of Inp Value 0 E gm Max of Inp Value 1000 Any value above the maximum input value is recognized as the maximum value 1000 the device value becomes 100 Likewise if you enter an input value under o the value is recognized as o and the device value becomes o Above the maximum a input value Device maximum value Below the minimum input value 100 20 10 2 1 Device minimum value e The available device value range and
427. ta list object allows you to read consecutive values and display them in a table This section describes available settings for the data list object e Basic The basic settings for data list object include the following 7 Conton Device cate Device vo EE Display Text Size 16bits Case Extended Display Format Numeric Format Unsigned DEC No of Display Digits I No of Decimal Digits 1 Zero Fill Description LSis 900 501 LSIs Control Device Specify the following options for the control device Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Set the data size of the device 16 bit or 32 bit If you change the data size of an existing object the conditional statement will be deleted Display Format Set the display format Numeric Format No of Display Digits No of Decimal Digits Zero Fill Set the number format Signed decimal Unsigned decimal Octal Hexadecimal Binary BCD or float Set how many digits to display up to 64 If the number of digits is less than the capacity of the device empty spaces are filled with placeholders If the device value N M m n cannot be displayed in BCD format it is expressed as Set how many plac
428. ta to CS file Number of backup data in CSV file 1024 Cea ssh _ Storage for Set a storage area for logging backup data Backup Data Use Ring Set this option to overwrite logging data when the storage area is Buffer full Otherwise logs cannot be saved even if the condition is met Overwriting occurs from the oldest file 195 LSIs Storage location is shifted and the logging data is recorded from the first space Logging data n This option cannot be used in conjunction with the Auto backup if area full option Do Not Clear Set to retain logging data when data is backed up to the area Log Area at specified in the project properties When logging data is backed up Backup the data in the internal memory is deleted However some specific objects such as the logging trend object need to retain data even though it is backed up At this time set this option to retain the data If you set this option the logging area setting is changed to Use Ring Buffer automatically Auto Backupif Set to back up logging data automatically when the storage area for Area Full logging data is full This option cannot be used in conjunction with the Use ring buffer option When the storage for logging data is full it is backed up to the specified location After backup the data is deleted and then the new data is saved from the first space 196 197 Logging data1 Logging
429. taneously in the same second additional index information will be added at the end of filename 5 6 1 4 Path for Memo Backup e Adirectory named Memo will be created in the USB CF SD storage directory e A subdirectory named by Year Month will be created in the Memo directory e The rest of the directory structure is the same as the logging backup file structure e Memo back up files use hour minute and second information as their file name The backup files will be created in bitmap format The filenames will begin with M representing Memo and the rest of the name will contain hour minute and second index information If backup files are created simultaneously in the same second additional index information will be added at the end of the filename 5 6 1 5 Path for Movie Records Backup e Adirectory named Movie will be created in the USB CF SD storage directory e Recorded movie clips will be saved in the Movie directory e Movie clip backup files will use hour minute and second information as their filename Backup files will be created in AVI format The codec used for Video is H 264 and for Audio is Mp3 The filenames will begin with MOV representing Movie and the rest of the name will contain hour minute and second index information Movie clip files can hold up to 1000 files and the number of files can be set in XP Builder s special device configuration
430. that you specify To search for both device address and tags click the check box next to Find All Addresses Tags e To locate a range of addresses set the range in the Range Search field By default the range is 1 which returns a single device address You can also renumber addresses automatically replace in a range from a specified starting point for as many devices as you specify in the Range Search 120 2 Project Development 2 5 6 2 Finding and Replacing All Devices To find all objects of a particular type at once 1 Click an object to select it and then click Tool Find Replace All The current object s address is shown in the Find All window Find what i Word lv E Find all Replace Dewi E Device coun 5 Close M Display in Find Result 2 Il Include used tag Find at gt gt 2 Click object types and enter the original device address to find in the Find What field The entire project is selected by default Device count Display in Find Result 2 er v aa H Project Property E 4 Screen Flow Alarm Z Schedule l Sound Project Property rir 121 LSIs 3 Click Find All The output window shows the results of the search You can double click a column to view details about the objects Device Address Tag Name Position Object Type Description PO100 B 1 GBOO001 Graph Bar Main PO100 B 1 GPOQO001 Graph Pie Main P0100 B 1 D0
431. the device value meets multiple conditions the display settings will be based on the first condition met Up 351 Click to create a new range condition You can create up to eight conditions Clicking this button opens the Range Edit window which allows you to create a condition For more information refer to lt 4 2 1 3 Understanding Constants and DataTypes gt Click a condition and then click this icon to delete the condition Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higher in the list Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lower in the list 4 Reference e Operation The operation settings for numeric input objects include the following General M Use Input Script Basic kmit Sont No Display Eo Teg I Use Display Script pu Case Display Script No Display Case Input Script Name Use Input Script Set whether or not to use a script for numeric input Input Script No Select a script for numeric input Use Display Script Set whether or not to use a script for numeric display Display Script No Select a script for numeric display Input Script Name Expresses the most recent selected script contents LSis 352 353 es e Input Script Process Input values by user Mo Input value lt maximum Input value gt mininnurn Execute the script using the Input value Checkthe script result value and input condition Writ
432. the A S center LS Is 570 5 2 5 Checking CF Card You can check CF card information including folder name total space used and available memory To view CF card information touch CF Card Diagnostics Screen O Touch P Backup Memory OD Flash Memory OD CF Card OSD Card USB Memory Goto MainMenu HMIManager F Card Spec Folder Mame Storage Card Total Space 244 59 MBytes Used Space 116 02 MBytes Available Space 128 57 MBytes Write Operation SUCCESS 0 When the CF card is inserted and a ReadDisk Information Error message is displayed reinsert the card If the error message repeats contact the A S center _571 LSis 5 2 6 Checking Serial Port This function allows you to diagnose the serial ports connected to the XGT Panel In order to diagnose the serial ports a loop back terminal should be connected to each port To check the serial ports 1 Touch Serial Diagnostics Screen O Touch P Backup Memory O Flash Memory OSD Card USB Memory 2 Select a port and touch Test Serial Diagnostics COM PLC RS232C PLC RS232C PLI_ RSt6a 422 Review the test result HMIManager OK AN COM Test OK Goto MainMenu LS Is 572 Notes e Connect the loop back terminal to the RS232C port as shown below Connect pin2 to pin3 e Connect RS485 422 ports as
433. the XGT Panel close any open programs 3 Touch and hold the screen to open the menu 4 Touch Settings gt PC Conn Setting 5 In RS232 Baud Rate select a baud rate Nore Only XP series panels have RS232 ports Serial ports are not available on iXP series panels 6 In XP Builder select Communication gt Send gt Settings gt RS232C Communication Settings USB Ethernet ActiveSync Connect Type Details COM port Baud rate 7 Select the same baud rate that you set on the XGT Panel If the transfer rates do not match the transfer will fail Details COM port com i Baud rate 115200 8 Select the serial port that is connected to the XGT Panel The COM port number must be the same as the one used by your computer for the RS 232C connection To set the port number on your computer open the Control Panel locate the Device Manager and modify the Ports COM amp LPT settings 2 6 1 2 Using an Ethernet Connection An Ethernet connection is typically much faster than a serial connection so using Ethernet is highly recommended To use an Ethernet connection 1 Connect a computer and an XGT Panel to a network with Ethernet cables You can also use a cross cable connection if a network is unavailable The IP addresses of the XGT Panel and the connected computer must be in the same Subnet mask For more details refer to lt 5 1 5 Ethernet settings gt 2 O
434. the rear panel of the XGT Panel e Use the following standard power socket Below 6 00mm Below 6 00mm e Cable size for power lead and protective grounding cables is between 1 5 mm AWG16 and 2 5 mm AWG12 Notes e For installations where there is voltage drop it is recommended to use stranded wire with a cross sectional area greater than 2 0 mm e tis recommended that cable connections are twisted and secure Short cable runs are also recommended between the point of supply and the XGT panel e For safety reasons it is recommended that you use color coded outer sheaths on the conductors to aid safe terminations Follow local regulations when making electrical connections 616 e Connect the power supply as shown below Power Supply DC Power Supply Ground i a Connection ee G s O S A z SS n AC Power Supply M EA a aa Ground Connection Notes e Usea regulated power supply transformer when the power fluctuation is bigger than the standard e If electromagnetic interference is experienced or expected use an insulation transformer to protect the XGT Panel from interference 617 LSis e Separate the power source for the XGT Panel power input and output device and the power device as shown below XGT Panel Power Ma XGT Panel Main Power Regulated power supply transformer 2 G _hnput Output Device I
435. time expires the user must enter the password again to use the object Action Delay Set to delay the action triggered by the switch by a specified time Type Set the type of action delay On Delay When the switch is activated the action is performed after the delay time that you specify Press Twice When the switch is activated once a dialog box is invoked to allow the user to verify the operation When the switch is activated a second time the action is performed after the delay time that you specify Offset in Write Operation Set to use the offset function Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary 299 e Action Condition The action condition settings for change screen switch objects include the following Change Screen Switch If Use Action Condition j Extended e Detail pa ae z E Bit On Bit OF Range Multi Bit Device Device Range Size 1 Gbits z Unsigned DEC j0 NOP 0 Mutti Bit No of Bit Device im Cancel Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched o
436. tings Rewind Set to rewind video playback when the switch is activated Set the interval for rewinding in the video player status settings Next File It displays the next or previous movie capture image among the images saved in the storage device To use this function in Previous File the movie player object click Basic Display Camera Capture File Or in the special switch function click Basic gt Movie Player Change Mode gt Camera capture file display If a file order device is set in the Video Player object the applicable file will play If no file order device is set the most recently created video will play Movie Capture Set to capture a still image from a video when the switch is activated Video captures are saved in the MovieStill folder If the video player is in Camera input display or Play recorded file mode a JPG file will be captured A still image cannot be captured while the video is paused or during recording Only one still image can be captured per second If the start time for the section recording is greater than o you cannot play the video and take a screenshot Change Mode Set to change the movie player mode when the switch is activated e Whenever it is pressed change display When you tap the 309 special switch the movie player status changes Camera input display gt Video capture image display gt Recorded file play e Video display The recorded
437. tion Recording Screen Size Select a screen size for the recorded file Recording Frame Rate Set the number of frames per second to record Recording Bit Rate Set the bit rate Video Input Screen Size Set a screen size for displaying the recording screen Video Capture Screen Size Set a screen size for capturing the screen Recording Settings Set the properties for saving the recorded file Image Settings 35 LSIs Set the properties for recording quality otes e The higher the frame rate and bit rate the higher the quality of video that will be recorded e Bigger recording screen and video input screen sizes and higher frame rates and bit rates may reduce the quality of the video displayed on the XGT Panel e You cannot create other objects on the same screen as a movie player object Doing so may disrupt communication with the XGT Panel e This option is supported only by iXP multimedia type To connect a bar code reader 1 Select Common P Project Property Setting gt Extended Controller Settings 2 Click the checkbox next to Barcode Settings 3 Click Detail Settings and specify the following settings Barcode Option Mx Data bits E Cancel Flow control NONE Data storage Ww SA Parity NONE Stop bit s 1 Ad Read complete device Bytes to Read Set the amount of data to read from the bar code If you leave this settin
438. to forget the password If you forget the password you cannot open the project file 2 Project Development To change a password 1 Click Project gt Project Password 2 Enter the current password in the Old Password field 4 Click Apply To delete a password 1 Click Project gt Project Password LSIs 18 T 2 Enter the current password in the Old Password field Password Setting Old Password Password iii Delete New Password Password Max 12 Chars Confirm Apply 3 Click Delete 2 2 2 Viewing and Editing Properties XP Builder allows you to view and edit general properties for projects To view or edit project properties click Common P Project Property Setting From the Project Property window you can view or edit the following properties Tab Summary Description Basic information for the project file such as the project name and author XGT Panel Settings XGT Panel information and communication methods Screen Settings Window change options Security Settings Permissions for connected XGT Panels Key Window Settings Settings for key windows Language Editing language and runtime language options Storage Settings Destination and backup locations for project components and XGT Panel data Global Script Settings Global options to apply to scripts Auxiliary Settings Options for pr
439. to mount the XGT Panel inside should be specified and allowed for This chapter describes how to construct the panel and mount the XGT Panel in it 5 7 2 1 Building a Panel When you construct the panel the panel cutout dimensions need to be iXP70 TTA X Width 259 0 1 Y Height 201 0 lt Unit mm gt Z Thickness 1 IXP80 TTA 301 5 227 5 1 6 9 5 iXPg0 TTA 383 5 282 5 na na Ee AA BA Ba nE a A E AEA EA EE AA AA AA BA E A E A E AEA Ee E AE A EA AA EA AA BA BA EAE AEA EA EA IA AA RA BA EA EA EA EA EA EE LE RE RE BA EAE AEA EA EA A R E a nen Sh ee er Sh ee er Sh ee er E Sh e Sh ee e Sh re Sh ee e Sh ee ee Sh ee e Sh ee Sh ee ee Sh ee re Sh ee ee Sh ee Sh ee ee Sh ee ee Sh ee ee Sh ee e Sh ee ee Sh ee er Sh ee ee Sh ee er Sh ee ee Sh ee ee Sh ee ee Ch ee Sh ee ee Sh he Sh ee ee Sh ee Sh ee ee Sh ee ee Sh ee ee Sh ee re Sh ee ee Sh ee Sh ee h Sh re Sh ee ee e Sh ee Sh ee ee Sh re Sh ee ee Sh ee Sh ee ee Sh re Sh ee ee e Sh ee Ro eh ee ee ee Sh re Sh ee ee Sh ee Sh ee ee Sh re Sh ee ee e Sh ee Sh ee e Sh ee re Sh ee ee Sh he Sh ee ee Sh ee Sh ee ee Sh ee er Sh ee ee Sh ee e Sh ee ee Sh ee er Sh ee e Sh ee Sh ee ee Ch ee Sh ee ee Sh ee re Sh ee ee S
440. to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the 489 keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you select the range condition specify the range Size ab bitor 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Exp Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions LSiIs 490 4 3 9 History Alarm Viewer Object This section describes available settings for the history alarm viewer object Uccurrence Message Restore Frequency Oa 0d h Ua 0d 25 20l 0d 25 AUT a Ud 25 eUa Ud 25 AUS Dd AURIT Uta Ug Ulaigh AUls U4 25 0ta U45 Ulaigh 20ta 0425 taD 201 045 e Basic The basic settings for history alarm viewer object include the following Alarm History General Alarm Form No of Row 54 Header Text port Oldest f Latest 9 Extended Use Detailed Window Position 5 0 Kads 0 Frame Display Line M Use Line Color Frame Color Plate Color Line Width 1 Initial Fittering Type Restoration Wo Restoration Check Intal Alarm Group Description Alarm Form Set the form of the alarm Set the number of rows to be displayed Sort Set a sort method for the logging data oldest first or newest first Use Detailed Window Position Specif
441. to unique numbers or remove the object with the redundant setting Error Message 2021 You cannot monitor the connected device How to Resolve the Error The specified controller does not support program monitoring Change the function of the special switch or specify a controller that supports program monitoring 2022 You did not set program monitoring Go to Common Project monitoring Device setting and check monitoring The program monitor function has not been set for the object Change the function of the special switch or activate program monitoring in the device settings 2023 This device subject to logging cannot display error type The specified device cannot display logging errors Change the display settings for the object or specify another device 2024 There is more than one list The translated explanation we have doesn t make sense for the message Objects in Trend logging trend and distribution are registered without adding a list Delete the object or add a list 2025 Object or shapes exceed screen area An object or image location is outside the dimensions of the window boundaries Change the object or image location to fit within the window boundaries 2026 Group number is available from 1 to 253 The specified number is beyond the allowable range for a group number Specify a number from 1 to 253 2027 Internal device only Only an inter
442. tput Device Address Tag Name Position Object Type P0100 B 1 GBOOOOL PO100 B 1 GPOOOO1 P0100 B 1 SD00001 POLOO B 1 Sbo0002 POOOOS B 2 SBO0002 POOOD LBOQOO01 30 I A o mmm R 1 COANA i Din i Ma eo Output Find Result 4 Find Result 4 script Find Result 2 5 7 Switching Project Windows Description Graph Bar Main Graph Pie Main Word Switch Word Switch Bit Switch Main Bit Larnp Main i To switch project windows conveniently you can use the Next Previous function This allows you to scroll through windows in order To switch project windows click Tool gt Previous Screen Next Screen You can also click the Next or Previous icons on the toolbar 2 6 Managing a Project Learn about project management functions including transferring data to XGT Panels or removable drivers backing up projects and printing project details 2 6 1 Transferring to an XGT Panel The GUI you design in XP Builder must be transferred to an XGT Panel You can transfer the interface with one of two methods full transfer or modification transfer By default XP Builder determines whether or not a previous version of the project exists on the XGT Panel and then transfers either the entire project or only modified parts of the project accordingly However you can force XP Builder to transfer the full project if desired Before transferring a project you must select a connection method as described in the following sections
443. try the download again Ensure that the download is complete before removing the drive When removing the drive use the Remove Hardware Safely function in the Windows system tray on your computer 172 Eo SSS EE S e Viewing Available Memory Before Sending a Project View the available memory before you send the project file to ensure the file can be transferred successfully You can compare Flash and USB memory capacities to the size of the project file before transferring it as shown below Memory type Case Description Flash memory Downloading Compare the project file size to the entire the whole memory available because the memory will project be erased prior to downloading the project Downloading Compare the project file size to the the revised available memory parts only USB CF Compare the project file size to the available memory memory e Downloading the Entire Project If the available memory on the external device exceeds the size of the project file you can download the entire project e Downloading Only the Revised Parts of a Project Ifthe available memory on the external device does not exceed the size of the project file you must determine if enough memory is available to download only the revised parts Ifyou attempt to transfer a project file when there is insufficient memory the following popup window appears It shows the total memory capacity and the size of the project file XP Builder
444. ttings dime 3 13 17 PM Date Specify the date Click Set to apply your settings to the XGT Panel Time Specify the time Click Set to apply your settings to the XGT Panel Synchronise with PC Time Click to apply the computer s time to the XGT Panel 549 LSIs Trerence E f g f g l j Cc a f wl w i i w 4 y 44 a i e Password The Password tab allows you to specify or delete the password that is required when transferring a project to the XGT Panel General Settings Cock Password Frevious password New password Confim password pooo Maximum 10 characters Previous Password Enter the current password and click Delete to delete it New Password Enter a new password and click Set Confirm Password Re enter the new password and click Set Sis 550 5 1 Configuring System Options This section covers configuring XGT Panel system settings including date and time Ethernet connection backlight and sound To configure the system touch Settings in the XGT Panel main menu as shown below LSIS XGT Panel O Settings O Diagnostics PLC Information O Update XGT Panel Storage Function Ver 1 30 B 001 The configuration screen is displayed System Configuration Backlight Setting Touch Setting Ch DateTime Setting CH Environment Setting P Ethemet Setting H xP Remote Setting H Sound Setting
445. tton to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary 448 449 e Display Trigger The display trigger settings for the closed graph object include the following Graph Ellipse e Use Action Condition Extended T Detail Po a Pa Display Trigger Device Device DO 9 Range Size 16bits Type Unsigned DEC o NOP 0 Multi Bit No of Bit Device 1 Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on Bit Off The action is performed when the device is switched off Ce a Range The action is performed when the value falls within the Opti Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result I apesant Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you select the range condition specify the range Size 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Exp Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits
446. tus from raster vector or user registered images Same Image amp Change Select a vector image You cannot select a raster Color Pattern in On Off image Apply a pattern or color to the image Library Click to select an image from the library In the library list image categories are distinguished by the ends of their names The vector image category ends with _V and the raster image category ends with _R Patterns can be applied only to the images 4 Reference Open Click to browse for images on your computer When you select an image from your computer it will be added to the image library automatically Pattern Click a pattern to apply to the image This option is available only when you select the change color or pattern option in Image Type Patterns are applied to specific parts of objects but not to the frames The frames are different for each image Refer the following examples Pattem FG Color Pattern Frame Pattern Frame Pattem FG Color Pattern a Z 7 Ls sa AEM RNA RE Frame Color Pattern40 Pattern FG Color Set a color for the foreground pattern Pattern BG Color Set a color for the background pattern Frame Color Seta frame color LSis 296 e Text The text settings for screen change object include the
447. tware even when a project file is downloaded Whenever new functions are added or improved you are able to update the XGT Panel To update 1 Inthe XGT Panel main menu touch Update XGT Panel LSIS XGT Panel O PLC Information Update XGT Panel hy Ver 1 30 B 005 The display automatically changes to the update screen as shown below XGT Panel Update Pera don t turn off the prir Pies udite XT Pare LSS 586 To go back to the main menu touch Menu on the bottom right of the screen or touch and hold the screen for approximately 6 seconds 2 Download the update file from the website 3 In XP Builder click Communication XGT Panel Update 4 Click Browse and specify the location for the downloaded update file XGT Panel Update Ethernet 192 168 0 1 2150 Selected XGT Panel file version ver 1 300 B 046 Available XGT Panel to update ver 1 300 ver 10 5 Click Update e When updating XGT Panel software do not turn off the device or disconnect the communication cable as it may interrupt the update and create faults 587 LSIS 5 5 Managing Storage Devices Storage devices for example CF cards or USB drives can be used to download project files from XP Builder and then upload them to your PC or update XGT Panel software If for any reason you are unable to use the serial port or Ethernet connection you can use this function to transfer
448. u must select text for the on and off states from the same text table 317 Text Table Click to open the text table and select text The color and font properties set in the text table will be imported with the text Select From Text Table gt v Language Engish United States x Select a text table na naer and the language a Registered text table list Ko 0 2 c Ss e e 9o lay On lt gt Off Copy Click to copy the text and formatting from the on state to the off state or vice versa Delete On Off Caption Click to clear text settings for the current state Font Select a font from the drop down list Size Set a text size from the drop down list or enter a value directly into the field Width Ratio Expand or condense the text by selecting a ratio from the drop down list or entering a value directly in to the field You can set a ratio of 1 600 Change the Property of Text Table Click to use different color and font properties for the text than what is specified in the text table This option is active only when you import text from the text table Color Seta font color Font Style Set a font style bold italic strikeout or underline You can apply more than one option at atime Horizontal Alignment Set the horizontal alignment Left Center or Right Vertical Alignment Set the vertical
449. ude the following Data List Edit S General Fot Tahoma 7 Basic Fort Tahoma Display size 12 Keypad Optio gt Colo a J Extended Font Style Bold ftalic Strikeout Underline Horizontal Alignment C Left Center C Bight Font Select a font from the drop down list Size Set a text size from the drop down list or enter a value directly into the field Color Set a font color Font Style Set a font style bold italic strikeout or underline You can apply more than one option at a time Horizontal Alignment Set the horizontal alignment Left Center or Right 521 e Display Trigger The display trigger settings for the data list editor object include the following Data List Edit General if Use Action Condition Extended T Pa Display Trigger Si f Bit On C Bit OF C Range C Mutt Bit Device Device w EE Range Size 1 bits Type Unsigned DEC lo NOP 0 Multi Bit No of Bit Device Ea Setting Cancel Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify Bit On The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the tog OARS Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of NN aeea D
450. ul when setting the Event recording trigger device Case 1 If the Event recording trigger device is On Bit device after the XGT Panel monitor is turned on and the Event recording time Before has passed the event recording will start when the device is triggered and the duration is based on the Before and After values set in the Event recording time For example f Max file size Recording trigger device Status device Event recording trigger device Event recording time If event recording standby you can not play video files Using this device you can stop the event recording standby OK Cancel With these settings the event recording will occur as follows File 1 0 10 seconds 10 second event File 2 10 20 seconds 10 second event File 3 20 30 seconds 10 second event Case 2 If the Event recording trigger device is turned On Bit device while the XGT Panel monitor is turned on but the Event recording time Before has not passed in this case the event recording starts as soon as the XGT Panel monitor is turned on and the duration is based on the After value set in the Event recording time For the same condition as case 1 the event recording will occur as follows File 1 0 10 seconds 10 second event File 2 10 15 5 second event e Status device values are updated only in the following situations So if you change the value randomly the new value will be reflected While recording
451. umber 1 directory will remain untouched e Look for the earliest date directory in the earliest Year Month directory 602 e Look for the earliest hour directory in the earliest date directory e Delete the earliest backed up files from the earliest hour directory e f more data space is needed repeat the above steps and check available data space e When deleting files if the whole hour directory has been cleared remove the hour directory e When deleting hour directories if a whole date directory has been cleared remove the date directory e When deleting date directories if a whole month directory has been cleared remove the month directory e e fan unreadable directory or file operator file or directory is found leave the directory or file and locate normal backup files e Ifthe current directory contains only operator data it will cause a backup failure The XGT Panel cannot delete operator data therefore it will stop any further action 5 6 3 File Path for Video File and Video Capture File Backup 5 6 3 1 When the File Is Added e If created file name is MOV_120220_121212 avi the directory shown below will be created lt Movie E DB 120220 121212 MOV_120220_121212 avi e If another file name MOV_120220_200101 avi is created it will be added to the directory shown below and will be repeated until it reaches 100 Movie e 120220 121212 MOV_120220_121212 avi MOV_120220_ 200101 avi
452. uous or a single device to monitor No of Alarm Occurred Set a word device to save the number of alarms It shows the total number of alarms that have occurred t Thank you 1 Thank you 2 Background color Set the background color for the flow alarm area Message position Set the position of the flow alarm message Display mode Set the display option for flow alarm changes e Redraw at occurred The alarm message is replaced automatically with a new message e After current display list The alarm message remains on the screen and new or reset alarms will be shown in subsequent messages Flow speed Set the renewal frequency of the flow alarm The lower the number the faster the renewal frequency Move pixel Set the unit for scrolling the flow alarm The larger the number the faster the message scrolls Font size Set the font size for the flow alarm message Device Specify the device to monitor Only bit devices can be monitored by the flow alarm Data type Set the data type for the flow alarm device If set to read only only the current bit device can be registered as the alarm device Bit Condition Set the condition for alarm occurrence Text Table Name Specify a text table where the flow alarm message is stored Text Index Specify a text string in the text table to use for the flow alarm message Preview A preview of the flow alarm message is shown 208 Notes e Up to
453. ur computer it will be added to the image library automatically Pattern Click a pattern to apply to the image This option is available only when you select the change color or pattern option in Image Type Patterns are applied to specific parts of objects but not to the frames The frames are different for each image Refer the following examples Pattem FG Color Pattern Frame Pattern Frame Pattem FG Color Pattern of see F H aaa ee aes H 7 z Frame ae E Open Pattern40 Pattern FG Color Set a color for the foreground pattern Pattern BG Color Set a color for the background pattern Frame Color Seta frame color LSis 288 e Text The text settings for word switch objects include the following Word Switch General I Use Caption From Text Table Basic on o Font ip t Tahoma 7 a Delete On Caption Size 12 Width Ratio 100 i __On0FF Copy H E Font Style Bold talic Strikeout Underline Horizontal Alignment C Left Cente C Right Vertical Alignment f Top Middle Bottom Cos Use Caption Click the checkbox to use a text caption with the object When you select this option you can input text from a Text Table On Click to configure options for the object in the
454. ut field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Size 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Click to designate the expression as conditional Use Lamp Offset Click to set an offset for the lamp 292 e Action Condition The action condition settings for word switch objects include the following Word Switch General Extended W Use Action Condition Ty Detail pa 3 ae 7 ee Lamp Condition Bit On Bit OF Range Mutti Bit Device Range Size i bits Unsigned DEC Multi Bit No of Bit ie 15 Cancel Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on Bit Bito The action is The action is performed when the device is switched off when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the en Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result of EM apean O Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range
455. val switch is turned on while playing the video the switch will be turned off when the file was played in its entirety 938 4 4 Using Program Monitor The Program Monitor allows you to check the status of the system and diagnose PLC errors 4 4 1 About Program Monitor The Program Monitor works with PLCs that support the monitoring function as described in lt 4 4 1 1 PLCs that Support Monitoring gt The function shows the ladder diagrams for each PLC that can be monitored as described in lt 4 4 1 2 The Program Monitor Window gt 4 4 1 1 PLCs that Support Monitoring You can only monitor PLCs that use the ladder diagram LD language If a program uses the IL language it will be converted to LD for display in the Program Monitor window The following table describes PLC types manufactured by LSIS that support monitoring Maximum Program Capacity Steps XGK XGK CPUA 32K XGK CPUE 16K XGK CPUH 64K XGK CPUS 32K XGK CPUU 128K XGB XGB DR16C3 10K XGB XBCH 15K XGB XBMS 10K EEA Refer to the PLC s user manual to determine the supported connection types device sizes and properties 539 4 4 1 2 The Program Monitor Window The basic Program Monitor window appears below analog_set G30 Steps 0 XGK CPUHIR ly Py cTuTEtE mri Aan a L Ls F ue ul ul K L L ul F hl U U H a hi L ul ul ai U U H 1 Pa a Per E TEE ka vi ul iu t ul uF KO0005 MOOO03M00004 Ko0012 HH HHH rH
456. variables 242 243 LSiIs The wrong type was entered when a value other than 20 Memory Error the declared variable was entered 4 2 3 5 Understanding String Functions The following table describes properties for the string functions Parameters Strcat Add original text behind bool Whether or not target text When the target the string is added E E E Parameter 1 char pszDst The JP g target string the is bigger than the character address of the type s variable the string is character type s not added false is GGL Parameter 2 char pszSrc The returned source string the address of the character type s Example variable char szSrc 10 12345 szDst 10 abcd Strcat amp szDst amp szSrc The value of szDst is abcd12345 strcmp Compare two texts and if Return value int Return the result they are the same return o of the comparison E le e Negative KANPIS pszString1 lt char szStr 10 12345 pszString2 char szStr2 10 12345 e 0 Same string e Positive int nResult pszStringa gt nResult Strcmp amp szStra1 pszString2 amp szStr2 Parameter 1 char pszDst The target string the The value of nResult is o address fthe character type s variable Parameter 2 char pszSrc The source string the address of the character type s variable Strcpy Copy text from the source string to the target string If Return value bo
457. vice is switched off when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the seeienaianiaal Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation result IN ameen o Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary Range If you select the range condition specify the range Size 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 408 4 3 6 2 Word Part This section describes available settings for bit part objects e Basic The basic settings for word part objects include the following Word Part General gt Case Operation Extended Control Device Device y EE size 16bits Type Unsigned DEC hi Screen Type Display Part Screen Pat Screen Storage Image fe ied eo Placement iw Top Let Center C Top Right C Bottom Right Bottom Left O B Unsigned DEC Storage Image Setting Width 320 Storage Path CF Card iz Height I Image Type BMP Moving Pixel 70 Description F Control Device Devic
458. vided by a general program editor e Debugging by verifying grammatical errors in scripts e Using a protocol driver to transfer via a controller Scripts are executed as shown in the following table Script Type Execution Method Global When the script conditions are met it controls or manages windows in the project Display Change When the current window is closed and before a new window is opened Local Settings e When the script conditions set in the current window are met e Set the scripts only for the window Scheduler At the specified time Objects Based on the action defined for the object only in the current window 218 219 ees e The timeout for scripts is 5 seconds of communication between the PLC and the XGT Panel It is recommended that you do not use scripts that require longer than 5 seconds to execute e If communication fails script execution will stop e Ifthe script attempts to perform an illegal operation e g dividing by o script execution will stop If an error occurs during script execution statements after the point where the error occurred will be skipped If an ERROR control statement is inserted into the script and an error occurs any statements from that point on will be attempted as shown in the illustration below If no ERROR control statement is inserted into the script and an error does not occur none of the statements after the control statement will be executed i 4 Copy
459. w Switch Object Operation condition Lamp condition Word Lamp Image and text properties Word Message Image color Image background color Text color Text Numeric Input Numeric Display Image background color Text color Flashing Word Window The window number to move Word Part The part number move Bar Graph The background color to be filled The color to be filled Pie Graph The background color to be filled The color to be filled Meter Graph The pointer color Closed Graph The background color to be filled The color to be filled To set a conditional expression click in the object property window to register it 255 LSIS 4 Reference The Range Edit window will appear as shown below The window may look different for each object b Style Select a format for inputting conditional expressions 2 terms or 3 terms a Preview Expressions Preview the conditional expression b Operand Set the operand and operator to set the range Constant Set the number directly for the operand V Pivot Device Set the pivot device value that the object is monitoring as the operand Other Device Set the other device value as the operand LSis 256 20 4 3 1 Lamp Objects Lamp objects change shape or form based on the state of the PLC devices that they are connected to Lamp objects come in three types bit lamps word lamps and N state lamps Bit lam
460. w you can also specify network settings if necessary Size Set the data size for the device 16 bit or 32 bit Type Set the data type for the device signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Case List Create delete or reorganize conditional expressions 44 Create Click to create a new range condition You can create up to eight conditions Clicking this button opens the Range Edit window which allows you to create a condition For more information refer to lt 4 2 1 3 Understanding Constants and DataTypes gt Delete Click a condition and then click this icon to delete the condition a Up Click a condition and then click this icon to move it higher in the list Down Click a condition and then click this icon to move it lower in 263 a Description Enter a description for the object e Display The display settings for word lamp objects include the following Word Lamp q General Transparent BG Image Basic State Defaut gt Image Type gt E 37e Default Not Change Color Paitem Text Blink Not Use C Same Image 4 Change Color Pattem Operation Extended Transparent BG Image Click the checkbox to make the image background transparent You cannot use a transparent background and the reverse image setting at the same time State Select a state from the drop down list to configure options for the option in each state Blink Set
461. will appear in the device field Device T _XP_VNC_INTERLOCK f es e When you enter a new tag name or new tag you can register a new tag e Changing the type of a tag bit or word can cause errors To delete a tag 1 Select tags in the tag table No Group Name _ Device Type a Address 1 BIT Default Linel A T Tree E ee Line3 WORD Pooo4 2 Press the Delete key on the keyboard To import a file of tags from the XGsooo 1 Right click a tag group 2 Click Import XG5000 Variable E Tag Group Default New Group Delete Rename Copy corl e i Paste Ctrl V Import XG5000 Variable 4 Reference 3 Click and open a file of tag data csv Look in E Desktop d fea Hm Documents iy My Computer Emy Network Places File name New PLC csv F Files of type esv File csv Cancel GD NewPLC EI scan Program Lamp i ee 7 Switch 7 Valuel Va lue2 Values Valued Yalued File path C Documents and Settings Whjpark3 Desktop WNewPLC csv This will create a new tag group NewPLC B 1 Tag 1 aes NewPLC NewProgram Lamp BIT POGODI E re ae e F pea TT eel AOIS ooa e ce re cc a ee e stcce aes RT ee ee EE ee So Ss RR nnn nnn E iat a g ae g Se ee A eee NlewELE NewPragram Values WEB Boga ee ee eee ee ae Newic A E neste A E sec PN T AAE E ONE AA N
462. will not be applied Set scripts cannot be used The inserted base window cannot be imported from another base window to itself The same number base window cannot be inserted You can also insert the base window into another base window by dragging it When you try to insert a base window that is already embedded in another base window the embedded window is not inserted Only the base window itself is inserted 932 4 3 18 Memo Pad Object This section describes available settings for the memo pad object e Basic The basic settings for the memo pad object include the following General d W Storage Confirm lv Extended Pen Pen Width 14 Pen Color a Display lw Plate Color jw Use Border Border Color Border Width Description Storage Confirm Set whether or not to use a device to view current memo status Enter the device address in the field or click the icon to the right of the field to specify a device address The first three bits of the device address specify the function of the memo pad OO Indicates the status of the object on in active mode off in non active mode 01 Shows whether or not the memo was saved successfully 02 Shows whether or not the memo was deleted successfully Pen Set the pen options Set the pen width 1 to 30 Set the pen color 533 LSIs n 4 Reference Display Set the display options Description Enter a descr
463. window will be invoked in the same resolution as when it is downloaded to an XGT Panel e f media player object is edited in iXP TTM model the object is not displayed on the simulator e Only one simulator can be run at a time If you re running the simulator you can t execute another one e The size of simulator window may vary according to the set XGT Panel size 110 2 Verify operations by clicking or selecting objects and activating functions in the interface As shown in the following example you can input the value virtually and review the operation via the simulation The simulator interface includes the following functions XP_Simulator File Tool Help File Exit End the simulation and close the window Tool Virtual Device Start Start or end device monitoring For more information refer to lt 2 5 2 Inputting Simulated Data gt Screen Capture Capture an image of the current screen Help XP_Simulator Information A 111 View the current version information 2 5 2 Inputting Simulated Data Learn how to create the simulated data and change the value to check the process 2 5 2 1 Monitoring Devices Use the simulator to generate sample data that you can use to monitor devices 1 Click Tool gt Simulation 2 Inthe simulator click Tool Virtual Device Start Fj XP_Simulator File Tool Help Virtual Device Start Screen Capture Devi
464. wnload the file from the LSIS website http eng sis biz support download Select an installation language Chinese Simplified English or Korean Follow the instructions in the installation wizard to complete the installation 1 2 2 Updating XP Builder To check the version of your XP Builder software click Help gt About XP Builder To update XP Builder refer to the LSIS website http eng sis biz support download eee You can update an XGT Panel automatically in XP Builder version 1 30 If you use a version lower than 1 24 you must update the XGT Panel manually 1 3 Interface and Features XP Builder offers a wide range of customizable options that allow you to efficiently create and manage projects This section describes the XP Builder interface and explains how to customize it to suit your needs 1 3 1 The XP Builder Interface The XP Builder interface is similar to that of many Windows based programs You can customize the interface by selecting various toolbar and window options as described in lt 1 3 2 Controls and Options gt Joey E pod Edt yow Common Joo Communkation 5 et PD BD Aa 3 6 25 Toolbars alone AE Editing area TEE TTIR 5 Engish United TEES 28 FF ee aTi tr Spouse Deke Setlng oa een _ B z Sj Sow Screen m B Switch Vwi e p J I Uase Screen w Word Switch a Window 65531 se Change Scr
465. ws the previous device value along the X axis and the next device value along the Y axis and displays dot or value where the two coordinates intersect You must designate a minimum and maximum value for the axes M0001 M0003 M0002 M0000 Scatter Basic Setting Specify the following options for the scatter chart Group ID The logging group No to be displayed can be established among 1 32 You can fix the logging group number from Logging in the Project pane To add a new item to logging scatter chart input logging group number to logging group window and press the Enter key If a new item is added the screen for logging group number is added to the next row and you can also add another item up to 20 To delete the item select the number of item and press the Delete key Start Device It displays a starting device that is applicable to input logging group number Register the start device from the Logging in the Project pane Each control device data is 473 E initialized as o after completing each operation It sets the data type of device It displays the size of device to be logged The value established at logging of common data is applied to the size of logging device and you cannot set it up Description Enter a description for the object e Max Min The maximum and minimum value settings for the logging scatter graph object include the following Logging Scatter General Basic d Line and Dot
466. xt settings for word message objects include the following f General Select Text Table Basic Display zy v Case Operation r Tahoma 4 9 Extended fl ioe Size 14 ng Blink pee Font Style E E E E Horizontal AignmentiH C Left Vertical Alignment v C Top Select Text Table Select a text table for specifying message text Text Table Click to open the text table and select text The color and font properties set in the text table will be imported with the text Delete All Message Delete any existing messages assigned to the object Font Select a font from the drop down list Size Set a text size from the drop down list or enter a value directly into the field Change the Property of Text Table Click to use different color and font properties for the text than what is specified in the text table This option is active only when you import text from the text table Color Seta font color Blink Set a blink speed for the object The object will not blink The object will blink every three seconds Normal The object will blink every two seconds The object will blink every second Font Style Set a font style bold italic strikeout or underline You can apply more than one option at atime Horizontal Alignment Set the horizontal alignment Left Center or Right 339 Vertical Alignment Set the vertical alignment Top Middl
467. y 4 2 2 6 Creating Object Scripts 1 Create a script as described in 4 2 2 1 or 4 2 2 2 2 Create an object For more information about creating objects refer to lt 2 3 4 Inserting Figures or Objects gt After creating an object the Properties window will appear for the object 3 Click Operation in the Properties window 4 Click the check box next to Use Script Word Lamp General ice Scr Basic ee ai Display select Script Script _0000 l Text Script gy Operation Copyright c 2004 2006 Extended All rights reserved Visit us http wwew Isis biz ERROR i 235 5 Selecta script 6 Click OK ee e Scripts cannot be applied to all types of objects If a script cannot be applied to the object the function will not be available in the Properties window e Ifyou delete a script that is applied to objects in your project an error will occur during the data check 4 2 2 7 Editing Scripts To find part of a script 1 With the script tab open in the editing area click Tool Find in Active Screen Common Tool Communication Window Toolbox Help I 42 amp Ps Cross Reference D mE y Find in ame ae Ctrl F _ G Replace in Active screen CtrHR SI l rind Replace Al a Korear amp Memory Statistics Data Check V les Script Check Find All Script B Register object caption to TextTable automtically tion Setting ze Setting 4 Prev
468. y 2 to 64 Use Data Byte Swap Set to change output data into word form 385 LSIs e Display Type Set the display type Device Value Use the value from the device address set in the Basic settings Input Value Input Max Value Input Min Value Display the value entered with the keypad on the current screen If you set this option you cannot use the Device Display Format and Use Data Byte Swap options Display the maximum value entered with the keypad on the current screen If you set this option you cannot use the Device Display Format and Use Data Byte Swap options Display the minimum value entered with the keypad on the current screen If you set this option you cannot use the Device Display Format and Use Data Byte Swap options The range of the maximum and minimum input values differ by device size and the shape of the object generated by the pop up keypad Furthermore if the input condition is set the maximum and minimum values also differ depending on the ranges of the input condition Description Enter a description for the object ees e Spaces are counted in the number of bytes allowed for text input e 16 bit word devices allow entry of double byte characters e The starting address of the specified reference device is the memory location for text input The amount of text that can be input is the same as the volume of the memory location 386 4 Reference
469. y reading the word value unsigned 16 bit from the device Enter the device address manually or click the keyboard to the right of the device field Block No Specify a word device that the data will be transferred to when the condition is met The recipe is executed by reading the word value unsigned 16 bit from the device This option can be used only with basic recipes Enter the device address manually or click the keyboard to the right of the device field Recipe Type Specify the device that will control the recipe type If the lowest bit of the device is o a basic recipe will be executed If the lowest bit of the device is 1 a file recipe will be executed Enter the device address manually or click the keyboard to the 204 205 right of the device field Basic recipe Storage Set a storage location for data from a basic recipe Flash CF Card USB or SD card File recipe Storage Set a storage location for data from a file recipe CF card USB or SD card Backup Data Set the storage for the backup data file to be saved You can Storage designate CF card USB storage or SD card Complete Device Specify a bit device to turn on when data transfer is complete Enter the device address manually or click the keyboard to the right of the device field Error Device Specify a bit device to turn on when a problem occurs with the data transfer Enter the device address manually or click the keyboard to
470. y the location of the details window Frame Display Specify options for the frame of the alarm viewer Line Set the color and width of the line 491 Initial Filtering Type Click the checkboxes to select the types of filters to use for the alarm data e Restoration Set to show history data for restored alarms Occurrence Group Restore Frequency 2013 04 08 Message 2013 04 08 Message 201370408 Message 3 e No Restoration Set to show history data for unrestored alarms Occurrence Group Restore Check Frequency 2013 04 06 Message Group 2013 04 08 Message 2 Group 2013 04 08 Message 3 Groups e Check Set to show history data for checked alarms Occurrence Group Restore Frequency 2013 04 08 Message Group 2013 04 08 2013 04 08 Message z Group 2015 04 08 21 3 04 08 Message 3 Groups 2015 0408 e Uncheck Set to show history data for unchecked alarms Occurrence Group Restore Check Frequency 2013 04 05 Message Groupi 201 5 04 08 Message 2 Groupe 201370408 Message 3 Groups 492 493 e Initial Alarm Group Set to show history data for a specific alarm group After clicking the checkbox select an alarm group from the drop down list If you select an alarm navigator group history data for all alarms will be shown Occurrence Group Restore Check Frequency 2013 04 08 Message Group 2013 04 08 U1 5 04 06 Message Group e015
471. ype Unsigned DEC o NOP 0 Mutti Bit kube meses Use Action Condition Set whether or not to specify a condition for the action Type Set a type of condition to specify The action is performed when the device is switched on The action is performed when the device is switched off Range The action is performed when the value falls within the Orage R Multi Bit The action is performed when the logical operation IAN settee o Device Enter a device or tag address directly in the input field or click the keyboard button to the right to specify a device or tag address When you click the keyboard button to open the Device window you can also specify network settings if necessary 458 459 Range If you select the range condition specify the range Size 16 bit or 32 bit Signed decimal unsigned decimal BCD or float Exp Click to designate the expression as conditional Multi Bit If you select the multi bit condition specify the number of bits and click Setting to specify the bit conditions 4 3 8 6 Logging Trend Graph The following sections describe available options for logging trend graph objects 4 Reference e Basic The basic settings for the logging trend graph object include the following General gt Display Reference Line Upper Lower Limit Value nl C Device Upper Value 100 Constant Lower Value Constant L ue B Logging Group 1 Di

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

自 動 巻 取 り 装 置  HP LaserJet P4010 and P4510 Series Printers User Guide  取扱説明書・レシピ集  MBAIFORMS – GBBR FORMS ON THE INTERNET  KMR 1250 B  Tivizen DVB-T  自転車収納スタンド バイクピット3 取扱説明書  SFLM Installation Guide  T'nB CSSTVI headphone  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file